DCS800

Firmware manual
DCS800 Drives (20 to 5200 A)
 3

Safety instructions
What this chapter contains
This chapter contains the safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, the motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the unit.

To which products this chapter applies

This chapter applies to the DCS800... Size D1 to D7 and field exciter units
DCF80x.

Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual: warnings and
notes. Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or
death and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the
danger. Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on
a subject. The warning symbols are used as follows:

Dangerous voltage warning warns of high

voltage which can cause physical injury and/or
damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other
than those caused by electricity, which can result
in physical injury and/or damage to the
equipment.
Electrostatic discharge warning warns of
electrostatic discharge which can damage the
equipment.

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 4

Installation and maintenance work

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death.

Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive.
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when main power is
applied.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least
1 Mohm) that:
1. Voltage between drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and
the frame is close to 0 V.
2. Voltage between terminals C+ and D- and the frame is
close to 0 V.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the
drive or to the external control circuits. Externally supplied control
circuits may cause dangerous voltages inside the drive even when
the main power on the drive is switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive
or drive modules.
• When reconnecting the motor cable, always check that the C+ and
D- cables are connected with the proper terminal.
Note:
• The motor cable terminals on the drive are at a dangerously high
voltage when the input power is on, regardless of whether the
motor is running or not.
• Depending on the external wiring, dangerous voltages (115 V,
220 V or 230 V) may be present on the terminals of relay outputs
SDCS-IOB-2 and RDIO.
• DCS800 with enclosure extension: Before working on the drive,
isolate the whole drive from the supply.

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 5

WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain components sensitive to

electrostatic discharge. Wear a grounding wrist band when handling
the boards. Do not touch the boards unnecessarily.

Grounding
These instructions are intended for all who are responsible for the
grounding of the drive. Incorrect grounding can cause physical injury,
death or equipment malfunction and increase electromagnetic
interference

• Ground the drive, motor and adjoining equipment to ensure

personnel safety in all circumstances, and to reduce
electromagnetic emission and pick-up.
• Make sure that grounding conductors are adequately sized as
required by safety regulations.
• In a multiple-drive installation, connect each drive separately to
protective earth (PE).
• Minimize EMC emission and make a 360° high frequency
grounding of screened cable entries at the cabinet lead-through.
• Do not install a drive with EMC filter on an ungrounded power
system or a high resistance-grounded (over 30 ohms) power
system.
Note:
• Power cable shields are suitable for equipment grounding
conductors only when adequately sized to meet safety regulations.
• As the normal leakage current of the drive is higher than 3.5 mA
AC or 10 mA DC (stated by EN 50178, 5.2.11.1), a fixed protective
earth connection is required.

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 6

Fibre optic cables

WARNING! Handle the fibre optic cables with care. When unplugging
optic cables, always grab the connector, not the cable itself. Do not
touch the ends of the fibres with bare hands as the fibre is extremely
sensitive to dirt. The minimum allowed bend radius is 35 mm (1.4 in.).

Mechanical installation
These notes are intended for all who install the drive. Handle the unit
carefully to avoid damage and injury.

• DCS800 sizes D4...D7: The drive is heavy. Do not lift it alone. Do

not lift the unit by the front cover. Place units D4 and D5 only on its
back.

DCS800 sizes D5...D7: The drive is heavy. Lift the drive by the
lifting lugs only. Do not tilt the unit. The unit will overturn from a tilt
of about 6 degrees.
• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive when
installing. Electrically conductive dust inside the unit may cause
damage or lead to malfunction.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
• Do not fasten the drive by riveting or welding.

Operation
These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation of the drive
or operate the drive. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury
or death or damage the equipment.

• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure
that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation
throughout the speed range provided by the drive. The drive can
be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the
base speed.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions of the Standard
Application Program if dangerous situations can occur. When
activated, these functions will reset the drive and resume operation
after a fault.
• Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device
(disconnecting means); instead, use the control panel keys
and , or commands via the I/O board of the drive.

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 7

• Mains connection
You can use a disconnect switch (with fuses) in the power supply
of the thyristor power converter to disconnect the electrical
components of the unit from the power supply for installation and
maintenance work. The type of disconnect used must be a
disconnect switch as per EN 60947-3, Class B, so as to comply
with EU regulations, or a circuit-breaker type which switches off
the load circuit by means of an auxiliary contact causing the
breaker's main contacts to open. The mains disconnect must be
locked in its "OPEN" position during any installation and
maintenance work.
• EMERGENCY STOP buttons must be installed at each control
desk and at all other control panels requiring an emergency stop
function. Pressing the STOP button on the control panel of the
thyristor power converter will neither cause an emergency motor
stop, nor will the drive be disconnected from any dangerous
potential.
To avoid unintentional operating states, or to shut the unit down in
case of any imminent danger according to the standards in the
safety instructions it is not sufficient to merely shut down the drive
via signals "RUN", "drive OFF" or "Emergency Stop" respectively
"control panel" or "PC tool".
• Intended use
The operating instructions cannot take into consideration every
possible case of configuration, operation or maintenance. Thus,
they mainly give such advice only, which is required by qualified
personnel for normal operation of the machines and devices in
industrial installations.

If in special cases the electrical machines and devices are in-

tended for use in non-industrial installations - which may require
stricter safety regulations (e.g. protection against contact by
children or similar) -, these additional safety measures for the
installation must be provided by the customer during assembly.
Note:
• When the control location is not set to Local (L not shown in the
status row of the display), the stop key on the control panel will not
stop the drive. To stop the drive using the control panel, press the
LOC/REM key and then the stop key .

Safety instructions

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 8

Table of contents

Safety instructions 3
What this chapter contains..........................................................................................................3
To which products this chapter applies .......................................................................................3
Use of warnings and notes .........................................................................................................3
Installation and maintenance work..............................................................................................4
Grounding........................................................................................................................5
Mechanical installation ................................................................................................................6
Operation ....................................................................................................................................6
Table of contents 8

Chapters not yet available 14

Introduction to this manual......................................................................................14
Start-up ......................................................................................................................14
Firmware description................................................................................................14
General .......................................................................................................................14
Firmware handling.......................................................................................................14
Drive logic ...................................................................................................................14
Speed reference selection ..........................................................................................14
Speed ramp.................................................................................................................14
Speed actual selection ................................................................................................14
Speed controller ..........................................................................................................14
Torque reference.........................................................................................................14
Torque selection..........................................................................................................14
Torque limitation..........................................................................................................14
Armature current control .............................................................................................14
Armature current measurement and motor data .........................................................14
EMF and flux control ...................................................................................................14
Field current control ....................................................................................................14
Field current measurement .........................................................................................14
Shared motion.............................................................................................................14
Field exciter mode.......................................................................................................14
I/O configuration 15
Chapter overview...........................................................................................................15
Digital inputs (DI’s) ....................................................................................................................15
SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2.........................................................................................15
st nd
1 and 2 RDOI-01 ........................................................................................................15
Configuration .................................................................................................................16
Digital outputs (DO’s) ................................................................................................................18
SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2.........................................................................................18
st nd
1 and 2 RDOI-01 ........................................................................................................18
Configuration .................................................................................................................19
Analog inputs (AI’s) ...................................................................................................................21
SDCS-CON-4 ................................................................................................................21

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 9

SDCS-IOB-3 ..................................................................................................................21
st
1 RAIO-01 ....................................................................................................................22
nd
2 RAIO-01....................................................................................................................22
Configuration .................................................................................................................22
Scaling...........................................................................................................................23
Analog outputs (AO’s) ...............................................................................................................25
SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-3.........................................................................................25
st
1 RAIO-01 ....................................................................................................................25
nd
2 RAIO-01....................................................................................................................25
Configuration .................................................................................................................26
Scaling...........................................................................................................................26
Adaptive Program 28
Chapter overview...........................................................................................................28
Compatibility ..................................................................................................................28
Safety instructions .........................................................................................................28
Reader...........................................................................................................................28
Use ................................................................................................................................28
Related publications ......................................................................................................28
What is the Adaptive Program.......................................................................................29
Features ........................................................................................................................29
How to build the program ..............................................................................................30
How to connect the program to the drive application ....................................................30
How to control the execution of the program.................................................................32
Function blocks .........................................................................................................................33
Chapter overview...........................................................................................................33
General rules .................................................................................................................33
Block inputs ...................................................................................................................33
Block input attributes...................................................................................................34
Parameter value as an integer input ...........................................................................35
How the block handles the input .................................................................................35
How to select the input................................................................................................35
Constant as an integer input .......................................................................................36
How to set and connect the input................................................................................36
Parameter value as a boolean input ...........................................................................37
How the block handles the input .................................................................................37
Constant as a boolean input .......................................................................................38
How to set and connect the input................................................................................38
String input ..................................................................................................................38
How to select the input................................................................................................38
Function blocks details..............................................................................................................39
ABS ...............................................................................................................................39
ADD ...............................................................................................................................39
AND ...............................................................................................................................40
Bitwise ...........................................................................................................................40
Bset ...............................................................................................................................41
Compare........................................................................................................................41
Count .............................................................................................................................42
D-Pot .............................................................................................................................42
Event .............................................................................................................................43

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 10

Filter...............................................................................................................................43
Limit ...............................................................................................................................44
MaskSet.........................................................................................................................45
Max................................................................................................................................45
Min.................................................................................................................................46
MulDiv............................................................................................................................46
Not Used........................................................................................................................46
OR .................................................................................................................................47
ParRead ........................................................................................................................47
ParWrite.........................................................................................................................48
PI ...................................................................................................................................48
PI-Bal.............................................................................................................................49
Ramp .............................................................................................................................49
SqWav ...........................................................................................................................50
SR .................................................................................................................................50
Switch-B ........................................................................................................................51
Switch-I..........................................................................................................................51
TOFF .............................................................................................................................52
TON ...............................................................................................................................53
Trigg ..............................................................................................................................54
XOR...............................................................................................................................54
Customer diagrams...................................................................................................................55
Signal and parameter list 56
Signals and parameters ............................................................................................................56
Signals ......................................................................................................................................56
Parameters ...............................................................................................................................58
Group 1..........................................................................................................................61
Physical actual values.................................................................................................61
Group 2..........................................................................................................................64
Speed controller signals..............................................................................................64
Group 3..........................................................................................................................67
Reference actual values..............................................................................................67
Group 4..........................................................................................................................69
Information ..................................................................................................................69
Group 5..........................................................................................................................76
Analog I/O ...................................................................................................................76
Group 6..........................................................................................................................77
Drive logic signals .......................................................................................................77
Group 7..........................................................................................................................81
Control words ..............................................................................................................81
Group 8..........................................................................................................................86
Status / limit words ......................................................................................................86
Group 9..........................................................................................................................91
Fault / alarm words......................................................................................................91
Group 10......................................................................................................................101
Start / stop select ......................................................................................................101
Group 11......................................................................................................................111
Speed reference input...............................................................................................111
Group 12......................................................................................................................116

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 11

Constant speeds .......................................................................................................116

Group 13......................................................................................................................117
Analog inputs ............................................................................................................117
Group 14......................................................................................................................122
Digital outputs ...........................................................................................................122
Group 15......................................................................................................................124
Analog outputs ..........................................................................................................124
Group 16......................................................................................................................126
System control inputs................................................................................................126
Group 19......................................................................................................................128
Data storage..............................................................................................................128
Group 20......................................................................................................................130
Limits.........................................................................................................................130
Group 21......................................................................................................................133
Start / stop.................................................................................................................133
Group 22......................................................................................................................135
Speed ramp...............................................................................................................135
Group 23......................................................................................................................139
Speed reference........................................................................................................139
Group 24......................................................................................................................142
Speed control ............................................................................................................142
Group 25......................................................................................................................148
Torque reference.......................................................................................................148
Group 26......................................................................................................................149
Torque reference handling ........................................................................................149
Group 30......................................................................................................................152
Fault functions...........................................................................................................152
Group 31......................................................................................................................160
Motor 1 temperature..................................................................................................160
Group 34......................................................................................................................161
Control panel display.................................................................................................161
Group 42......................................................................................................................163
Brake control .............................................................................................................163
Group 43......................................................................................................................165
Current control ..........................................................................................................165
Group 44......................................................................................................................171
Field excitation ..........................................................................................................171
Group 45......................................................................................................................175
Field converter settings .............................................................................................175
Group 47......................................................................................................................180
12-pulse operation ....................................................................................................180
Group 49......................................................................................................................181
Shared motion...........................................................................................................181
Group 50......................................................................................................................189
Speed measurement.................................................................................................189
Group 51......................................................................................................................192
Fieldbus.....................................................................................................................192
Group 52......................................................................................................................192
Modbus .....................................................................................................................192
Group 70......................................................................................................................193

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 12

DDCS control ............................................................................................................193

Group 71......................................................................................................................197
Drivebus ....................................................................................................................197
Group 83......................................................................................................................198
Adaptive program control ..........................................................................................198
Group 84......................................................................................................................199
Adaptive program......................................................................................................199
Group 85......................................................................................................................203
User constants ..........................................................................................................203
Group 86......................................................................................................................204
Adaptive program outputs .........................................................................................204
Group 90......................................................................................................................206
Receiving datasets addresses 1 ...............................................................................206
Group 91......................................................................................................................207
Receiving datasets addresses 2 ...............................................................................207
Group 92......................................................................................................................208
Transmit datasets addresses 1 .................................................................................208
Group 93......................................................................................................................210
Transmit datasets addresses 2 .................................................................................210
Group 94......................................................................................................................210
DCSLink control ........................................................................................................210
Group 97......................................................................................................................218
Measurement ............................................................................................................218
Group 98......................................................................................................................223
Option modules .........................................................................................................223
Group 99......................................................................................................................229
Start-up data .............................................................................................................229
DCS800 panel operation 234
Chapter overview.........................................................................................................234
Start-up........................................................................................................................234
Control panel ...............................................................................................................234
Display overview..........................................................................................................235
General display features..............................................................................................235
Output mode................................................................................................................236
Other modes................................................................................................................237
Fault tracing 243
Chapter overview.........................................................................................................243
General........................................................................................................................243
Fault modes ..............................................................................................................243
Converter protection ...............................................................................................................243
Auxiliary undervoltage .................................................................................................243
Armature overcurrent...................................................................................................243
Converter overtemperature / converter fan current .....................................................243
Auto-reclosing (mains undervoltage)...........................................................................244
Mains synchronism......................................................................................................245
Mains overvoltage .......................................................................................................246
Communication loss ....................................................................................................246
Fan, field and mains contactor acknowledge ..............................................................247

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 13

External fault................................................................................................................247
Bridge reversal ............................................................................................................247
Analog input monitor....................................................................................................248
Motor protection ......................................................................................................................249
Armature overvoltage ..................................................................................................249
Residual current ..........................................................................................................249
Measured motor temperature ......................................................................................249
Klixon...........................................................................................................................252
Motor thermal model....................................................................................................252
Field overcurrent..........................................................................................................255
Armature current ripple................................................................................................255
Speed feedback monitor..............................................................................................256
Stall protection.............................................................................................................257
Overspeed protection ..................................................................................................257
Current rise..................................................................................................................257
Field undercurrent .......................................................................................................257
Tacho polarity ..............................................................................................................258
Tacho range ................................................................................................................258
Status messages ....................................................................................................................259
Display of status, fault and alarm signals ....................................................................259
Categories of signals and display options.................................................................259
General messages ......................................................................................................260
Power-up errors (E) .....................................................................................................260
Fault signals (F)...........................................................................................................261
Alarm signals (A) .........................................................................................................274
User defined alarm by Adaptive Program....................................................................281
Appendix A: Firmware structure diagram 283

Appendix B: Index of signals and parameters 287

Index of signals and parameters (alphabetic order)................................................................287

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 14

Chapters not yet available

Introduction to this manual

Start-up

Firmware description
General
Firmware handling
Drive logic
Speed reference selection
Speed ramp
Speed actual selection
Speed controller
Torque reference
Torque selection
Torque limitation
Armature current control
Armature current measurement and motor data
EMF and flux control
Field current control
Field current measurement
Shared motion
I/O configuration_old: Analog and digital I/O
Field exciter mode

Table of contents

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 15

I/O configuration

Chapter overview
The chapter describes the I/O configuration of digital and analog inputs and
outputs with different hardware possibilities.

Digital inputs (DI’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 8 standard DI’s. All 8 standard DI’s
can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO-01
digital I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of DI’s is 14.

The hardware source is selected by:

DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) for DI9 to DI11
DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) for DI12 to DI14 and
IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2
The standard DI’s are isolated and filtered. Selectable hardware filtering time (DI7
and DI8 on the SDCS-IOB-2):
2 ms or 10 ms (jumper S7 and S8)
Input voltages:
24 VDC to 48 VDC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC depending on the hardware
for more details see Hardware Manual
Scan time for DI1 to DI6:
5 ms
Scan time for DI7 and DI8:
3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)

1st and 2nd RDOI-01

The extension DI’s are isolated and filtered. Selectable hardware filtering time:
2 ms or 5 ms to 10 ms
Input voltages:
24 VDC to 250 VDC, 110 VAC to 230 VAC
for more details see RDIO-01 User’s Manual
Update time for DI9 to DI14:
5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4
14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 16

Configuration
All DI’s can be read from DI StatWord (8.05):

bit DI configurable default setting

0 1 yes ConvFanAck (10.20)
1 2 yes MotFanAck (10.06)
2 3 yes MainContAck (10.21)
3 4 yes Off2 (10.08)
4 5 yes E Stop (10.09)
5 6 yes Reset (10.03)
6 7 yes OnOff1 (10.15)
7 8 yes StartStop (10.16)
8 9 yes -
9 10 yes -
10 11 yes -
11 12 no not selectable
12 13 no not selectable
13 14 no not selectable

Configurable = yes:
The DI’s can be connected with several converter functions and it is possible to
invert the DI’s - DI1Invert (10.25) to DI11Invert (10.35). In addition the DI’s can be
used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.

Configurable = no:
The DI’s can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding
control.

Configurable DI’s are defined by means of following parameters:

Direction (10.02) Ref1Mux (11.02)

Reset (10.03) Ref2Mux (11.12)
SyncCommand (10.04) MotPotUp (11.13)
MotFanAck (10.06) MotPotDown (11.14)
Hand/Auto (10.07) MotPotMin (11.15)
Off2 (10.08) Ramp2Select (22.11)
E Stop (10.09) Par2Select (24.29)
ParChange (10.10) TorqMux (26.05)
OvrVoltProt (10.13) ResCurDetectSel (30.05)
OnOff1 (10.15) ExtFaultSel (30.31)
StartStop (10.16) ExtAlarmSel (30.32)
Jog1 (10.17) M1KlixonSel (31.08)
Jog2 (10.18) M1BrakeAckSel (42.02)
ConvFanAck (10.20) FldBoostSel (44.17)
MainContAck (10.21) M2KlixonSel (49.38)
DynBrakeAck (10.22) ZeroCurDetect (97.18)
DC BreakAck (10.23) ResetAhCounter (97.21)

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 17

Following restrictions apply:

The position counter synchronization is fixed assigned to input DI7, if
activated via SyncCommand (10.04)
DI12 to DI14 are only available in the DI StatWord (8.05), thus they can
only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding
control

SDCS-CON-4
or
SDCS-IOB-2
DI1
X6:1 DI1Invert (10.25) Use of DI’s (only defaults) default
DI2
X6:2 DI2Invert (10.26) ConvFanAck (10.20) DI1
DI3
X6:3 DI3Invert (10.27)
DI4 MotFanAck (10.06) DI2
X6:4 DI4Invert (10.28)
DI5 MainContAck (10.21) DI3
X6:5 DI5Invert (10.29)
X6:6 DI6
DI6Invert (10.30)
Off2 (10.08) DI4
X6:7 DI7
DI7Invert (10.31)
DI8 E Stop (10.09) DI5
X6:8 DI8Invert (10.32)
IO BoardConfig (98.15) Inversion of DI’s Reset (10.03) DI6
1
1 OnOff1 (10.15) DI7

StartStop (10.16) DI8

1st RDIO-01
X11:1 DI9
DI StatWord (8.05) Fixed assigned DI:
X11:2
DI7 for positioning
bit 0: DI1
X12:1 DI10
X12:2 bit 1: DI2
bit 2: DI3
X12:3 DI11
X12:4 bit 3: DI4

DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) bit 4: DI5

bit 5: DI6
2nd RDIO-01 bit 6: DI7
X11:1 DI12 bit 7: DI8
X11:2
bit 8: DI9
X12:1 DI13 bit 9: DI10
X12:2
bit 10: DI11
X12:3 DI14 bit 11: DI12
X12:4
bit 12: DI13
DIO ExtModule2 (98.04)
bit 13: DI14
Structure of DI’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 18

Digital outputs (DO’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 7 standard DO’s. Standard DO8 is
located on the SDCS-PIN-4. All 8 standard DO’s can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-
2 and extended by means of one or two RDIO-01 digital I/O extension modules.
Thus the maximum number of DO’s is 12.

The hardware source is selected by:

DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) for DO9 and DO10
DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) for DO11 and DO12
IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-2
On the SDCS-CON-4 the standard DO’s are relay drivers. DO8 is located on the
SDCS-PIN-4 and a isolated by means of a relay. If the SDCS-IOB-2 is being used
DO6 and DO7 are isolated by means of optocouplers, while the others (DO1 to
DO5 and DO8) are isolated by means of relays.
Output values SDCS-CON-4:
DO6 to DO7 max. 50 mA / 22 VDC at no load
for more details see Hardware Manual
Output values SDCS-PIN-4:
DO8 max. 3 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.3 A / 115 VDC / 230 VDC or max. 3 A /
230 VAC
for more details see Hardware Manual
Output values SCDS-IOB-2:
DO6 and DO7: max. 50 mA / 24 VDC
all others: max. 3 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.3 A / 115 VDC / 230 VDC or max. 3 A
/ 250 VAC
for more details see Hardware Manual
Update time for DO1 to DO8:
3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)

1st and 2nd RDOI-01

The extension DO’s are isolated by means of relays.
Output values:
max. 5 A / 24 VDC, max. 0.4 A / 120 VDC or max. 1250 VA / 250 VAC
for more details see RDIO-01 User’s Manual
Update time for DO9 to DO12:
5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4
14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 19

Configuration
All DO’s can be read from DO StatWord (8.06):

bit DI configurable default setting

0 1 yes FansOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit15
1 2 yes FieldOn; CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit5
2 3 yes MainContactorOn; bit7
CurCtrlStat1 (6.03)
3 4 yes -
4 5 yes -
5 6 yes -
6 7 yes -
7 8 yes MainContactorOn; bit7
CurCtrlStat1 (6.03)
8 9 yes -
9 10 no not selectable
10 11 no not selectable
11 12 no not selectable

Configurable = yes:
The DO’s can be connected with any integer or signed integer of the DCS800 by
means of group 14. It is possible to invert the DO’s by simply negate DO1Index
(14.01) to DO8Index (14.15). In addition the DO’s can be used by Adaptive
Program, application program or overriding control if the corresponding DOxIndex
(14.xx) is set to zero - see DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Configurable = no:
The DO’s can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control - see DO CtrlWord (7.05).

Note:
DO8 is only available as relay output on the SDCS-PIN-4, if no SDCS-IOB-2 is
used.

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 20

Source selection DO ’s

0 COMP
0
DOxIndex
IO BoardConfig (98.15)
DO CtrlWord SDCS-CON-4 SDCS-IOB-2
DO CtrlWord (7.05) default
DO1Index (14.01)
DO1BitNo (14.02) DO1
FansOn DO1Index (14.01) X7:1 X4:1,2
bit 0: DO1
DO2Index (14.03)
DO2BitNo (14.04) DO2
FieldOn DO2Index (14.03) X7:2 X4:3,4
bit 1: DO2
DO3Index (14.05)
DO3BitNo (14.06) DO3
MainContactorOn DO3Index (14.05) X7:3 X4:5,6
bit 2: DO3
DO4Index (14.07)
DO4BitNo (14.08) DO4
- DO4Index (14.07) X7:4 X4:7,8
bit 3: DO4
DO5Index (14.09)
DO5BitNo (14.10) DO5
- DO5Index (14.09) X7:5 X5:1,2
bit 4: DO5
DO6Index (14.11)
DO6BitNo (14.12) DO6
- DO6Index (14.11) X7:6 X5:3,4
bit 5: DO6
DO7Index (14.13)
DO7BitNo (14.14) DO7
- DO7Index (14.13) X7:7 X5:5,6
bit 6: DO7
DO8Index (14.15)
DO8BitNo (14.16) DO8
MainContactorOn DO8Index (14.15) X7:8 X5:7,8
bit 7: DO8

1st RDIO-01 DIO ExtModule1

(98.03)
bit 8: DO9 X21
bit 9: DO10 X22

2nd RDIO-01 DIO ExtModule2

(98.04)
bit 10: DO11 X21
bit 11: DO12 X22

DO StatWord (8.06)

bit 10: DO11

bit 11: DO12
bit 9: DO10
bit 6: DO7
bit 0: DO1
bit 1: DO2
bit 2: DO3
bit 3: DO4
bit 4: DO5
bit 5: DO6

bit 7: DO8
bit 8: DO9
Structure of DO’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 21

Analog inputs (AI’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 5 standard AI’s. All 5 standard AI’s
can be replaced with SDCS-IOB-3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO-01
analog I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of AI’s is 9.

The hardware source is selected by:

AIO ExtModule (98.06) for AI5 and AI6
AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) for AI7 and AI8
IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-CON-4
Hardware setting:
switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S2 and S3
for more details see Hardware Manual
Input range AI1 and AI2 set by parameter:
10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset
20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset
Input range AI3 and AI4 set by parameter:
10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset
Resolution:
15 bits + sign
Update time for AI1 and AI2:
3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)
Update time for AI3 and AI4:
5 ms
Additional functions:
motor temperature measurement for a PTC connected to AI2 - see section
Motor protection

SDCS-IOB-3
Hardware setting:
switching from voltage input to current input by means of jumper S1
the hardware gain for AI2 and AI3 can be increased by 10 with jumpers S2
and S3, thus the input range changes e.g. from 10 V to 1 V
for more details see Hardware Manual
Input range AI1 to AI4 set by parameter:
10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset
20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset
Resolution:
15 bits + sign
Update time for AI1 and AI2:
3.3 ms / 2.77 ms (synchronized with mains frequency)
Update time for AI3 and AI4:
5 ms
Additional functions:
motor temperature measurement for PT100 or PTC connected to AI2 and
AI3 - see section Motor protection

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 22

residual current detection monitor input via AI4 - see section Motor
protection

1st RAIO-01
Hardware setting:
input range and switching from voltage to current by means of a DIP switch,
for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual
Input range AI5 and AI6 set by parameter:
10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset
20 mA, 0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset
Resolution:
11 bits + sign
Update time for AI5 and AI6:
10 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4
14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8
Additional functions:
all AI’s are galvanically isolated

2nd RAIO-01
Hardware setting:
AI7 and AI8 are only used for motor temperature measurement, thus set 0
V to 2 V for 1 PT100 respectively 0 V to 10 V for 2 or 3 PT100 using the
DIP switch
for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual
Resolution:
11 bits + sign
Update time for AI5 and AI6:
10 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4
14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8
Additional functions:
all AI’s are galvanically isolated
motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AI7 and AI8 - see
section Motor protection,

Configuration
The value of AI1 to AI6 and AITacho can be read from group 5.

AI configurable default setting

1 yes -
2 yes -
3 yes -
4 yes -
5 yes -
6 yes -
7 temperature -
8 temperature -

Configurable = yes:
The AI’s can be connected with several converter functions and it is possible to
scale them by means of group 13. In addition the AI’s can be read by Adaptive

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 23

Program, application program or overriding control.

Configurable = temperature:
The AI’s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement - see
M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.35).
Configurable AI’s are defined by means of following parameters:
Ref1Sel (11.03)
Ref2Sel (11.06)
TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18)
TorqUsedMinSel (20.19)
TorqRefA Sel (25.10)
TorqCorrect (26.15)
ResCurDetectSel (30.05)
M1TempSel (31.05)
StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
CurSel (43.02)
M2TempSel (49.35)
Following restrictions apply:
the residual current detection input is fixed assigned to AI4, if activated via
ResCurDetectSel (30.05)
the motor temperature measurement is fixed assigned to AI2 and AI3
respectively AI7 and AI8, if activated via M1TempSel (31.05) respectively
M2TempSel (49.35)

Scaling
Firmware signal Firmware signal Firmware signal
Unipolar signal: Unipolar signal:
Bipolar signal:
0-10V/0-20mA Uni 5V/10mA Offset 100%
±10V/±20mA Bi
2-10V/4-20mA Uni 6V/12mA Offset 0%
100% Input
100% Input
Input voltage, -100% voltage,
-10V, current
-20mA P1302 voltage, 0% current
current P1303=0-10V Uni 0V, 10V, 0V 10V,
P1301 P130120mA
P1301 10V, P1302=n.a. 0mA 20mA P1302=n.a. P1303=5V Offset
20mA
-100%

P1303=±10V Bi
DWL-assistant.dsf

It is possible to scale AI1 to AI6 and AITacho with 3 parameters each:

the range of each AI is set by means of a jumper - distinguishing between
current and voltage - and ConvModeAI1 (13.03) to ConvModeAI6 (13.27)
+100 % of the input signal connected to an AI is scaled by means of
AI1HighVal (13.01) to AI6HighVal (13.25)
-100 % of the input signal connected to an AI is scaled by means of
AI1LowVal (13.02) to AI6LowVal (13.26)

Example:
In case the min. / max. voltage ( 10 V) of AI1 should equal 250 % of
TorqRefExt (2.24), set:
TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = AI1
ConvModeAI1 (13.03) = 10V Bi
AI1HighVal (13.01) = 4000 mV
AI1LowVal (13.02) = -4000 mV

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 24

SDCS-IOB-3 SDCS-CON-4 Scaling Input value Scaling SpeedActTach (1.05)

X3:1 to AITacho AITacho
Use of AI’s
’
X3:4 Val (5.01)
Ref1Sel (11.03)
(
X3:3 X3:5 AI1 ConvMode AI1HighVal (13.01)
AI1 Val (5.03) Ref2Sel (11.06)
(
X3:4 X3:6 AI1 (13.03) AI1LowVal (13.02)
X3:5 X3:7 AI2 ConvMode AI2HighVal (13.05) TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18)
(
AI2 Val (5.04) TorqUsedMinSel (20.19)
(
X3:6 X3:8 AI2 (13.07) AI2LowVal (13.06)
X3:7 X3:9 AI3 ConvMode AI3HighVal (13.09) TorqRefA Sel (25.10)
(
AI3 Val (5.05)
X3:8 X3:10 AI3 (13.11) AI3LowVal (13.10) TorqCorrect (26.15)
(26
X3:9 X4:1 AI4 ConvMode AI4HighVal (13.13) ResCurDetectSel (30.05)
(
AI4 Val (5.06)
X3:10 X4:2 AI4 (13.15) AI4LowVal (13.14) M1TempSel ((31.05)
IO BoardConfig (98.15) StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
1st RAIO-01 CurSel (43.02)
(
X1:1 AI5 ConvMode AI5HighVal (13.21) M2TempSel (49.35)
AI5 Val (5.07)
X1:2 AI5 (13.23) AI5LowVal (13.22)
X1:3 AI6 ConvMode AI6HighVal (13.25) Fixed assigned AI’s:
AI6 Val (5.08)
X1:4 AI6 (13.27) AI6LowVal (13.26) The residual current
AIO ExtModule (98.06) detection is fixed assigned
to AI4.
2nd RAIO-01 The motor temperature
X1:1 AI7 measurement is fixed
X1:2 assigned to AI2 and AI3
X1:3 AI8 respectively AI7 and AI8.
X1:4
AIO MotTempMeas (98.12)
Structure of AI’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 25

Analog outputs (AO’s)

The basic I/O board is the SDCS-CON-4 with 3 standard AO’s. Two AO’s are
programmable, the third one is fixed and used to display the actual armature
current taken directly from the burden resistors. All 3 standard AO’s can be
replaced with SDCS-IOB-3 and extended by means of one or two RAIO-01 analog
I/O extension modules. Thus the maximum number of AO’s is 7.

The hardware source is selected by:

AIO ExtModule (98.06) for AO3 and AO4
AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) for AO5 and AO6
IO BoardConfig (98.15)

SDCS-CON-4 / SDCS-IOB-3
Output range AO1 and AO2 set by parameter:
10 V, 0 V to 10 V, 2 V to 10 V, 5 V offset, 6 V offset
Output range fixed AOCurr:
4V equals 325 % of M1NomCur (99.03)
for more details see Hardware Manual
Resolution:
11 bits + sign
Update time for AO1 and AO2:
5 ms
Update time fixed AOCurr:
directly taken from hardware
Additional functions:
the gain of the fixed AOCurr can be adjusted by means of R110 on the
SDCS-IOB-3

1st RAIO-01
Output range AO3 and AO4 set by parameter:
0 mA to 20 mA, 4 mA to 20 mA, 10 mA offset, 12 mA offset
Resolution:
12 bits
Update time for AO3 and AO4:
5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4
14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8
Additional functions:
all AO’s are galvanically isolated

2nd RAIO-01
Hardware settings:
AO5 and AO6 are only used for motor temperature measurement, no
additional setting needed
for more details see RAIO-01 User’s Manual
Resolution:
12 bits
Update time for AO5 and AO6:
5 ms connected at SDCS-CON-4

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 26

14 ms connected via SDCS-COM-8

Additional functions:
all AO’s are galvanically isolated
motor temperature measurement for PT100 connected to AO5 and AO6 -
see section Motor protection

Configuration
The value of AO1 and AO2 can be read from group 5.

AO configurable default setting

1 yes -
2 yes -
3 yes -
4 yes -
5 temperature -
6 temperature -
Curr fixed not selectable

Configurable = yes:
The AO’s can be connected with any integer or signed integer of the DCS800 by
means of group 15. It is possible to invert the AO’s by simply negate IndexAO1
(15.01) to IndexAO4 (15.16). In addition the AO’s can be used by Adaptive
Program, application program or overriding control if the corresponding IndexAOx
(15.xx) is set to zero - see CtrlWordAO1 (15.02) to CtrlWordAO4 (15.17).

Configurable = temperature:
The AO’s can only be used by the motor temperature measurement - see
M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.35).

Scaling
Output voltage Output voltage Output voltage
Bipolar signal: Unipolar signal: Unipolar signal:
±10V Bi 10V 10V 10V
0-10V Uni 5V Offset
2-10V Uni 6V Offset P1505
P1505 P1505
P1503=5V Offset
Firmware Firmware Firmware
-100% signal 0V signal
0V signal
100% P1503=0-10V Uni 0% 100%
-100% 0% 100%

-10V
P1503=±10V Bi
DWL-assistant.dsf

It is possible to scale AO1 to AO4 with 2 parameters each:

the range of each AO is set by means of ConvModeAO1 (15.03) to
ConvModeAO4 (15.18)
if the range is set to bipolar or unipolar signals with offset, 100 % of the
input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO1 (15.06) to
ScaleAO4 (15.20)
If the range is set to unipolar signals without offset, only +100 % of the
input signal connected to an AO is scaled by means of ScaleAO1 (15.06) to
ScaleAO4 (15.20). The smallest value is always zero
It is possible to invert the AO’s by simply negate IndexAO1 (15.01) to
IndexAO4 (15.16)

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 27

Example:
In case the min. / max. voltage ( 10 V) of AO1 should equal 250 % of
TorqRefUsed (2.13), set:
IndexAO1 (15.01) = 213
ConvModeAO1 (15.03) = 10V Bi
ScaleAO1 (15.05) = 4000 mV

Source selection AO’s

’s Inversion of AO’s

0 COMP
1
IndexAOx 0
1

CtrlWordAOx IO BoardConfig (98.15)

Source Default Scaling Output value SDCS-CON-4 SDCS-IOB-3

-
IndexAO1 (15.01) ConvModeAO1 (15.03) AO1 X4:7 X4:1
- IndexAO1 (15.01) AO1 Val (5.11)
CtrlWordAO1 (15.02) ScaleAO1 (15.05) X4:10 X4:2
IndexAO2 (15.06) ConvModeAO2 (15.08) AO2 X4:8 X4:3
- IndexAO2 (15.06) AO2 Val (5.12)
CtrlWordAO2 (15.07) ScaleAO2 (15.10) X4:10 X4:4
fixed AO X4:9 X4:5
Hardware
X4:10 X4:6

1st RAIO-01 AIO ExtModule

IndexAO3 (15.11) ConvModeAO3 (15.13) AO3 X2:1 (98.06)
- IndexAO3 (15.11)
CtrlWordAO3 (15.12) ScaleAO3 (15.15) X2:2
IndexAO4 (15.15) ConvModeAO4 (15.18) AO4 X2:3
- IndexAO4 (15.15)
CtrlWordAO4 (15.16) ScaleAO4 (15.20) X2:4

2nd RAIO-01
- AIO MotTempMeas
M1TempSel (31.05) AO5 X2:1 (98.12)
M2TempSel (49.35) X2:2
M1TempSel (31.05) AO6 X2:3
M2TempSel (49.35) X2:4

Structure of AO’s

I/O configuration

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 28

Adaptive Program

Chapter overview
The chapter describes the basics of the Adaptive Program and instructs in building
a program.

Compatibility
The guide complies with the drive application programs in which the Adaptive
Programming features are included.

Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission or
use the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of
the Hardware Manual or QuickGuide.
Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing
the default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes
are given in the Firmware Manual in the subsection describing the related
user-adjustable parameters.

Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to:
know the standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components and
electrical schematic symbols.
have no experience or training in installing, operating or servicing of ABB
drives.

Use
The guide is to be used together with DCS800 firmware manual of the drive
application program. The firmware manual contains the basic information on the
drive parameters including the parameters of the Adaptive Program. The guide
gives more detailed information on the Adaptive Program:
what the Adaptive Program is
how to build a program
how the function blocks operate
how to document the program

Related publications
The user documentation of the drive also includes:
Firmware manual (3ADW 000 193)
Hardware manual (3ADW 000 194)
Guides/supplements for the optional equipment and programs (appropriate
manuals are included in the delivery).

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 29

What is the Adaptive Program

Conventionally, the user can control the operation of the drive by parameters. Each
parameter has a fixed set of choices or a setting range. The parameters make the
programming easy, but the choices are limited: you cannot customize the
operation any further. The Adaptive Program makes freer customising possible
without the need of a special programming tool or language, even though the PC
programming tool “Drive AP program” makes it easier.
The program is built of function blocks.
The control panel is the programming tool.
The user can document the program by drawing it on block diagram template
sheets.
The maximum size of the Adaptive Program is 16 function blocks. The program
may consist of several separate functions.

Features
The adaptive programming of DCS800 provides the following features:
16 function blocks
more than 20 block types
password protection
4 different time levels selectable
check against unconnected blocks
shift functions
debug functions
• output forcing
• breakpoint
• single step
• single cycle
10 constant value parameters
additional output write pointer parameter for each block

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 30

How to build the program

The programmer connects a function block to other blocks through a Block
Parameter Set. The sets are also used for reading values from the drive
application program and transferring data to the drive application program. Each
Block Parameter Set consists of six parameters in group 84 and a write pointer in
group 86.

The figure bleow shows the use of Block Parameter Set 1 in the DCS800 firmware
(parameters 84.04 to 84.09 and 86.01):
- Parameter 84.04 selects the function block type.
- Parameter 84.05 selects the source that input IN1 of the function block is
connected to. A negative value means that the signal will be inverted.
- Parameter 84.06 selects the source that input IN2 of the function block is
connected to. A negative value means that the signal will be inverted.
- Parameter 84.07 selects the source that input IN3 of the function block is
connected to. A negative value means that the signal will be inverted.
- Parameter 84.08 defines the attributes of inputs.
- Parameter 84.09 contains the signal of this function block, which can be used
further for other input selections. The user cannot edit this parameter value.
- The signal output is also available with the write pointer 86.01. Parameter
86.01 gets the destination parameter, which should get the signal.

How to connect the program to the drive application

The output of the Adaptive Program needs to be connected to the drive application
program. For that purpose there are two possibilities:
The signal, e.g. 84.09, can be selected for further functions.
The signal output is available with the write pointer, e.g. 86.01. This
parameter is to be set with the destination parameter, which needs the signal
output of this function block.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 31

Using of Block Parameter Set 1

Block Parameter Set 1
Select
Type
ABS
...

XOR
84.04
Read
Select pointer of
Input 1
MF channel
group 70
0

INT
AP FB
Signal group 84
1 Boolean
84.05 Output
Act. Signal/ Dataset table
Parameter group 92
table Select
Input 2 e.g. DCS Link
1.01 Mailbox
84.09 group 94
1.02 0
ADD
I1
+
INT I2 O
... 1 Boolean Act. Signal/
I3
84.06 Parameter
99.99 Function Write table
Select pointer
Input 3 7.01

7.02
0
...
INT
1 Boolean 86.01
99.99
84.07

Set
Attribute

15 0 Bit

HEX input 3 input 2 input 1

3 2 1 bit sel. bit sel. bit sel.
84.08 Input
This function offers the opportunity to isolate a
To use an
certain bit out of a packed Boolean word. It is used
input as a
to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to a
constant value,
certain bit of a packed Boolean word. With:
the bit
Bit 0 == 0000 == 0h
belonging to
Bit 1 == 0001 == 1h
the input must
…
be set high.

Example
Add to speed reference a constant value and an external additional reference value:
1. Set 84.04=2 (selection of ADD function)
2. Set 84.05=xx.xx (selection of speed reference for Input 1)
3. Set 84.06=xx.xx (selection of external ref (AIx) for Input 2)
4. Set 84.07=1500 (constant value for Input 3)
5. Set 84.08=4000h (because Input 3 = constant -> Bit 14=1 --> 4000h)
6. 84.09=xxxx (contains the computed value; can be read from system’s parts e.g. Master Follower channel,
other Block Parameter Set Inputs)
7. Set 86.01=xx.xx (write computed value to destination for further processing)

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 32

How to control the execution of the program

The Adaptive Program executes the function blocks in numerical order, all blocks
on the same time level. This cannot be changed by the user. The user can:
select the operation mode of the program (stop, start, editing, single cycling,
single stepping)
adjust the execution time level of the program
delete or add blocks.

Adaptive Program

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 33

Function blocks

Chapter overview
The chapter describes the function blocks.

General rules
The use of block input 1 (BlockxIn1) is compulsory (it must not be left
unconnected). Use of input 2 (BlockxIn2) and input 3 (BlockxIn3) is voluntary for
the most blocks. As a rule of thumb, an unconnected input does not affect the
output of the block.
The Attribute Input (BlockxAttrib) is to set with the attributes, like declaration of
constant and bits, of all three inputs.

Block inputs
The blocks use two input formats:
integer
boolean
The used format varies depending on the block. For example, the ADD block uses
integer inputs and the OR block boolean inputs.

Note: The inputs of the block are read when the execution of the block starts, not
simultaneously for all blocks!

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 34

Block input attributes

Block inputs gets the parameter of signal source or the value of a constant.
Depending on the used block function and depending on on the desired function
the attributes of all three inputs are to be set as integer, constant or as selection of
a bit of a 16-bit word source.
Therefor it is used a 16-bit word, which is defined as following:

15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bit number
packed
0
Boolean

3. 2. 1. Function block Function block Function block

To use an input input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit
as a constant selection selection selection
value, the bit
belonging to the This function offers the opportunity to isolate a certain bit
input must be set out of a packed Boolean word. It is used to connect the
high. Boolean inputs of a function block to a certain bit of a
packed Boolean word. With:
Bit 0 == 0000 == 0h
Bit 1 == 0001 == 1h
…
Bit 15 == 1111 == Fh

Example:

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

2 0 0 A
HEX
Example of attribute parameter, with
BlockxIn1 as boolean, bit 10
BlockxIn2 as constant
BlockxIn3 as integer
Æ Bits converted into hex, the value 200A (H)
is to be set into parameter BlockxAttrib.

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 35

Parameter value as an integer input

How the block handles the input

The block reads the selected value in as an integer.

Note: The parameter selected as an input should be an integer value. The internal
scaling for each parameter is given in the Firmware Manual.

How to select the input

Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode
(Enter).
Set the address, from which the input value is to be read, with group x 100 +
index (e.g. parameter 22.01 = 2201). A negative address (e.g. –2201) will act
an inversion of the connected value.
The figure below shows the panel display when the input BlockxIn1 (with e.g. x = 1
for 1. block) selection parameter is in edit mode. The value is inverted if there is a
minus (-) sign in the inversion field. The bit selection field is not effective for an
integer or string type input.

Display of panel

REM 3 PAR EDIT--------------------

8405 Block1In1
Connection to
503 as output of AI1
503
(group x 100 + index)
CANCEL SAVE

Example: Analog input AI1, which is supplied with a voltage source of 5.8 V, in a
drive equipped with the DCS800 firmware. How is the signal connected to the MAX
block as function block 1 in the Adaptive Program? What is the value at the block
input?
AI1 is connected to the block as follows:
Scroll to the input Block1In1 selection parameter 84.05 and shift to edit mode
(Enter).
Set the address of 503, because group 5 and index 3 contains the input value
of AI1 (05.03 = 05x100+3 = 503).
The value at the input of the block is 5800, since the integer scaling of actual
signal 5.03 is: 0.001 V = 1 (with default setting of AI1, given in the Firmware
Manual).

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 36

Constant as an integer input

How to set and connect the input

Option 1
Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode
(Enter).
Give the constant value to this input parameter (double arrow and arrow keys).
Accept by Enter.
Scroll to attribute parameter (BlockxAttrib)
Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter.
Accept by Enter.
The figure below shows the panel display when the input BlockxIn1 selection
parameter is in edit mode and the constant field is visible. The constant may have
a value from -32768 to 32767. The constant cannot be changed while the Adaptive
Program is running.
Display of panel

REM 3 PAR EDIT--------------------

8406 Block1In2
Value of the desired
constant
-10000
CANCEL SAVE

Display of panel

REM 3 PAR EDIT--------------------

8408 Block1Attrib
Setting of constant
value of Block1In2
2000 hex
input
CANCEL SAVE
Option 2
Set the constant to one of the parameters 85.01 to 85.10 reserved for the
constants.
Connect the constant value to a block as usual by the input selection
parameter.
The constants can be changed while the Adaptive Program is running. They may have
values from –32767 to 32767.

Note: A constant like option 1 can only be changed in Edit mode. If the constant
may be modified during running, a constant parameter like option 2 is more
expediently

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 37

Parameter value as a boolean input

How the block handles the input

The block reads the selected value as an integer.

The block uses the bit defined by the bit field as the boolean input.

Bit value 1 is boolean value true and 0 is boolean value false

Example: The figure below shows the value of input BlockxIn1 selection parameter
when the input is connected to a bit indicating the status of digital input DI2.
In DCS800 firmware, the digital input states are internally stored as actual signal
8.05 DI StatWord. Bit 1 corresponds to DI2, bit 0 to DI1.

Display of panel

REM 3 PAR EDIT--------------------

8407 Block1In3
Connection to 805 as
output of DI's
805
(group x 100 + index)
CANCEL SAVE

Display of panel

REM 3 PAR EDIT--------------------

8408 Block1Attrib
Setting of bit 1 of
block1In3
0100 hex
CANCEL SAVE

How to select the input

See the section Parameter value as an integer input above.

Note: The parameter selected as an input should have a packed boolean value
(binary data word). See the Firmware Manual.

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 38

Constant as a boolean input

How to set and connect the input

Scroll to the input selection parameter of the block and switch to edit mode
(Enter).
Give the constant. If boolean value true is needed, set the constant to -1. If
boolean value false is needed, set to 0.
Accept by Enter.
Scroll to attribute parameter (BlockxAttrib)
Set the bit for constant attribute of this input in BlockxAttrib parameter.
Accept by Enter.

String input

How to select the input

String input is not needed yet. With the EVENT block the text out of the fault, alarm
or notice lists will be selected; see chapter “Status”.
For changing this text another tool is necessary.

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 39

Function blocks details

General Each of the 16 function blocks has one up to max. three input parameters (group
84), which contains either an output address or a value of constant.
One further parameter is used for the attributes of these inputs. This attribute
parameter is to be edited manually, if functions blocks are edited by using panel or
by using parameter browser of DriveWindow (light).
By using Adaptive Programming PC tool this attribute parameter will be set
automatically.
The output OUT, group 84, can be used for further inputs of function blocks. For
writing the output value into standard parameters the output pointer, marked with -
( )Æ, is to be set to the desired standard parameter. Output pointers can be found
in group 86.

<FB name>
IN1
IN2 ()
IN3 OUT
Attr.

ABS Type Arithmetic function

Illustration ABS
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the absolute value of input IN1 multiplied by IN2 and divided by IN3.
OUT = |IN1| * IN2 / IN3

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

ADD Type Arithmetic function

Illustration ADD
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the sum of the inputs.

OUT = IN1 + IN2 + IN3

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 40

AND Type Logical function

Illustration AND
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is true if all connected inputs are true. Otherwise the output is false. Truth
table:
IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)
0 0 0 False (All bits 0) 0
0 0 1 False (All bits 0) 0
0 1 0 False (All bits 0) 0
0 1 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 0 0 False (All bits 0) 0
1 0 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 0 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 1 True (All bits 1) -1

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Bitwise Type Logical function

Illustration Bitwise
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The block compares bits of three 16 bit word inputs and forms the output bits as
follows:

OUT = (IN1 OR IN2) AND IN3.

Example, operation shown with only one bit:

IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT
0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 1 1
1 1 1 1

Example, operation shown with whole word:

Input bits Output
[word] 15 0 [word]
20518 => IN1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
4896 => IN2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17972 => IN3 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 => OUT 16932

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (packed boolean)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer values (packed boolean)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 41

Bset Type Logical function

Illustration Bset
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Before the value of input IN1 will be set to the output (OUT), the bit number (IN2) of
input word (IN1) will be set to the value of IN3.
Input IN1 is to be a packed word. The value of input IN2
IN3 should have the value 1 for true and 0 for false.

Connections Input IN1 : packed 16-bit word

Input IN2 : 16 bit interger value, used 0 … 15 as bit number.
Input IN3 : boolean value
Output (OUT) : 16 bit packed word

Compare Type Logical function

Illustration Compare
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Output bits 0, 1 and 2:

- If IN1 > IN2, OUT = 001 Output bit 0 is true.
- If IN1 = IN2, OUT = 010 Output bit 1 is true.
- If IN1 < IN2, OUT = 100 Output bit 2 is true.

Output bit 3:
- If IN1 > IN2, OUT = 1ddd Output bit 3 is true and remains true until
IN1 < (IN2 - IN3), after which bit 3 is false.
bit 3

IN1
IN2
IN2-IN3

Output integer value, which is shown on display, is the sum of the bits :
bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 OUT (value on display)
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 2
0 0 1 0 4
0 0 0 1 8
1 0 0 1 9
0 1 0 1 10
0 0 1 1 12

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (packed boolean)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 42

Count Type Arithmetic function

Illustration Count
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The counter function counts rising edges of input IN1.

The counter is reset by the rising edges of input IN2 and limited to the value set with
input IN3.
Input IN1 : Trigger (counter) input (0Æ1 edge)
Input IN2 : Reset input (0Æ1 edge).
Input IN3: : Max limit with value
> 0: the output value increases up to max limit, which is the
maximum.
< 0: the output value increases up to the absolute value of
max limit. With max limit the output will be set to 0 and
starts countering with further trigger inputs.
Output (OUT) : The output shows the countered value.

Connections Input IN1, IN2 : Boolean values

Input IN3 : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign
Output (OUT) : 15 bit integer value

D-Pot Type Arithmetic function

Illustration D-Pot
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation With input 1 the output will increase, with input 2 the output will decrease.
The absolute value of input 3 is the ramp time in ms related to 20000 of output. With
positive sign of input 3 the output range is between 0 and 20000, with negative sign of
input 3 the output range is between –20000 and +20000.
If both inputs 1 and 2 are active, input 2 (ramp down) will take action.

Input IN1 : Ramp up (bool)

Input IN2 : Ramp down (bool)
Input IN3 : ramp time, (ms rel. to 20000)
Output : 15+1 bit value

Connections Input IN1 and IN2 : Boolean values

Input IN3 : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 43

Event Type Viewing function

Illustration Event
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Input IN1 triggers the event. IN2 selects the number of fault, alarm, notice or trip texts.
IN3 selects the type of the event (alarm, fault, notice or trip).

IN1 Activation input (boolean)

0->1 block activates the event
0 block deactivates the event
IN2 Selection of displayed message. There exists 5 different
messages, which are selected by using numbers depending
on the type of event: The default message will be found in
brackets.
Alarms Faults and Trips Notices
301 (APAlarm1) 601 (APFault1) 801 ( )
302 (APAlarm2) 602 (APFault2) 802 ( )
303 (APAlarm3) 603 (APFault3) 803 ( )
304 (APAlarm4) 604 (APFault4) 804 ( )
305 (APAlarm5) 605 (APFault5) 805 ( )
IN3 Selection of type of event
0 Alarm ; shown as A30x
1 Fault ; shown as F60x. Faults have to be reset.
2 Notice, shown as N80x
3 Trip ; shown as fault F60x. A Trip will also open a
connected DC breaker. Trips have to be reset.

Connections Input IN1 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)

Input IN2, IN3 : Selection of byte (compulsory)

Filter Type Arithmetic function

Illustration Filter
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the filtered value of input IN1. Input IN2 is the filtering time.
OUT = IN1 · (1 - e-t/IN2)
Note: The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors.

Connections Input IN1 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign). One corresponds to 1 ms.
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 44

Limit Type Logical function

Illustration Limit
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Value, connected to input IN1 will be limited with input IN2 as upper limit and with
input IN3 as lower limit.
The output OUT makes the limeted input value available.
The output stays with 0, if the lower limit (input IN3) is greater or equal than the upper
limit (input IN2).

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 45

MaskSet Type Logical function

Illustration MaskSet
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The block function sets or resets the bits defined in IN1 and IN2.

Input IN1: Word input

Input IN2: Set word input
Input IN3; Set/Reset IN2 in IN1.

Example, operation shown with only one bit:,

… with IN3 = Set … with IN3 = Reset
IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT
0 0 True 0 0 0 False 0
1 0 True 1 1 0 False 1
1 1 True 1 1 1 False 0
0 1 True 1 0 1 False 0

Example, operation shown with whole word:

… with IN3 = true (=> Set)
Input bits Output
[word] 15 0 [word]
26214 => IN1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-13108 => IN2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 => OUT -4370

… with IN3 = false (=> Reset)

Input bits Output
[word] 15 0 [word]
26214 => IN1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-13108 => IN2 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 => OUT 8738

Connections Input IN1 and IN2 : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)
Input 3 : boolean
Output OUT : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Max Type Arithmetic function

Illustration Max
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the highest input value.

OUT = MAX (IN1, IN2, IN3)

Note: Open input will be taken as value zero.

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 46

Min Type Arithmetic function

Illustration Min
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the lowest input value.

OUT = MIN (IN1, IN2, IN3)

Note: Open input will be taken as value zero.

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

MulDiv Type Arithmetic function

Illustration MulDiv
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is the product of input IN1 and input IN2 divided by input IN3.
OUT = (IN1 · IN2) / IN3

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign)

Not Used Type -

Illustration NO
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Block is not enabled and not working (default setting).

Connections -

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 47

OR Type Logical function

Illustration OR
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is true if any of the inputs is true. Truth table:
IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)
0 0 0 False (All bits 0) 0
0 0 1 True (All bits 1) -1
0 1 0 True (All bits 1) -1
0 1 1 True (All bits 1) -1
1 0 0 True (All bits 1) -1
1 1 0 True (All bits 1) -1
1 1 1 True (All bits 1) -1

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

ParRead Type Logical function

Illustration ParRead
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Output (OUT) gives the value of a parameter, which is defined with input IN1 as
parameter group and input IN2 as parameter index.

Example for reading parameter 22.01:

input IN1 = 22
input IN2 = 01

Connections Input IN1 and IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 48

ParWrite Type Logical function

Illustration ParWrite
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Value of input IN1 is written into a parameter, which is defined with input IN2 as
group x 100 + index.
Input IN3 can be set with a Boolean value: TRUE means save and FALSE means no
save.

The output gives the error code, if parameter access is denided.

Example for parameter 22.01 = 150, not saving into FLASH.

input IN1 = the value of 150 (connection or constant)
input IN2 = 2201
input IN3 = false

Connections Input IN1 and IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Input IN3 : Boolean value
Output OUT : byte code

PI Type Arithmetic controller

Illustration PI
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is input IN1 multiplied by IN2/100 plus integrated IN1 multiplied by
IN3/100.
O = I1* I 2 / 100 + (I 3 / 100)* ∫ I1

Note: The internal calculation uses 32 bits accuracy to avoid offset errors.

Connections Input IN1 : 16 bit integer value (15 bit + sign)

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bit + sign)
Gain factor. 100 corresponds to 1.
Input IN3 : Integrator coefficient. 100 corresponds to 1.
10 000 corresponds to 100.
Output OUT : 16 bit integer (15 bits + sign).
The range is limited to 0 … 10000.

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 49

PI-Bal Type Arithmetic function

Illustration PI-Bal
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The block initialises the PI block first. When input IN1 becomes true, the block writes
the value of IN2 to the output of the PI block. When IN1 becomes false, the block
releases the output of the PI controller block which continues normal operation from
the set output.
Note: The block may be used only with the PI block. The block must follow the PI
block.

Connections Input IN1 : boolean value

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Ramp Type Arithmetic function

Illustration Ramp
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The block uses input IN1 as a reference value. With the ramp times (input IN2 and
IN3) the output OUT increases or decreases as long as the reference value is
reached.

Input IN1 : Input value

Input IN2 : Ramp up time, (ms, related to 20000)
Input IN3 : Ramp down time, (ms, related to 20000)
Output : integer output

Connections Input IN1 : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign
Input IN3 : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign
Output OUT : 16 bit integer value; 15 bit + sign

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 50

SqWav Type Arithmetic function

Illustration SqWav
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output OUT alternates between the value of input IN3 and zero (0), if the block is
enabled with value of input IN1 = true.
The period is set with input IN2 with 1 = 1 ms.

Connections Input IN1 : boolean value

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value
Input IN3 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

SR Type Logical function

Illustration SR
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation Set/reset block. Input IN1 sets and IN2 and IN3 reset the output.
If IN1, IN2 and IN3 are false, the current value remains at the output.
If IN1 is true and IN2 and IN3 are false, the output is true.
If IN2 or IN3 is true, the output is false.
IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on display)
0 0 0 Output Output
0 0 1 False (All bits 0) 0
0 1 0 False (All bits 0) 0
0 1 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 0 0 True (All bits 1) -1
1 0 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 0 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 1 False (All bits 0) 0

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 51

Switch-B Type Logical function

Illustration Switch-B
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is equal to input IN2 if input IN1 is true and equal to input IN3 if input IN1 is
false.
IN1 OUT OUT (value on display)
0 = IN3 True = -1
1 = IN2 False = 0

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Switch-I Type Logical function

Illustration Switch-I
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is equal to input IN2 if input IN1 is true and equal to input IN3 if input IN1 is
false.
IN1 OUT
0 = IN3
1 = IN2

Connections Input IN1 : boolean value

Input IN2 and IN3 : 16 bit integer values (15 bits + sign)
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 52

TOFF Type Logical function

Illustration TOFF
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is true when input IN1 is true. The output is false when input IN1 has been
false for a time equal or longer than input IN2.
Input I1

0
Input I2 Input I2 t
Output
All bits 1

All bits 0
t

Values on display: True = -1, false = 0.

With input 3 = False the delay time of input 2 is scaled in milliseconds (ms),
with input 3 = True the delay time of input 2 is scaled in seconds (s).

Connections Input IN1 and IN3 : boolean value

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign).
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 53

TON Type Logical function

Illustration TON
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is true when input IN1 has been true for a time equal or longer than input
IN2. The output is false when the input is false.
Input I1

0
time
Input I2 Input I2
Output

All bits 1

All bits 0
time

Values on display: True = -1, false = 0.

With input 3 = False the delay time of input 2 is scaled in milliseconds (ms),
with input 3 = True the delay time of input 2 is scaled in seconds (s).

Connections Input IN1 and IN3 : boolean value

Input IN2 : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign
Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (packed boolean)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 54

Trigg Type Logical function

Illustration Trigg
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The rising edge of input IN1 sets the output bit 0 for one program cycle.
The rising edge of input IN2 sets the output bit 1 for one program cycle.
The rising edge of input IN3 sets the output bit 2 for one program cycle.

Example
Tc = Program
Input I1 cycle time

0
Output, Bit 0 t

0
Tc Tc t

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

XOR Type Logical function

Illustration XOR
IN1
IN2
IN3 OUT

Operation The output is true if one input is true, otherwise the output is false. Truth table:
IN1 IN2 IN3 OUT (binary) OUT (value on
display)
0 0 0 False (All bits 0) 0
0 0 1 True (All bits 1) -1
0 1 0 True (All bits 1) -1
0 1 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 0 0 True (All bits 1) -1
1 0 1 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 0 False (All bits 0) 0
1 1 1 True (All bits 1) -1

Connections Input IN1, IN2 and IN3 : boolean values

Output (OUT) : 16 bit integer value (15 bits + sign)

Function blocks

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 INPUT OUTPUT
AP control Block No. Block No. Block No. Block No. Output Pointer
83.04= Type Type Type Type 86.01=
IN1 IN1 IN1 IN1 86.02=
Constants IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT 86.03=
() () () ()
85.01= IN3 IN3 IN3 IN3
86.04=
Attr. Attr. Attr. Attr.
85.02= 86.05=
Customer diagrams

85.03= 86.06=
85.04= 86.07=
85.05= Block No. Block No. Block No. Block No.
86.08=
Type Type Type Type
85.06= 86.09=
IN1 IN1 IN1 IN1
85.07= 86.10=
IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT
85.08= () () () () 86.11=
IN3 IN3 IN3 IN3

85.09= Attr. Attr. Attr. Attr. 86.12=

85.10= 86.13=
86.14=
Others Block No. Block No. Block No. Block No. 86.15=
Type Type Type Type 86.16=
IN1 IN1 IN1 IN1
IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT
() () () () Others
IN3 IN3 IN3 IN3
Attr. Attr. Attr. Attr.

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

Block No. Block No. Block No. Block No.
Type Type Type Type
the Adaptive Program can be documented.

IN1 IN1 IN1 IN1

IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT IN2 OUT
() () () ()
IN3 IN3 IN3 IN3
Attr. Attr. Attr. Attr.

Application Company Date

Name
This chapter includes three blank block diagram sheets on which

Function blocks
55
 56

Signal and parameter list

Signals and parameters

This chapter contains all signals and parameters.

Signals
Signals are measured and calculated actual values of the drive. This includes the
control-, status-, limit-, fault- and alarm words. The drive’s signals can be found in
groups 1 to 9. None of the values inside these groups is stored in the FLASH
memory and thus volatile.

The following table gives an overview of all signal groups:

Group Description Comment

1 Physical actual values
2 Speed controller signals
3 Reference actual values
4 Information self identification
5 Analog I/O
6 Drive logic signals
7 Control words command words
8 Status / limit words detection on operation and limits
9 Fault / alarm words diagnosis information

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
1.08 MotTorq (motor torque)

%
-
-
-

E
Motor torque in percent of the active motor nominal torque:
Filtered by means of a 6th order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains
voltage period.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.17 SpeedRefUsed (used speed reference)

C
-
-
-
rpm

Used speed reference selected with:

Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or
Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Sample of signals

All signals are read-only. However the overriding control can write to the control
words, but it only affects the RAM.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 57

Min., max., def.:

Minimum, maximum and default values are not valid for groups 1 to 9.

Unit:
Shows the physical unit of a signal, if applicable. The unit is displayed in the
control panel and PC tools.

E/C:
By means of USI Sel (16.09) it is possible to change between compact (C) and
extended (E) signal and parameter list. The compact list contains only signals and
parameters used for a typical commissioning.

Group.Index:
Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index.

Integer Scaling:
Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer
values. The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to
read the value of the signal properly.
Example1:
If MotTorq (1.08) is read from the overriding control an integer value of 100
corresponds to 1 %.
Example2:
If SpeedRefUsed (2.17) is read from the overriding control 20.000 equals the
speed (in rpm) shown in SpeedScaleAct (2.29) .

Type:
The data type is given with a short code:
I = 16-bit integer value (0, …, 65536)
SI = 16-bit signed integer value (-32768, …, 32767)
C: = text string

Volatile:
Y = values are NOT stored in the FLASH, they will be lost when the drive is de-
energized
N = values are stored in the FLASH, they will remain when the drive is de-
energized

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 58

Parameters
This chapter explains the function and valid values or selections for all parameters.
They are arranged in groups by their function. The following table gives an
overview of all parameter groups:

Group Description
10 Start / stop select
11 Speed reference input
12 Constant speeds
13 Analog inputs
14 Digital outputs
15 Analog outputs
16 System control inputs
19 Data storage
20 Limits
21 Start / stop
22 Speed ramp
23 Speed reference
24 Speed control
25 Torque reference
26 Torque reference handling
30 Fault functions
31 Motor 1 temperature
34 Control panel display
40 PID control
42 Brake control
43 Current control
44 Field excitation
45 Field converter settings
47 12-pulse operation
49 Shared motion
50 Speed measurement
51 Fieldbus
52 Modbus
70 DDCS control
71 Drivebus
83 Adaptive program control
84 Adaptive program
85 User constants
86 Adaptive program outputs
90 Receiving datasets addresses 1
91 Receiving datasets addresses 2
92 Transmit datasets addresses 1
93 Transmit datasets addresses 2
94 DCSLink control
97 Measurement
98 Option modules
99 Start-up data

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 59

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
20.07 TorqMaxSPC (maximum torque speed controller)

0
325
325
%
E
Maximum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - at the output of the speed
controller:
TorqRef2 (2.09)
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

23.01 SpeedRef (speed reference)

10000
0
-10000

C
rpm
Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed
(2.17) via:
Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or
Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

Sample of parameters

Parameter changes by control panel, DriveWindow or DriveWindow Light are

stored in the FLASH. Changes made by the overriding control are only stored in
the RAM.

Min., max., def.:

Minimum and maximum value or selection of parameter.
Default value or default selection of parameter.

Unit:
Shows the physical unit of a parameter, if applicable. The unit is displayed in the
control panel and PC tools.

E/C:
By means of USI Sel (16.09) it is possible to change between compact (C) and
extended (E) signal and parameter list. The compact list contains only signals and
parameters used for a typical commissioning.

Group.Index:
Signal and parameter numbers consists of group number and its index.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 60

Integer Scaling:
Communication between the drive and the overriding control uses 16 bit integer
values. The overriding control has to use the information given in integer scaling to
change the value of the parameter properly.
Example1:
If TorqMaxSPC (20.07) is written to from the overriding control an integer value of
100 corresponds to 1 %.
Example2:
If SpeedRef (23.01) is written to from the overriding control 20.000 equals the
speed (in rpm) shown in SpeedScaleAct (2.29) .

Type:
The data type is given with a short code:
I = 16-bit integer value (0, …, 65536)
SI = 16-bit signed integer value (-32768, …, 32767)
C: = text string

Volatile:
Y = values are NOT stored in the FLASH, they will be lost when the drive is de-
energized
N = values are stored in the FLASH, they will remain when the drive is de-
energized

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 61

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 1

Physical actual values

1.01 MotSpeedFilt (filtered motor speed)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Filtered actual speed feedback:
Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel (50.03)
Filtered with 1 s and
SpeedFiltTime (50.06)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.02 SpeedActEMF (speed actual from EMF)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Actual speed calculated from EMF.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.03 SpeedActEnc (speed actual from encoder)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Actual speed measured with pulse encoder.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.04 MotSpeed (motor speed)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Actual motor speed:
Choose motor speed feedback with M1SpeedFbSel (50.03). If M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) is
set to External the signal is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control.
SpeedFiltTime (50.06)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.05 SpeedActTach (speed actual from tacho)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Actual speed measured with analog tacho.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.06 MotCur (motor current)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative actual motor current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.07 MotTorqFilt (filtered motor torque)

%
C
-
-
Relative filtered motor torque in percent of the active motor nominal torque: -
Filtered by means of a 6th order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains
voltage period and
TorqActFiltTime (97.20)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.08 MotTorq (motor torque)

%
-
-
-

Motor torque in percent of the active motor nominal torque:

Filtered by means of a 6th order FIR filter (sliding average filter), filter time is 1 mains
voltage period.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.09 CurRipple (current ripple)

%
-
-
-

Relative current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.10 CurRippleFilt (filtered current ripple)

%
C
-
-
-

Relative filtered current ripple monitor output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03):

Filtered with 200 ms
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 62

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
1.11 MainsVoltActRel (relative actual mains voltage)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative actual mains voltage in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

1.12 MainsVoltAct (actual mains voltage)

C
-
-
-
V
Actual mains voltage:
Filtered with 10 ms
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: Y

1.13 ArmVoltActRel (relative actual armature voltage)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative actual armature voltage in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.14 ArmVoltAct (actual armature voltage)

C
-
-
-
V
Actual armature voltage:
Filtered with 10 ms
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.15 ConvCurActRel (relative actual converter current [DC])

%
C
-
-
-
Relative actual converter current in percent of ConvNomCur (4.05).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.16 ConvCurAct (actual converter current [DC])

C
-
-
-
A
Actual converter current:
Filtered with 10 ms
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.17 EMF VoltActRel (relative actual EMF)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative actual EMF in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02):
EMF VoltActRel (1.17).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.18 Unused
1.19 Unused
1.20 Mot1TempCalc (motor 1 calculated temperature)

%
-
-
-

E
Motor 1 calculated temperature from motor thermal model. Used for motor overtemperature
protection.
M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)
M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

1.21 Mot2TempCalc (motor 2 calculated temperature) %

-
-
-

Motor 2 calculated temperature from motor thermal model. Used for motor overtemperature E
protection.
M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33)
M2FaultLimLoad (49.34)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

1.22 Mot1TempMeas (motor 1 measured temperature)

C
-
-
-
/-

Motor 1 measured temperature. Used for motor overtemperature protection:

Unit depends on setting of M1TempSel (31.05):
°C /

NotUsed -
1 to 6 PT100 °C
PTC
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 63

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
1.23 Mot2TempMeas (motor 2 measured temperature)

-
-
-
/-
E
Motor 2 measured temperature. Used for motor overtemperature protection:
Unit depends on setting of M2TempSel (49.35):

°C /
NotUsed -
1 to 6 PT100 °C
PTC
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: I Volatile: Y

1.24 BridgeTemp (actual bridge temperature) (

°C
C
-
-
-
Actual bridge temperature in degree centigrade.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: Y

1.25 CtrlMode (control mode)

-
-
-
-
E
Used control mode:
0 = NotUsed -
1 = SpeedCtrl speed control
2 = TorqCtrl torque control
3 = CurCtrl current control
TorqSel (26.01)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

1.26 Unused
1.27 Unused
1.28 Unused
1.29 Mot1FldCurRel (motor 1 relative actual field current)

%
C
-
-
-
Motor 1 relative field current in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.30 Mot1FldCur (motor 1 actual field current)

C
-
-
-
A
Motor 1 field current:
Filtered with 500 ms
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.31 Mot2FldCurRel (motor 2 relative actual field current)

%
-
-
-

E
Motor 2 relative field current in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.32 Mot2FldCur (motor 2 actual field current)

-
-
-
A
E
Motor 2 field current:
Filtered with 500 ms
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.33 ArmCurActSl (12-pulse slave actual armature current)

-
-
-
A
E

Actual armature current of 12-pulse slave:

Valid in 12-pulse master only
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y
E

Unused
-
-
-
-

1.34
1.35 ArmCurAll (12-pulse parallel master and slave actual armature current)
-
-
-
A
E

Sum of actual armature current for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave:
Filtered with 10 ms
Valid in 12-pulse master only
Valid for 12-pulse parallel only
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.36 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 64

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
1.37 DC VoltSerAll (12-pulse serial master and slave actual DC voltage)

-
-
-
V
E
Sum of actual armature voltage for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave:
Valid in 12-pulse master only
Valid for 12-pulse serial/sequential only
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

1.38 MainsFreqAct (actual mains frequency)

Hz
C
-
-
-
Actual mains frequency.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Hz Type: I Volatile: Y

1.39 AhCounter (ampere-hour counter)

-
-
-
kAh
E
Ampere hour counter.
100 == 1kAh Type: I Volatile: Y

1.40 Unused
1.41 ProcSpeed (process speed)

-
-
-

E
m/min
Calculated process/line speed:
Scaled with WinderScale (50.17)
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 m/min Type: SI Volatile: Y
Group 2

Speed controller signals

2.01 SpeedRef2 (speed reference 2)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Speed reference after limiter:
M1SpeedMin (20.01)
M1SpeedMax (20.02)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.02 SpeedRef3 (speed reference 3)

C
-
-
-
rpm
Speed reference after speed ramp and jog input.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.03 SpeedErrNeg ( n)

C
-
-
-
rpm
n = speed actual - speed reference.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.04 TorqPropRef (proportional part of torque reference) %

-
-
-

P-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of the active motor nominal torque. E
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.05 TorqIntegRef (integral part of torque reference)

%
-
-
-

I-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of the active motor nominal torque.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.06 TorqDerRef (derivation part of torque reference)

%
-
-
-

D-part of the speed controller’s output in percent of the active motor nominal torque.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.07 TorqAccCompRef (torque reference for acceleration compensation)

%
C
-
-
-

Acceleration compensation output in percent of the active motor nominal torque.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 65

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
2.08 TorqRef1 (torque reference 1)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative torque reference value in percent of the active motor nominal torque after limiter for the
external torque reference:
TorqMaxTref (20.09)
TorqMinTref (20.10)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.09 TorqRef2 (torque reference 2)

%
C
-
-
-
Output value of the speed controller in percent of the active motor nominal torque after limiter:
TorqMaxSPC (20.07)
TorqMinSPC (20.08)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.10 TorqRef3 (torque reference 3)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative torque reference value in percent of the active motor nominal torque after torque selector:
TorqSel (26.01)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.11 TorqRef4 (torque reference 4)

%
C
-
-
-
= TorqRef3 (2.10) + LoadComp (26.02) in percent of the active motor nominal torque.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.12 Unused
2.13 TorqRefUsed (used torque reference)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative final torque reference value in percent of the active motor nominal torque after torque
limiter:
TorqMax (20.05)
TorqMin (20.06)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.14 TorqCorr (torque correction)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative additional torque reference in percent of the active motor nominal torque:
TorqCorrect (26.15)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.16 dv_dt (dv/dt)

C
-
-
-
rpm/s
Acceleration/deceleration (speed reference change) at the output of the speed reference ramp.

Int. Scaling: (2.29)/s Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.17 SpeedRefUsed (used speed reference)

C
-
-
-
Used speed reference selected with: rpm
Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or
Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.18 SpeedRef4 (speed reference 4)

C
-
-
-
rpm

= SpeedRef3 (2.02) + SpeedCorr (23.04).

Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.19 TorqMaxAll (torque maximum all)

%
C
-
-
-

Relative calculated positive torque limit in percent of the active motor nominal torque. Calculated
from maximum torque limit, field weakening and armature current limits:
TorqUsedMax (2.22)
FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) and
M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 66

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
2.20 TorqMinAll (torque minimum all)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative calculated negative torque limit in percent of the active motor nominal torque. Calculated
from minimum torque limit, field weakening and armature current limits:
TorqUsedMax (2.22)
FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) and
M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.21 Unused
2.22 TorqUsedMax (used torque maximum)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative positive torque limit in percent of the active motor nominal torque. Selected with:
TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18)
Connected to torque limiter after torque selector [TorqSel (21.01)] and load compensation
[LoadComp (26.02)].
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.23 TorqUsedMin (used torque minimum)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative negative torque limit in percent of the active motor nominal torque. Selected with:
TorqUsedMinSel (20.19)
Connected to torque limiter after torque selector [TorqSel (21.01)] and load compensation
[LoadComp (26.02)].
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.24 TorqRefExt (external torque reference)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative external torque reference value in percent of the active motor nominal torque after torque
reference A selector:
TorqRefA (25.01) and
TorqRefA Sel (25.10)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.25 Unused
2.26 TorqLimAct (actual used torque limit)

C
-
-
-
-
Shows parameter number of the actual active torque limit:
0=0 no limitation active
1 = 2.19 TorqMaxAll (2.19) is active, includes current limits and field weakening
2 = 2.20 TorqMinAll (2.20) is active, includes current limits and field weakening
3 = 2.22 TorqUsedMax (2.22) selected torque limit is active
4 = 2.23 TorqUsedMin (2.23) selected torque limit is active
5 = 20.07 TorqMaxSPC (20.07) speed controller limit is active
6 = 20.08 TorqMinSPC (20.08) speed controller limit is active
7 = 20.09 TorqMaxTref (20.09) external reference limit is active
8 = 20.10 TorqMinTref (20.10) external reference limit is active
9 = 20.22 TorqGenMax (20.22) regenerating limit is active
10 = 2.08 TorqRef1 (2.08) limits TorqRef2 (2.09), see also TorqSel (26.01)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

2.27 Unused
2.28 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 67

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
2.29 SpeedScaleAct (actual used speed scaling)

C
-
-
-
rpm
The value of SpeedScaleAct (2.29) equals 20.000 speed units.
Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel (8.09) = Motor1:
20.000 speed units == M1SpeedScale (50.01), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) 10
20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin (20.01) and
M1SpeedMax (20.02), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) < 10
or mathematically:
If (50.01) 10 then 20.000 == (50.01) in rpm
If (50.01) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|] in rpm

Currently used speed scaling in rpm for MotSel (8.09) = Motor2:

20.000 speed units == M2SpeedScale (49.22), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) 10
20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin (49.19) and
M2SpeedMax (49.20), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) < 10
or mathematically:
If (49.22) 10 then 20.000 == (49.22) in rpm
If (49.22) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(49.19)|, |(49.22)|] in rpm
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.30 SpeedRefExt1 (external speed reference 1)

C
-
-
-
rpm
External speed reference 1 after reference 1 multiplexer:
Ref1Mux (11.02)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.31 SpeedRefExt2 (external speed reference 2)

C
-
-
-
rpm
External speed reference 2 after reference 2 multiplexer:
Ref2Mux (11.12)
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

2.32 SpeedRampOut (speed ramp output)

C
rpm
Speed reference after ramp
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y
Group 3

Reference actual values

3.01 DataLogStatus (status data logger)

-
-
-
-
0 = NotInit data logger not initialized E
1 = Empty data logger is empty
2 = Running data logger is running (activated)
3 = Triggered data logger is triggered but not filled jet
4 = Filled data logger is triggered and filled (data can be uploaded)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

3.02 Unused
3.03 SquareWave (square wave)
-
-
-
-
E

Output signal of the square wave generator.

Int. Scaling: 1==1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.04 Unused
3.05 Unused
3.06 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 68

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
3.07 PosCountLow (position counter low value)

-
-
-
-
E
Position counter low word:
PosCountInitLo (50.08)
Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):
PulseEdges 1 == 1 pulse edge
Scaled 0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

3.08 PosCountHigh (position counter high value)

-
-
-
-
E
Position counter high word:
PosCountInitHi (50.09)
Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):
PulseEdges 1 == 65536 pulse edges
Scaled 1 == 1 revolution
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.09 PID Out (output PID controller)

-
-
-
-
E
PID controller output.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.10 Unused
3.11 CurRef (current reference)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) after scaling with field weakening.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.12 CurRefUsed (used current reference)

%
C
-
-
-
Relative current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) after current limitation:
M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12)
M2CurLimBrdg2 (20.13)
MaxCurLimSpeed (43.17 to 43.22)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.13 ArmAlpha (armature , firing angle)

C
-
-
-
°
Firing angle ( ).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: Y

3.14 Unused
3.15 ReactCur (reactive current)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative actual reactive motor current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.16 Unused
3.17 ArmAlphaSl (12-pulse slave armature , firing angle)
-
-
-
°
E

Firing angle ( ) of 12-pulse slave converter:

Valid in 12-pulse master only
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: Y

3.18 Unused
3.19 Unused
3.20 PLLOut (phase locked loop output)
-
-
-
s
E

Mains voltage cycle (period time). Is used to check if the synchronization is working properly:
1/50Hz = 0.2s = 20.000 s
1/60Hz = 0.167s = 16.667 s
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: Y

3.21 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 69

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
3.22 CurCtrlIntegOut (integral part of current controller output)

%
-
-
-

E
I-part of the current controller’s output in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.23 Unused
3.24 FluxRefFldWeak (flux reference for field weakening)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative flux reference at speeds above the field weakening point (base speed) in percent of the
nominal flux.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.25 VoltRef1 (EMF voltage reference 1)

%
C
-
-
-
Selected relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02):
EMF RefSel (46.03)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.26 VoltRef2 (EMF voltage reference 2)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative EMF voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) after ramp and limitation (input to
EMF controller):
VoltRefSlope (46.06)
VoltPosLim (46.07)
VoltNegLim (46.08)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.27 FluxRefEMF (flux reference after EMF controller)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative EMF flux reference in percent of the nominal flux after EMF controller.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.28 FluxRefSum (sum of flux reference)

%
-
-
-

E
= FluxRefEMF (3.27) + FluxRefFldWeak (3.24) in percent of the nominal flux.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.29 Unused
3.30 FldCurRefM1 (motor 1 field current reference)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative motor 1 field current reference in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

3.31 FldCurRefM2 (motor 2 field current reference)

%
-
-
-

E
Relative motor 2 field current reference in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y
Group 4

Information

4.01 FirmwareVer (firmware version)

C
-
-
-
-

Name of the loaded firmware version. The format is:

-yyy
with: - = single phase firmware for demo units and yyy = consecutively numbered version.
Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.02 Unused
4.03 ApplicName (name of application program)
C
-
-
-
-

Name of the loaded application program.

Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 70

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.04 ConvNomVolt (converter nominal voltage measurement circuit)

C
-
-
-
V
Adjustment of voltage measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). Read from TypeCode
(97.01) or set with S ConvScaleVolt (97.03):
Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S ConvScaleVolt (97.03) = 0
Read from S ConvScaleVolt (97.03) if S ConvScaleVolt (97.03) 0
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: Y

4.05 ConvNomCur (converter nominal current measurement circuit)

C
-
-
-
A
Adjustment of current measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). Read from TypeCode
(97.01) or set with S ConvScaleCur (97.02):
Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S ConvScaleCur (97.02) = 0
Read from S ConvScaleCur (97.02) if S ConvScaleCur (97.02) 0
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: Y

4.06 Mot1FexType (motor 1 type of field exciter)

C
-
-
-
-
Motor 1 field exciter type. Read from M1UsedFexType (99.12):
0 = NotUsed no or foreign field exciter connected
1 = OnBoard integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default
2 = FEX-425-Int internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only)
3 = DCF803-0035 external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 5 A to 35 A
(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)
4 = DCF803-0050 external 1-Q 50 A field exciter
5 = DCF804-0050 external 4-Q 50 A field exciter
6 = DCF803-0060 external 1-Q 60 A field exciter
7 = DCF804-0060 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter
8 = DCS800-S01 external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter
9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter
10 = reserved
to
19 = reserved
20 = FEX-4-Term5A external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A
(terminals X100.2 and X100.3)
21 = reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.07 Mot2FexType (motor 2 type of field exciter)

-
-
-
-
E
Motor 2 field exciter type coding. Read from M2UsedFexType (49.07):
0 = NotUsed no or foreign field exciter connected
1 = OnBoard integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default
2 = FEX-425-Int internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only)
3 = DCF803-0035 external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 5 A to 35 A
(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)
4 = DCF803-0050 external 1-Q 50 A field exciter
5 = DCF804-0050 external 4-Q 50 A field exciter
6 = DCF803-0060 external 1-Q 60 A field exciter
7 = DCF804-0060 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter
8 = DCS800-S01 external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter
9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter
10 = reserved
to
19 = reserved
20 = FEX-4-Term5A external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A
(terminals X100.2 and X100.3)
21 = reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 71

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.08 Mot1FexSwVer (motor 1 firmware version of field exciter)

C
-
-
-
-
Motor 1 field exciter firmware version. The format is:
yyy
with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.09 Mot2FexSwVer (motor 2 firmware version of field exciter)

-
-
-
-
E
Motor 2 field exciter firmware version. The format is:
yyy
with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.10 Unused
4.11 Com8SwVersion (firmware version of SDCS-COM-8)

E
SDCS-COM-8 firmware version. The format is:
yyy
with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: Type: C Volatile: Y

4.12 ApplicVer (application version)

C
-
-
-
-
Version of the loaded application program. The format is:
yyy
with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.
Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.13 DriveLibVer (drive library version)

C
-
-
-
-
Version of the loaded function block library. The format is:
yyy
with: yyy = consecutively numbered version.
Int. Scaling: - Type: C Volatile: Y

4.14 ConvType (converter type)

C
-
-
-
-
Recognized converter type. Read from TypeCode (97.01):
0 = None when TypeCode (97.01) = None
1 = D1 D1 converter
2 = D2 D2 converter
3 = D3 D3 converter
4 = D4 D4 converter
5 = D5 D5 converter
6 = D6 D6 converter
7 = D7 D7 converter
8 = ManualSet set by user, see S ConvScaleCur (97.02), S ConvScaleVolt (97.03), S
MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) or S BlockBridge2 (97.07) for e.g. rebuild kits
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 72

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.15 QuadrantType (quadrant type of converter; 1 or 2 bridges)

C
-
-
-
-
Recognized converter quadrant type. Read from TypeCode (97.01) or set with S BlockBrdg2
(97.07):
Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S BlockBrdg2 (97.07) = 0
Read from S BlockBrdg2 (97.07) if S BlockBrdg2 (97.07) 0
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
0 = Auto operation mode is taken from TypeCode (97.01), default
1 = BlockBridge2 bridge 2 blocked (== 2-Q operation)
2 = RelBridge2 bridge 2 released (== 4-Q operation)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.16 ConvOvrCur (converter overcurrent [DC] level)

C
-
-
-
A
Converter current tripping level
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: Y

4.17 MaxBridgeTemp (maximum bridge temperature)

°C
C
-
-
-
Maximum bridge temperature in degree centigrade. Read from TypeCode (97.01) or set with S
MaxBrdgTemp (97.04):
Read from TypeCode (97.01) if S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) = 0
Read from S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) if S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) 0
This signal is set during initialization of the drive, new values are shown after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 73

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.18 DCSLinkStat1 (DCSLink status 1 of field exciter nodes)

C
-
-
-
-
Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 1 to 16:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 Node1 1 DCSLink node1 active and OK
0 DCSLink node1 not active or faulty
B1 Node2 1 DCSLink node2 active and OK
0 DCSLink node2 not active or faulty
B2 Node3 1 DCSLink node3 active and OK
0 DCSLink node3 not active or faulty
B3 Node4 1 DCSLink node4 active and OK
0 DCSLink node4 not active or faulty
B4 Node5 1 DCSLink node5 active and OK
0 DCSLink node5 not active or faulty
B5 Node6 1 DCSLink node6 active and OK
0 DCSLink node6 not active or faulty
B6 Node7 1 DCSLink node7 active and OK
0 DCSLink node7 not active or faulty
B7 Node8 1 DCSLink node8 active and OK
0 DCSLink node8 not active or faulty
B8 Node9 1 DCSLink node9 active and OK
0 DCSLink node9 not active or faulty
B9 Node10 1 DCSLink node10 active and OK
0 DCSLink node10 not active or faulty
B10 Node11 1 DCSLink node11 active and OK
0 DCSLink node11 not active or faulty
B11 Node12 1 DCSLink node12 active and OK
0 DCSLink node12 not active or faulty
B12 Node13 1 DCSLink node13 active and OK
0 DCSLink node13 not active or faulty
B13 Node14 1 DCSLink node14 active and OK
0 DCSLink node14 not active or faulty
B14 Node15 1 DCSLink node15 active and OK
0 DCSLink node15 not active or faulty
B15 Node16 1 DCSLink node16 active and OK
0 DCSLink node16 not active or faulty
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 74

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.19 DCSLinkStat2 (DCSLink status 2 of field exciter nodes)

-
-
-
-
E
Status of DCSLink for field exciter nodes 17 to 32:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 Node17 1 DCSLink node17 active and OK
0 DCSLink node17 not active or faulty
B1 Node18 1 DCSLink node18 active and OK
0 DCSLink node18 not active or faulty
B2 Node19 1 DCSLink node19 active and OK
0 DCSLink node19 not active or faulty
B3 Node20 1 DCSLink node20 active and OK
0 DCSLink node20 not active or faulty
B4 Node21 1 DCSLink node21 active and OK
0 DCSLink node21 not active or faulty
B5 Node22 1 DCSLink node22 active and OK
0 DCSLink node22 not active or faulty
B6 Node23 1 DCSLink node23 active and OK
0 DCSLink node23 not active or faulty
B7 Node24 1 DCSLink node24 active and OK
0 DCSLink node24 not active or faulty
B8 Node25 1 DCSLink node25 active and OK
0 DCSLink node25 not active or faulty
B9 Node26 1 DCSLink node26 active and OK
0 DCSLink node26 not active or faulty
B10 Node27 1 DCSLink node27 active and OK
0 DCSLink node27 not active or faulty
B11 Node28 1 DCSLink node28 active and OK
0 DCSLink node28 not active or faulty
B12 Node29 1 DCSLink node29 active and OK
0 DCSLink node29 not active or faulty
B13 Node30 1 DCSLink node30 active and OK
0 DCSLink node30 not active or faulty
B14 Node31 1 DCSLink node31 active and OK
0 DCSLink node31 not active or faulty
B15 Node32 1 DCSLink node32 active and OK
0 DCSLink node32 not active or faulty
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 75

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
4.20 Ext IO Status (external IO status)

-
-
-
-
E
Status of external I/O:
Bit Value Comment
B0 1 RAIO1 detected, see AIO ExtModule (98.06)
0 RAIO1 not existing or faulty
B1 1 RAIO2 detected, see AIO MotTempMeas (98.12)
0 RAIO2 not existing or faulty
B2 1 -
0 -
B3 1 -
0 -
B4 1 RDIO1 detected, see DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)
0 RDIO1 not existing or faulty
B5 1 RDIO2 detected, see DIO ExtModule2 (98.04)
0 RDIO2 not existing or faulty
B6 1 -
0 -
B7 1 -
0 -
B8 1 -
0 -
B9 1 -
0 -
B10 1 SDCS-DSL-4 detected, see group 94
0 SDCS-DSL-4 not existing or faulty
B11 1 SDCS-IOB-2x detected
0 SDCS-IOB-2x not existing or faulty
B12 1 SDCS-IOB-3 detected
0 SDCS-IOB-3 not existing or faulty
B13 1 SDCS-COM-8 detected, see group 70
0 SDCS-COM-8 not excising or faulty
B14 1 -
0 -
B15 1 -
0 -
1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

4.21 CPU Load (load of processor)

%
C
-
-
The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts: -
CPU Load (4.21) shows the load of firmware and
ApplLoad (4.22) shows the load of application.
Neither should reach 100%.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

4.22 ApplLoad (load of application)

%
C
-
-
-

The calculating power of the processor is divided into two parts:

CPU Load (4.21) shows the load of firmware and
ApplLoad (4.22) shows the load of application.
Neither should reach 100%.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

4.23 MotNomTorque (motor nominal torque)

C
-
-
-
Nm

Calculated nominal motor torque.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1Nm Type: I Volatile: Y

4.24 ProgressSignal (progress signal for auto tunings)

%
-
-
-

Progress signal for auto tunings used for Startup Assistants.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 76

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 5

Analog I/O

5.01 AITacho Val (analog input for tacho)

C
-
-
-
V
Measured actual voltage at analog tacho input. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and jumper setting.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.02 Unused
5.03 AI1 Val (analog input 1 value)

C
-
-
-
V
Measured actual voltage at analog input 1. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and jumper settings.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.04 AI2 Val (analog input 2 value)

C
-
-
-
V
Measured actual voltage at analog input 2. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and jumper settings.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.05 AI3 Val (analog input 3 value)

-
-
-
V
E
Measured actual voltage at analog input 3. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and jumper settings.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.06 AI4 Val (analog input 4 value)

-
-
-
V
E
Measured actual voltage at analog input 4. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and jumper settings.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.07 AI5 Val (analog input 5 value)

-
-
-
V
E
Measured actual voltage at analog input 5. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and DIP-switch settings.
Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule (98.06).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.08 AI6 Val (analog input 6 value)

-
-
-
V
E
Measured actual voltage at analog input 6. The integer scaling may differ, depending on the
connected hardware and DIP-switch settings.
Available only with RAIO extension module see AIO ExtModule (98.06).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.09 Unused
5.10 Unused
5.11 AO1 Val (analog output 1 value)
C
-
-
-
V

Measured actual voltage at analog output 1.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

5.12 AO2 Val (analog output 2 value)

C
-
-
-
V

Measured actual voltage at analog output 2.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 V Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 77

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 6

Drive logic signals

6.01 SystemTime (converter system time)

0
64000
0

C
min
Shows the time of the converter in minutes.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 min Type: I Volatile: Y

6.02 Unused
6.03 CurCtrlStat1 (1st current controller status)

C
-
-
-
-
1st current controller status word:
Bit Value Comment
B0 1 command FansOn
0 command FansOff
B1 1 -
0 -
B2 1 -
0 -
B3 1 motor heating function active
0 motor heating function not active
B4 1 field direction reverse
0 field direction forward
B5 1 command FieldOn
0 command FieldOff
B6 1 dynamic braking active
0 dynamic braking not active
B7 1 command MainContactorOn
0 command MainContactorOff
B8 1 command DynamicBrakingOn (this signal works like the MainContactorOn
command as long as no dynamic breaking is requested)
0 command DynamicBrakingOff (this signal works like the MainContactorOff
command as long as no dynamic breaking is requested)
B9 1 drive is generating
0 drive is motoring
B10 1 -
0 -
B11 1 firing pulses active (on)
0 firing pulses blocked
B12 1 continuous current
0 discontinuous current
B13 1 zero current detected
0 current nonzero
B14 1 command trip DC-breaker (continuous signal)
0 no action
B15 1 command trip DC-breaker (1 s pulse)
0 no action
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 78

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
6.04 CurCtrlStat2 (2nd current controller status)

C
-
-
-
-
nd
check 2 current controller status word. The current controller will be blocked, if any for the bits is set (0
with == OK):
R&D Bit Value Meaning
B0 1 overcurrent, F502 ArmOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 1]
0 no action
B1 1 mains overvoltage (AC), F513 MainsOvrVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 12]
0 no action
B2 1 mains undervoltage (AC), F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11]
0 no action
B3 1 waiting for reduction of EMF to match the mains voltage [see RevVoltMargin
(44.21)]
0 no action
B4 1 F533 ReversalTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0] or F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3
(9.03) bit 1]
0 no action
B5 1 OperModeSel (43.01) = 12P xxxx: partner blocked)
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldExciter: Overvoltage protection active
(freewheeling)
0 no action
B6 1 motor 1 field exciter selftest faulty, F529 M1FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit
12]
0 motor 1 field exciter selftest OK
B7 1 motor 1 field exciter not ready, F537 M1FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 4]
0 motor 1 field exciter ready
B8 1 motor 2 field exciter selftest faulty, F530 M2FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit
13]
0 motor 2 field exciter selftest OK
B9 1 motor 2 field exciter not ready, F538 M2FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 5]
0 motor 2 field exciter ready
B10 1 waiting for zero current (value can only change to 1 after reversal delay is
elapsed)
0 no action
B11 1 field reversal active, armature current controller is blocked
0 no action
B12 1 -
0 -
B13 1 -
0 -
B14 1 mains not in synchronism (AC), F514 MainsNotSync [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit
13]
0 no action
B15 1 current controller not released
0 no action
Note1:
A set bit does not necessarily lead to a fault message it depends also on the status of the drive.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

6.05 SelBridge (selected bridge)

-
-
-
-
E

Selected (current-conducting) bridge:

0 = NoBridge no bridge selected
1 = Bridge1 bridge 1 sel. (motoring bridge)
2 = Bridge2 bridge 2 sel. (generating bridge)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 79

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
6.06 FldCtrlAlarm (3-phase field controller alarm)

-
-
-
-
E
3-phase field controller alarm word. This packed binary signal includes alarm signals used in field
exciter mode for load monitoring:
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldExciter
Bit Value Comment
B0 1 DC voltage is over alarm limit of OvrVoltAlarmLim (46.11)
0 no action
B1 1 DC current is under alarm limit of MinCurAlarmLim (46.13)
0 no action
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

6.07 Unused
6.08 Unused
6.09 CtrlStatMas (12-pulse master control status)

-
-
-
-
E
12-pulse master control status:
Bit Value Comment
B0 1 command On to 12-pulse slave
0 no action
B1 1 command Off2N to 12-pulse slave (low active)
0 no action
B2 1 -
0 -
B3 1 command Run to 12-pulse slave
0 no action
B4 1 command field exciter On
0 command field exciter Off
B5 1 dynamic braking
0 no action
B6 1 12-pulse serial operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)
0 12-pulse parallel operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)
B7 1 command Reset to 12-pulse slave
0 no action
B8 1 -
0 -
B9 1 -
0 -
B10 1 -
0 -
B11 1 autotuning armature current controller active
0 no action
B12 1 zero current detected + RevDly (43.14) is elapsed
0 no action
B13 1 bridge change over active
0 no action
B14 1 CurCtrlStat2 (6.04) > 0 (current controller is blocked)
0 no action
B15 1 CurRefUsed (3,12) negative
0 CurRefUsed (3.12) positive
The control bits B3 to B6 (Reset, On, Run and Off2N) are only valid in the 12-pulse
slave, if in the 12-pulse slave CommandSel (10.01) = 12P Link
Valid in 12-pulse master and slave
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 80

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
6.10 CtrlStatSla (12-pulse slave control status)

-
-
-
-
E
12-pulse slave control status:
Bit Value Comment
B0 1 -
0 -
B1 1 -
0 -
B2 1 -
0 -
B3 1 slave is Tripped
0 no action
B4 1 -
0 -
B5 1 -
0 -
B6 1 12-pulse serial operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)
0 12-pulse parallel operation, see OperModeSel (43.01)
B7 1 -
0 -
B8 1 -
0 -
B9 1 -
0 -
B10 1 -
0 -
B11 1 -
0 -
B12 1 -
0 -
B13 1 bridge change over active
0 no action
B14 1 CurCtrlStat2 (6.04) > 0 (current controller is blocked)
0 no action
B15 1 CurRefUsed (3,12) negative
0 CurRefUsed (3.12) positive
Valid in 12-pulse master and slave
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

6.11 Unused
6.12 Mot1FexStatus (motor 1 field exciter status)
C
-
-
-
-
Motor 1 field exciter status:
0 = NotUsed no field exciter connected
1 = OK field exciter and communication OK
2 = ComFault F516 M1FexCom [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 15], communication faulty
3 = FexFaulty F529 M1FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 12], field exciter selftest faulty
4 = FexNotReady F537 M1FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 4], field exciter not ready
5 = FexUnderCur F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8], field exciter undercurrent
6 = FexOverCur F515 M1FexOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 14], field exciter overcurrent
7 = WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType (99.12) and M2UsedFexType (49.07)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 81

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
6.13 Mot2FexStatus (motor 2 field exciter status)

-
-
-
-
E
Motor 1 field exciter status:
0 = NotUsed no field exciter connected
1 = OK field exciter and communication OK
2 = ComFault F519 M2FexCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 2], communication faulty
3 = FexFaulty F530 M2FexNotOK [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 13], field exciter selftest faulty
4 = FexNotReady F538 M2FexRdyLost [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 5], field exciter not ready
5 = FexUnderCur F542 M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9], field exciter undercurrent
6 = FexOverCur F518 M2FexOverCur [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 1], field exciter overcurrent
7 = WrongSetting check setting of M1UsedFexType (99.12) and M2UsedFexType (49.07)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y
Group 7

Control words

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 82

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
7.01 MainCtrlWord (main control word, MCW)

C
-
-
-
-
Main control word:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 On (Off1N) 1 Command to RdyRun state. MainContCtrlMode (21.16)
= On: Close contactors, start field exciter and fans.
MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On&Run:
RdyRun flag in MainStatWord (8.01) is forced to 1
0 Command to Off state. Stopping via Off1Mode (21.02),
then open contactors, stop field exciter and fans.
B1 Off2N 1 No Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop)
0 Command to OnInhibit state. Stop by coasting, open
contactors, stop field exciter and fans immediately.
B2 Off3N 1 No Off3 (E-stop)
0 Command to OnInhibit state. Stopping via E StopMode
(21.04), open contactors, stop field exciter and fans as
needed
B3 Run 1 Command to RdyRef state. Run with selected speed
reference
0 Command to RdyRun state. Stop via StopMode (21.03).
B4 RampOutZero 1 no action
0 speed ramp output is forced to zero
B5 RampHold 1 no action
0 freeze (hold) speed ramp
B6 RampInZero 1 no action
0 speed ramp input is forced to zero
B7 Reset 1 acknowledge fault indications with the positive edge
0 no action
B8 Inching1 1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed1 (23.02),
active only with CommandSel (10.01) =
MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero = RampHold =
RampInZero = 0 plus Run command; Inching2
overrides Inching1
0 no action
B9 Inching2 1 constant speed defined by FixedSpeed2 (23.03),
active only with CommandSel (10.01) =
MainCtrlWord and RampOutZero = RampHold =
RampInZero = 0 plus Run command; Inching2
overrides Inching1
0 no action
B10 RemoteCmd 1 overriding control enabled (overriding control has to set
this value to 1)
0 If MainCtrlWord (7.01) 0, retain last UsedMCW (7.04)
and last SpeedRefUsed (2.17). If MainCtrlWord (7.01) =
0 then UsedMCW (7.04) = 0 and the drive is stopped.
B11 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected by
parameters
B12 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected by
parameters
B13 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected by
parameters
B14 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected by
parameters
B15 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected by
parameters
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 83

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
7.02 AuxCtrlWord (auxiliary control word 1, ACW1)

C
-
-
-
-
Auxiliary control word 1:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 RestartDataLog 1 restart data logger
0 no action
B1 TrigDataLog 1 trigger data logger
0 no action
B2 RampBypass 1 bypass speed ramp (speed ramp output is forced to
value of speed ramp input)
0 no action
B3 BalRampOut 1 speed ramp output is forced to BalRampRef (22.08)
0 no action
B4 LimSpeedRef4 1 SpeedRef4 (2.18) is not limited
0 SpeedRef4 (2.18) is limited by M1SpeedMax (20.02) /
M1SpeedMin (20.01) respectively by M2SpeedMax
(49.19) / M2SpeedMin (49.20)
B5 reserved 1
0
B6 HoldSpeedCtrl 1 freeze (hold) the I-part of the speed controller
0 no action
B7 WindowCtrl 1 release window control
0 block window control
B8 BalSpeedCtrl 1 speed controller output is forced to BalRef (24.11)
0 no action
B9 SyncCommand 1 positioning: synchronizing command from
SyncCommand (10.04)
0 no action
B10 SyncDisable 1 positioning: block synchronizing command
0 no action
B11 ResetSyncRdy 1 positioning: reset SyncRdy [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5]
0 no action
B12 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected
by parameters
B13 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected
by parameters
B14 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected
by parameters
B15 aux. control d used by, Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control to control various functions selected
by parameters
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 84

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
7.03 AuxCtrlWord2 (auxiliary control word 2, ACW2)

C
-
-
-
-
Auxiliary control word 1:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 reserved 1
0
B1 reserved 1
0
B2 reserved 1
0
B3 reserved 1
0
B4 DisableBridge1 1 bridge 1 blocked
0 bridge 1 released
B5 DisableBridge2 1 bridge 2 blocked
0 bridge 2 released
B6 reserved 1
0
B7 reserved 1
0
B8 DriveDirection 1 drive direction reverse (see note 1)
0 drive direction forward (see note 1)
B9 reserved 1
0
B10 DirectSpeedRef 1 speed ramp output is overwritten and forced to
DirectSpeedRef (23.15)
0 speed ramp is active
B11 reserved 1
0
B12 ForceBrake 1 apply the brake
0 brake not applied (see note 2)
B13 reserved 1
0
B14 reserved 1
0
B15 ResetPIDCtrl 1 reset and force PID-controller
0 release PID controller
Note1:
Changes of DriveDirection become active only in drive state RdyRun. Changing the speed
direction of a running drive (RdyRef state) by means of DriveDirection is not possible.
Note2:
In case ForceBrake = 0, the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic in group 42 (Brake
control).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

7.04 UsedMCW (used main control word, UMCW)

C
-
-
-
-

Internal used (selected) main control word. The selection is depending on the drives local/remote
control and CommandSel (10.01).
The bit functionality is the same as the in the MainCtrlWord (7.01). Not all functions are available in
local control or local I/O mode.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 85

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
7.05 DO CtrlWord (digital output control word, DOCW)

C
-
-
-
-
The DO control word is used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control. DO1
to DO8 can only be used by Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control if the
corresponding DOxIndex (14.xx) is set to zero. DO9 to DO12 are only available for Adaptive
Program, application program or overriding control.
For all other purposes DO1 to DO8 have to be manually selected by parameters in group 14
(Digital outputs).
Bit Name Comment
B0 DO1 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B1 DO2 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B2 DO3 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B3 DO4 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B4 DO5 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B5 DO6 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B6 DO7 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B7 DO8 this bit has to be send to the digital output via the parameters of group
14 (Digital outputs)
B8 DO9 this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO
ExtModule1 (98.03)
B9 DO10 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO
ExtModule1 (98.03)
B10 DO11 this bit is written directly to DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO
ExtModule2 (98.04)
B11 DO12 this bit is written directly to DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO
ExtModule2 (98.04)
B12 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

7.06 RFE CtrlWord (control word resonance frequency eliminator, RFECW)

-
-
-
-
E
Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 FilterRelease 1 release RFE filter
0 block RFE filter
B1 BalFilter 1 balance RFE filter (on parameter change or release)
0 no action
B2 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 86

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 8

Status / limit words

8.01 MainStatWord (main status word, MSW)

C
-
-
-
-
Main status word:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 RdyOn 1 ready to switch on
0 not ready to switch on
B1 RdyRun 1 ready to generate torque
0 not ready to generate torque
B2 RdyRef 1 operation released (Running)
0 operation blocked
B3 Tripped 1 fault indication
0 no fault
B4 Off2NStatus 1 Off2 not active
0 Off2 (OnInhibit state) active
B5 Off3NStatus 1 Off3 not active
0 Off3 (OnInhibit state) active
B6 OnInhibited 1 OnInhibited state is active after a:
- fault
- Emergency Off / Coast Stop (Off3)
- E-stop (Off2)
- OnInhibited via digital input Off2 (10.08) or E Stop
(10.09)
0 OnInhibit state not active
B7 Alarm 1 alarm indication
0 no alarm
B8 AtSetpoint 1 setpoint / actual value monitoring in the tolerance zone
0 setpoint / actual value monitoring out of the tolerance
zone
B9 Remote 1 remote control
0 local control
B10 AboveLimit 1 speed greater than defined in SpeedLev (50.10)
0 speed lower or equal than defined SpeedLev (50.10)
B11 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 87

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
8.02 AuxStatWord (auxiliary status word, ASW)

C
-
-
-
-
Auxiliary status word:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 DataLogReady 1 contents of data logger is readable
0 contents of data logger is not readable
B1 OutOfWindow 1 actual speed is out of window defined by WinWidthPos
(23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09)
0 actual speed is inside the defined window
B2 E-StopCoast 1 E-stop function has failed, see E StopDecMin (21.05), E
StopDecMax (21.06) and DecMonDly (21.07)
0 no action
B3 User1 1 macro User1 active, see ApplMacro (99.08)
0 macro User1 not active
B4 User2 1 macro User2 active, see ApplMacro (99.08)
0 macro User2 not active
B5 SyncRdy 1 positioning: synchronous ready
0 positioning: not ready
B6 Fex1Ack 1 motor 1 field exciter acknowledged
0 no action
B7 Fex2Ack 1 motor 2 field exciter acknowledged
0 no action
B8 BrakeCmd 1 command to open (lift) the brake is given, see group 42
(Brake control)
0 command to apply the brake is given
B9 Limiting 1 drive is in a limit, see LimWord (8.03)
0 drive is not in a limit,
B10 TorqCtrl 1 drive is torque controlled
0 no action
B11 ZeroSpeed 1 actual motor speed is in the zero speed limit defined by
ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)
0 actual motor speed is out of the zero speed limit
B12 EMFSpeed 1 M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = EMF
0 no action
B13 FaultOrAlarm 1 fault or alarm indication
0 no fault or alarm indication
B14 DriveDirectionNeg 1 negative drive direction active
0 positive drive direction active
B15 AutoReclosing 1 auto reclosing logic is active
0 no action
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 88

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
8.03 LimWord (limit word, LW)

-
-
-
-
E
Limit word:
Bit active limit
B0 TorqMax (20.05) or TorqMaxAll (2.19)
B1 TorqMin (20.06) or TorqMinAll (2.20)
B2 TorqMaxSPC (20.07) or TorqMaxAll (2.19)
B3 TorqMinSPC (20.08) or TorqMinAll (2.20)
B4 TorqMaxTref (20.09)
B5 TorqMinTref (20.10)
B6 M1SpeedMax (20.02) or M2SpeedMax (49.20)
B7 M1SpeedMin (20.01) or M2SpeedMin (49.19)
B8 M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12) or M2CurLimBrdg1 (49.12)
B9 M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) or M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13)
B10 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

8.04 Unused
8.05 DI StatWord (digital inputs status word, DISW)

C
-
-
-
-
Digital input word, shows the value of the digital inputs before inversion [DI1Invert (10.25), …,
DI11Invert (10.35)]:

to DI StatWord (8.05)

from DIx DIxInvert to drive

Bit Name Comment / default setting

B0 DI1 ConvFanAck (10.20), actual setting depends on macro
B1 DI2 MotFanAck (10.06), actual setting depends on macro
B2 DI3 MainContAck (10.21), actual setting depends on macro
B3 DI4 Off2 (10.08), actual setting depends on macro
B4 DI5 E Stop (10.09), actual setting depends on macro
B5 DI6 Reset (10.03), actual setting depends on macro
B6 DI7 OnOff (10.15), actual setting depends on macro
B7 DI8 StartStop (10.16), actual setting depends on macro
B8 DI9 DI1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)
B9 DI10 DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)
B10 DI11 DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03)
B11 DI12 DI1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available
for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.
B12 DI13 DI2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available
for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.
B13 DI14 DI3 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04). Only available
for Adaptive Program, application program or overriding control.
B14 reserved
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 89

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
8.06 DO StatWord (digital outputs status word, DOSW)

C
-
-
-
-
Digital output word, shows the value of the digital outputs after inversion:

to DO StatWord (8.06)

from drive invert DOx to DOx

Bit Name Comment / default setting

B0 DO1 DO1Index (14.01) = 603 and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 15, FansOn, actual setting
depends on macro
B1 DO2 DO2Index (14.03) = 603 and DO2BitNo (14.04) = 5, FieldOn, actual setting
depends on macro
B2 DO3 DO3Index (14.05) = 603 and DO3BitNo (14.06) = 7, MainContactorOn,
actual setting depends on macro
B3 DO4 DO4Index (14.07) = 0 and DO4BitNo (14.08) = 0, Not connected, actual
setting depends on macro
B4 DO5 DO5Index (14.09) = 0 and DO5BitNo (14.10) = 0, Not connected, actual
setting depends on macro
B5 DO6 DO6Index (14.11) = 0 and DO6BitNo (14.12) = 0, Not connected, actual
setting depends on macro
B6 DO7 DO7Index (14.13) = 0 and DO7BitNo (14.14) = 0, Not connected, actual
setting depends on macro
B7 DO8 DO8Index (14.15) = 603 and DO8BitNo (14.16) = 7, MainContactorOn,
actual setting depends on macro
B8 DO9 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03), written to by
DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 8
B9 DO10 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule1 (98.03), written to by
DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 9
B10 DO11 DO1 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), written to by
DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 10
B11 DO12 DO2 of the extension IO defined by DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), written to by
DO CtrlWord (7.05) bit 11
B12 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

8.07 Unused
8.08 DriveStat (drive status)
C
-
-
-
-

Drive status:
0 = OnInhibited drive is in OnInhibit state
1 = ChangeToOff drive is changing to Off
2 = Off drive is Off
3 = RdyOn drive is ready on
4 = RdyRun drive is ready run
5 = Running drive is Running
6 = Stopping drive is Stopping
7 = Off3 drive is in Off3 state (E-stop)
8 = Off2 drive is in Off2 state (Emergency Off or Coast Stop)
9 = Tripped drive is Tripped
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 90

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
8.09 MotSel (selected motor)

-
-
-
-
E
Select motor and field exciter:
0 = Motor1 motor 1 and field exciter 1 are selected
1 = Motor2 motor 2 and field exciter 2 are selected
- See ParChange (10.10)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

8.10 MacroSel (selected macro)

C
-
-
-
-
Currently selected macro:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = Factory factory (default) parameter set
2 = User1Load User1 parameter set
3 = User1Save save actual parameter set into User1
4 = User2Load User2 parameter set
5 = User2Save save actual parameter set into User2
3 = Standard standard parameter set
4 = Man/Const manual / constant speed
5 = Hand/Auto hand (manual) / automatic
6 = Hand/MotPot hand (manual) / motor potentiometer
7 = reserved reserved
8 = MotPot motor potentiometer
9 = TorqCtrl torque control
- See ApplMacro (99.08)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

8.11 RFE StatWord (status word resonance frequency eliminator)

-
-
-
-
E
Resonance Frequency Eliminator control word
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 FiltParCalcAct 1 internal parameters are being calculated, filter algorithm is
skipped
0 no action
B1 ParUdpReq 1 parameter update request after parameter change
0 no action
B2 FiltReleased 1 RFE filter is released
0 RFE filter is blocked
B3 ParChange 1 parameter have changed
0 no action
B4 reserved
to
B15 reserved
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 91

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 9

Fault / alarm words

9.01 FaultWord1 (fault word 1)

C
-
-
-
-
Fault word 1:
Bit Fault text Fault code Comment
and trip level
B0 AuxUnderVolt F501 1 auxiliary undervoltage (threshold see hardware
manual)
B1 ArmOverCur F502 3 armature overcurrent, ArmOvrCurLev (30.09)
B2 ArmOverVolt F503 3 armature overvoltage, ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08)
B3 ConvOverTemp F504 2 converter overtemperature, ConvTempDly (97.05),
shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17)
B4 ResCurDetect F505 1 residual current detection, ResCurDetectSel
(30.05), ResCurDetectLim (30.06),
ResCurDetectDel (30.07)
B5 M1OverTemp F506 2 motor 1 measured overtemperature,
M1FaultLimTemp (31.07) or M1KlixonSel (31.08)
B6 M1OverLoad F507 2 motor 1 calculated overload (thermal model),
M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)
B7 I/OBoardLoss F508 1 I/O board not found or faulty, DIO ExtModule1
(98.03), DIO ExtModule2 (98.04), AIO ExtModule
(98.06), AIO MotTempMeas (98.12), IO
BoardConfig (98.15)
B8 M2OverTemp F509 2 motor 2 measured overtemperature,
M2FaultLimTemp (49.37) or
M2KixonSel (49.38)
B9 M2OverLoad F510 2 motor 2 calculated overload (thermal model),
M2FaultLimLoad (49.34)
B10 ConvFanCur F511 4 converter fan current, ConvTempDly (97.05)
B11 MainsLowVolt F512 3 mains low (under-) voltage, PwrLossTrip (30.21),
UNetMin1 (30.22), UNetMin2 (30.23)
B12 MainsOvrVolt F513 1 mains overvoltage, actual mains voltage is > 1.3 *
NomMainsVolt (99.10) for more than 10 s.
B13 MainsNotSync F514 3 mains not in synchronism, DevLimPLL (97.13)
B14 M1FexOverCur F515 1 motor 1 field exciter overcurrent, M1FldOvrCurLev
(30.13)
B15 M1FexCom F516 1 motor 1 field exciter communication loss,
FexTimeOut (94.07), DCSLinkNodeID (94.01),
M1FexNode (94.08)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 92

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.02 FaultWord2 (fault word 2)

C
-
-
-
-
Fault word 2:
Bit Fault text Fault code Comment
and trip level
B0 ArmCurRipple F517 3 armature current ripple, CurRippleMode (30.18),
CurRippleLim (30.19)
B1 M2FexOverCur F518 1 motor 2 field exciter overcurrent, M2FldOvrCurLev
(49.09)
B2 M2FexCom F519 1 motor 2 field exciter communication loss
FexTimeOut (94.07), DCSLinkNodeID (94.01),
M2FexNode (94.09)
B3 reserved F520 - no action
B4 FieldAck F521 1 selected motor: field acknowledge, check fault
message of or at field exciter
B5 SpeedFb F522 3 selected motor: speed feedback, SpeedFbFltMode
(30.36), M1SpeedFbSel (50.03)
B6 ExtFanAck F523 4 external fan acknowledge missing MotFanAck
(10.06)
B7 MainContAck F524 3 main contactor acknowledge missing,
MainContAck (10.21)
B8 TypeCode F525 1 type code mismatch, TypeCode (97.01)
B9 ExternalDI F526 1 external fault via binary input, ExtFaultSel (30.31)
B10 ConvFanAck F527 4 converter fan acknowledge missing, ConvFanAck
(10.20)
B11 FieldBusCom F528 5 fieldbus communication loss, ComLossCtrl
(30.28), FB TimeOut (30.35), CommModule
(98.02)
B12 M1FexNotOK F529 1 motor 1 field exciter not okay
B13 M2FexNotOK F530 1 motor 2 field exciter not okay
B14 MotorStalled F531 3 selected motor: motor stalled, StallTime (30.01),
StallSpeed (30.02), StallTorq (30.03)
B15 MotOverSpeed F532 3 selected motor: motor overspeed, M1OvrSpeed
(30.16)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 93

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.03 FaultWord3 (fault word 3)

C
-
-
-
-
Fault word 3:
Bit Fault text Fault code Comment
and trip level
B0 ReversalTime F533 3 reversal time, ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) plus RevDly
(43.14), 12P RevTimeOut (47.05)
B1 12PCurDiff F534 3 12-pulse current difference, DiffCurLim (47.02),
DiffCurDly (47.03)
B2 12PulseCom F535 3 12-pulse communication loss, 12P TimeOut (94.03),
DCSLinkNodeID (94.01), 12P SlaNode (94.04)
B3 12PSlaveFail F536 4 12-pulse slave failure, this fault message trips the
12-pulse master and appears only in the 12-pulse
master
B4 M1FexRdyLost F537 1 motor 1 field exciter lost ready-for-operation
message while working
B5 M2FexRdyLost F538 1 motor 2 field exciter lost ready-for-operation
message while working
B6 FastCurRise F539 1 fast current rise, ArmCurRiseMax (30.10)
B7 COM8Faulty F540 1 SDCS-COM-8 not found or faulty, SysComBoard
(98.16)
B8 M1FexLowCur F541 1 motor 1 field exciter low (under-) current,
M1FldMinTrip (30.12), FldMinTripDly (45.18)
B9 M2FexLowCur F542 1 motor 2 field exciter low (under-) current,
M2FldMinTrip (49.08), FldMinTripDly (45.18)
B10 COM8Com F543 5 SDCS-COM-8 communication loss,
Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0TimeOut (70.04),
Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2TimeOut (70.14)
B11 P2PandMFCom F544 5 Peer to peer and master follower communication
loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
B12 ApplLoadFail F545 1 application load failure, see Diagnosis (9.11)
B13 LocalCmdLoss F546 5 local command loss, LocalLossCtrl (30.27)
B14 HwFailure F547 1 hardware failure, see Diagnosis (9.11)
B15 FwFailure F548 1 firmware failure, see Diagnosis (9.11)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 94

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.04 FaultWord4 (fault word 4)

C
-
-
-
-
Fault word 4:
Bit Fault text Fault code Comment
and trip level
B0 ParComp F549 1 parameter compatibility, the parameter causing the
fault can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)
B1 ParMemRead F550 1 reading the actual parameter set or a user
parameter set from either parameter flash or
Memory Card failed (checksum fault)
B2 AIRange F551 4 analog input range, AI Mon4mA (30.29)
B3 MechBrake F552 3 selected motor: mechanical brake, BrakeFaultFunc
(42.06), StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
B4 TachPolarity F553 3 selected motor: tacho polarity
B5 TachoRange F554 3 Overflow of AITacho input
B6 reserved F555 reserved for PID-controller
B7 reserved F556 no action
B8 reserved F557 no action
B9 reserved F558 no action
B10 reserved F559 no action
B11 APFault1 F601 1 Adaptive Program fault 1
B12 APFault2 F602 1 Adaptive Program fault 2
B13 APFault3 F603 1 Adaptive Program fault 3
B14 APFault4 F604 1 Adaptive Program fault 4
B15 APFault5 F605 1 Adaptive Program fault 4
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

9.05 UserFaultWord (user defined fault word 1)

E
User defined fault word. All names are defined by the user via application program:
Bit Fault text Fault code Comment
and trip level
B0 UserFault1 F610 1
B1 UserFault2 F611 1
B2 UserFault3 F612 1
B3 UserFault4 F613 1
B4 UserFault5 F614 1
B5 UserFault6 F615 1
B6 UserFault7 F616 1
B7 UserFault8 F617 1
B8 UserFault9 F618 1
B9 UserFault10 F619 1
B10 UserFault11 F620 1
B11 UserFault12 F621 1
B12 UserFault13 F622 1
B13 UserFault14 F623 1
B14 UserFault15 F624 1
B15 UserFault16 F625 1
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 95

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.06 AlarmWord1 (alarm word 1)

C
-
-
-
-
Alarm word 1:
Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment
and alarm level
B0 Off2ViaDI A101 1 Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) pending via
digital input, Off2 (10.08)
B1 Off3ViaDI A102 1 Off3 (E-stop) pending via digital input, E Stop
(10.09)
B2 DCBreakAck A103 3 selected motor: DC-breaker acknowledge missing,
DCBreakAck (10.23)
B3 ConvOverTemp A104 2 converter overtemperature, shutdown temperature
see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17). The converter
overtemperature alarm will already appear at
approximately 5°C below the shutdown temperature.
B4 DynBrakeAck A105 1 selected motor: dynamic braking acknowledge is still
pending, DynBrakeAck (10.22)
B5 M1OverTemp A106 2 motor 1 measured overtemperature,
M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06)
B6 M1OverLoad A107 2 motor 1 calculated overload (thermal model),
M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)
B7 reserved A108 4 no action
B8 M2OverTemp A109 2 motor 2 measured overtemperature,
M2AlarmLimTemp (49.36)
B9 M2OverLoad A110 2 motor 2 calculated overload (thermal model),
M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33)
B10 MainsLowVolt A111 3 mains low (under-) voltage, PwrLossTrip (30.21),
UNetMin1 (30.22), UNetMin2 (30.23)
B11 P2PandMFCom A112 4 Peer-to-peer and master follower communication
loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
B12 COM8Com A113 4 SDCS-COM-8 communication loss,
Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0TimeOut (70.04),
Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2TimeOut (70.14)
B13 ArmCurDev A114 3 armature current deviation
B14 TachoRange A115 4 Overflow of AITacho input or M1OvrSpeed (30.16)
respectively M2OvrSpeed (49.21) have been
changed
B15 reserved A116 - no action
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 96

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.07 AlarmWord2 (alarm word 2)

C
-
-
-
-
Alarm word 2:
Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment
and alarm level
B0 ArmCurRipple A117 4 armature current ripple, CurRippleMode (30.18,
CurRippleLim (30.19)
B1 FoundNewAppl A118 1 found new application on Memory Card, activate
application on Memory Card by means of ParSave
(16.06) = EableAppl
B2 ApplDiff A119 1 application on drive and Memory Card are different,
activate application on Memory Card by means of
ParSave (16.06) = EableAppl
B3 OverVoltProt A120 3 overvoltage protection active, OvrVoltProt (30.13)
B4 AutotuneFail A121 4 autotuning failure, Diagnosis (9.11)
B5 MechBrake A122 4 selected motor: mechanical brake, BrakeFaultFunc
(42.06), StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
B6 FaultSuppres A123 4 at least one fault message is mask, FaultMask (30.25)
B7 SpeedScale A124 4 speed scaling out of range, M1SpeedScale (50.01)
and M1BaseSpeed (99.04), the parameter causing
the alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)
B8 SpeedFb A125 4 selected motor: speed feedback, M1SpeedFbSel
(50.03), SpeedFbFltMode (30.36), SpeedFbFltSel
(30.17)
B9 ExternalDI A126 4 external alarm via binary input, ExtAlarmSel (30.32)
B10 AIRange A127 4 analog input range, AI Mon4mA(30.29)
B11 FieldBusCom A128 4 fieldbus communication loss, ComLossCtrl (30.28)
B12 ParRestored A129 4 The parameters found in flash memory were found
invalid at power-up (checksum fault). The parameters
were restored from the parameter backup.
B13 LocalCmdLoss A130 4 local command loss, LocalLossCtrl (30.27)
B14 ParAdded A131 4 A new firmware with a different amount of parameters
was downloaded. The new parameters are set to their
default values. The parameters causing the alarm can
be identified in Diagnosis (9.11).
B15 ParConflict A132 4 parameter setting conflict, the parameter causing the
alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 97

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.08 AlarmWord3 (alarm word 3)

C
-
-
-
-
Alarm word 3:
Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment
and alarm level
B0 reserved A133 - no action
B1 ParComp A134 4 parameter compatibility, the parameter causing the
alarm can be identified in Diagnosis (9.11)
B2 ParUpDwnLoad A135 4 The checksum verification failed during up- or
download of parameters. Please try again.
B3 NoAPTaskTime A136 4 Adaptive Program task for not set in TimeLevSel
(83.04)
B4 SpeedNotZero A137 1 Re-start of drive is not possible. Speed zero has not
been reached (only in case FlyStart (21.10) =
StartFrom0). ZeroSpeedLim (20,03)
B5 Off2FieldBus A138 1 Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) pending via
fieldbus, Off2 (10.08)
B6 Off3FieldBus A139 1 Off3 (E-stop) pending via fieldbus, E Stop (10.09)
B7 IllgFieldBus A140 4 the fieldbus parameters in group 51 (fieldbus) are not
set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has
not been selected
B8 COM8FwVer A141 4 invalid combination of SDCS-CON-4 firmware and
SDCS-COM-8 firmware
B9 MemCardMiss A142 1 Memory Card missing
B10 MemCardFail A143 1 checksum failure or wrong Memory Card
B11 APAlarm1 A301 4 Adaptive Program alarm 1
B12 APAlarm2 A302 4 Adaptive Program alarm 2
B13 APAlarm3 A303 4 Adaptive Program alarm 3
B14 APAlarm4 A304 4 Adaptive Program alarm 4
B15 APAlarm5 A305 4 Adaptive Program alarm 5
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

9.09 UserAlarmWord (user defined alarm word 1)

E
User defined alarm word. All names are defined by the user via application program:
Bit Alarm text Alarm code Comment
and alarm level
B0 UserAlarm1 A310 4
B1 UserAlarm2 A311 4
B2 UserAlarm3 A312 4
B3 UserAlarm4 A313 4
B4 UserAlarm5 A314 4
B5 UserAlarm6 A315 4
B6 UserAlarm7 A316 4
B7 UserAlarm8 A317 4
B8 UserAlarm9 A318 4
B9 UserAlarm10 A319 4
B10 UserAlarm11 A320 4
B11 UserAlarm12 A321 4
B12 UserAlarm13 A322 4
B13 UserAlarm14 A323 4
B14 UserAlarm15 A324 4
B15 UserAlarm16 A325 4
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 98

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.10 SysFaultWord (system fault word)

-
-
-
-
E
Operating system faults from SDCS-COM-8 board:
Bit Fault text Fault code F
B0 Factory macro parameter file error -
B1 User macro parameter file error -
B2 Non Volatile operating system error -
B3 File error in FLASH -
B4 Internal time level T2 overflow (100 s) -
B5 Internal time level T3 overflow (1 ms) -
B6 Internal time level T4 overflow (50 ms) -
B7 Internal time level T5 overflow (1 s) -
B8 State overflow -
B9 Application window ending overflow -
B10 Application program overflow -
B11 Illegal instruction -
B12 Register stack overflow -
B13 System stack overflow -
B14 System stack underflow -
B15 reserved -
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 99

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
9.11 Diagnosis (diagnosis)

0
65535
0

C
-
Displays diagnostics messages:
0= no message
1 … 10 = reserved

Autotuning:
11 = autotuning aborted by fault or removing the Run command [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3]
12.= autotuning timeout, RUN command [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] is not set in time
13 = motor is still turning, no speed zero indication
14 = field current not zero
15 = armature current not zero
16 = armature circuit open respectively interrupted
17 = armature circuit and/or armature voltage measurement circuit wrongly connected
18 = field current doesn't go down when the excitation is switched off;
no detection of field inductance
19 = field current actual doesn't reach field current reference;
no detection of field resistance;
field circuit open respectively interrupted
20 = no writing of control parameters or discontinuous current
21 = reserved
22.= tacho adjustment faulty
23 …49 reserved

Hardware:
50 = parameter FLASH faulty
51 = parameter FLASH faulty
52 … 69 reserved

A132 ParConflict (alarm parameter setting conflict):

70 = reserved
71 = flux linearization parameters not consistent
72 = reserved
73 = parameter overflow
74 … 79 reserved

Autotuning:
80 = speed does not reach setpoint
81 = motor is not accelerating or wrong tacho polarity
82 = not enough load (too low inertia) for the detection of speed controller parameters
83 … 89 reserved

A134 ParComp (alarm parameter compatibility conflict):

10000 … 19999 = the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 100

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Thyristor diagnosis:
30090 = shortcut caused by V1
30091 = shortcut caused by V2
30092 = shortcut caused by V3
30093 = shortcut caused by V4
30094 = shortcut caused by V5
30095 = shortcut caused by V6
30096 = thyristor block test failed
30097 = shortcut caused by V15 or V22
30098 = shortcut caused by V16 or V23
30099 = shortcut caused by V11 or V24
30100 = shortcut caused by V12 or V25
30101 = shortcut caused by V13 or V26
30102 = shortcut caused by V14 or V21
30103 = motor connected to ground
30104 = armature winding is not connected

A124 SpeedScale (alarm speed scaling):

40000 … 49999 = the parameter with the speed scaling conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

F549 ParComp (fault parameter compatibility conflict):

50000 … 59999= the parameter with the compatibility conflict can be identified by means of the last 4 digits

F545 ApplLoadFail (ControlBuilder application programming):

64110 = task not configured
64112 = attempt to run an illegal copy of a protected program
64113 = retain data invalid caused by SDCS-CON-4 hardware problem
64125 = 5 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)
64126 = 20 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)
64127 = 100 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)
64128 = 500 ms task halted (e.g. task contains an endless loop)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

9.12 LastFault (last fault)

C
-
-
-
-
Displays the last fault:
F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y
nd nd
9.13 2 LastFault (2 last fault)

C
-
-
-
-
Displays the 2nd last fault:
F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y
rd rd
9.14 3 LastFault (3 last fault)
C
-
-
-
-
Displays the 3rd last fault:
F<Fault code> <FaultName> (e.g. F2 ArmOverCur)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 101

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 10

Start / stop select

10.01 CommandSel (command selector)

Local I/O

Local I/O

C
FexLink

-
UsedMCW (7.04) selector:
0 = Local I/O Drive is controlled via local I/O.
Reset (10.03) = DI6; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7, default
OnOff1 (10.15) = DI7; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0, default and
StartStop (10.16) = DI8; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3, default
1 = MainCtrlWord drive is controlled via MainCtrlWord (7.01)
2 = Key Automatic switchover from MainCtrlWord to Local I/O in case of F528
FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 11]. It is still possible to control the
drive via local I/O. OnOff1 (10.15) = DI7; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0, default
and StartStop (10.16) = DI8; UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3, default. The used
speed reference is set by means of FixedSpeed1 (23.02).
3 = 12PLink Drive is controlled from 12-pulse master (OnOff1, StartStop and Reset).
Only available when OperModeSel (43.01) = 12P ParaSla or 12P SerSla.
4 = FexLink Drive is controlled from field exciter master (OnOff1, StartStop and
Reset). Only available when OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldExciter.
Note1:
Local control mode has higher priority than the selection made with CommandSel (10.01).
Note2:
The commands Off2 (10.08), E Stop (10.09) and Reset (10.03) are always active (in case they are
assigned) regardless of CommandSel (10.01) setting.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.02 Direction (direction of rotation)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
Binary signal for Direction, AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 8. Direction (10.02) allows to change the
direction of rotation:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
2 = DI2 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
3 = DI3 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
4 = DI4 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
5 = DI5 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
6 = DI6 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
7 = DI7 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
8 = DI8 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward
9 = DI9 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1 = Reverse, 0 = Forward, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 102

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.03 Reset (reset command)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

DI6
-
Binary signal for Reset, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7:
0 = NotUsed
1 = DI1 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
2 = DI2 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
3 = DI3 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
4 = DI4 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
5 = DI5 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
6 = DI6 Reset by rising edge (0 1), default
7 = DI7 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
8 = DI8 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
9 = DI9 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.04 SyncCommand (synchronization command for position counter)

SyncCommand
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
Binary signal for Synchronization. At the synchronization event [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9
SyncCommand] the position counter is initialized by following values:
PosCountInitLo (50.08) is written into PosCountLow (3.07) and
PosCountInitHi (50.09) is written into PosCountHigh (3.08).
At the same time AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5 SyncRdy is set to 1.
The synchronization can be inhibited by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 10 SyncDisable to 1.
The synchronization event is selected by:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI7+ rising edge (0 1) of DI7
2 = DI7Hi&Z DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder
3 = DI7Hi&Z Fwd DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder, motor
rotating forward
4 = DI7Hi&Z Rev DI7 = 1 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder, motor
rotating reverse
5 = DI7- falling edge (1 0) of DI7
6 = DI7Lo&Z DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder
7 = DI7Lo&Z Fwd DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder, motor
rotating forward
8 = DI7Lo&Z Rev DI7 = 0 and rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder, motor
rotating reverse
9=Z rising edge (0 1) of zero channel pulse encoder
10 = SyncCommand rising edge (0 1) of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 9
Note1:
Forward rotation means that the encoders A pulses are before the B pulses.
Reverse rotation means that the encoders B pulses are before the A pulses.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.05 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 103

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.06 MotFanAck (motor fan acknowledge)

C
NotUsed
DI11
DI2
-
The drive trips with F523 ExtFanAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 6] if a digital input for an external fan is
selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds:
0 = NotUsed no reaction
1 = DI1 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
2 = DI2 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, default
3 = DI3 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
4 = DI4 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
5 = DI5 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
6 = DI6 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
7 = DI7 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
8 = DI8 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
9 = DI9 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
10 = DI10 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
11 = DI11 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.07 HandAuto (hand/auto command)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
Binary signal to switch between Hand (Local I/O) and Auto (MainCtrlWord) control. Thus the
selection made by CommandSel (10.01) is overwritten:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
2 = DI2 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
3 = DI3 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
4 = DI4 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
5 = DI5 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
6 = DI6 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
7 = DI7 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
8 = DI8 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand
9 = DI9 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1 = Auto, 0 = Hand, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 104

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.08 Off2 (off2 command, electrical disconnect)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

DI4
-
Binary signal for Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop), UsedMCW (7.04) bit 1. For fastest reaction
use fast digital inputs DI7 or DI8:
0 = NotUsed
1 = DI1 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
2 = DI2 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
3 = DI3 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
4 = DI4 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, default
5 = DI5 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
6 = DI6 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
7 = DI7 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
8 = DI8 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active
9 = DI9 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= no Off2, 0 = Off2 active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.09 E Stop (emergency stop command)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

DI5
-
Binary signal for E Stop, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2:
0 = NotUsed
1 = DI1 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
2 = DI2 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
3 = DI3 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
4 = DI4 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
5 = DI5 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, default
6 = DI6 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
7 = DI7 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
8 = DI8 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active
9 = DI9 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= no E Stop, 0 = E Stop active, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 105

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.10 ParChange (parameter change) l

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
Binary signal to release either Motor1/User1 or Motor2/User2. The choice to release Motor1/2
(shared motion) or macros User1/2 is defined by means of MacroChangeMode (16.05):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
2 = DI2 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
3 = DI3 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
4 = DI4 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
5 = DI5 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
6 = DI6 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
7 = DI7 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
8 = DI8 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0)
9 = DI9 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), only available with digital
extension board
10 = DI10 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), only available with digital
extension board
11 = DI11 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), only available with digital
extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 switch to Motor2/User2 by rising edge (0 1),
switch to Motor1/User1 by falling edge (1 0), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Note1:
The macro (User1/User2) selection made by ParChange (10.10) overrides the selection made with
ApplMacro (99.08).
Note2:
The motor (Motor1/Motor2) selection can be made in drive state RdyOn and RdyRun.
Note3:
ParChange (10.10) itself is not overwritten.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 106

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.11 Unused
10.12 Unused
10.13 OvrVoltProt (over voltage protection triggered)

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
Digital input for over voltage protection unit:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
2 = DI2 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
3 = DI3 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
4 = DI4 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
5 = DI5 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
6 = DI6 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
7 = DI7 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
8 = DI8 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered
9 = DI9 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 0 = triggered, 1 = not triggered, only available with digital extension board
Note1:
OvrVoltProt (14.13) is only active when drive is in field exciter mode.
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.14 Unused
10.15 OnOff1 (on/off1 command)

NotUsed
DI7DI8

C
DI7
-
Binary signal for OnOff1, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0:
0 = NotUsed
1 = DI1 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
2 = DI2 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
3 = DI3 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
4 = DI4 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
5 = DI5 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
6 = DI6 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
7 = DI7 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, default
8 = DI8 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1
9 = DI9 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension
board
10 = DI10 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension
board
11 = DI11 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, only available with digital extension
board
12 = MCW Bit11 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 On by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Off1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
21 = DI7DI8 On and Start by rising edge (0 1) of DI7, Stop and Off1 by falling edge
(1 0) of DI8. Following settings apply: OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16)
= DI7DI8.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 107

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.16 StartStop (start/stop command)

C
NotUsed
DI7DI8
DI8
Binary signal for StartStop, UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3:
0 = NotUsed
1 = DI1 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
2 = DI2 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
3 = DI3 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
4 = DI4 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
5 = DI5 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
6 = DI6 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
7 = DI7 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop
8 = DI8 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, default
9 = DI9 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension
board
10 = DI10 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension
board
11 = DI11 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, only available with digital extension
board
12 = MCW Bit11 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 Start by rising edge (0 1), 0 = Stop, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
21 = DI7DI8 On and Start by rising edge (0 1) of DI7, Stop and Off1 by falling edge
(1 0) of DI8. Following settings apply: OnOff1 (10.15) = StartStop (10.16)
= DI7DI8.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 108

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.17 Jog1 (jogging 1 command)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
Binary signal for Jog1. Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed1 (23.02):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
2 = DI2 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
3 = DI3 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
4 = DI4 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
5 = DI5 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
6 = DI6 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
7 = DI7 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
8 = DI8 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1
9 = DI9 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= Jog1 active, 0 = no Jog1, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Note1:
Jog2 (10.18) overrides Jog1 (10.17)
Note2:
CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O:
The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). When Jog1 command is given
the drives goes automatically into state Running and turns with speed set in
FixedSpeed1 (23.02).
CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord:
Jog1 command is invalid.
FixedSpeed1 (23.02) can be released by MainCtrlWord (7.01) Bit 8 plus Run command.
Note3:
Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime
(22.13).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.18 Jog2 (jogging 2 command)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
Binary signal for Jog2. Selects speed reference set in FixedSpeed2 (23.03):
Selection see Jog1 (10.17).
Note1:
Jog2 (10.18) overrides Jog1 (10.17)
Note2:
CommandSel (10.01) = Local I/O:
The drive has to be in state RdyRun (RdyRef is still zero). When Jog2 command is given
the drives goes automatically into state Running and turns with speed set in
FixedSpeed2 (23.03).
CommandSel (10.01) = MainCtrlWord:
Jog2 command is invalid.
FixedSpeed2 (23.03) can be released by MainCtrlWord (7.01) Bit 9 plus Run command.
Note3:
Acceleration and deceleration time for jogging is selected by JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime
(22.13).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.19 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 109

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.20 ConvFanAck (converter fan acknowledge)

C
NotUsed
DI11
DI1
-
The drive trips with F527 ConvFanAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 10] if a digital input for the converter
fan is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds.
As soon as the acknowledge is missing A104 ConvOverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 3] is set.
The alarm is reset automatically if the converter fan acknowledge is coming back before the 10
seconds are elapsed:
0 = NotUsed no reaction
1 = DI1 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, default
2 = DI2 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
3 = DI3 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
4 = DI4 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
5 = DI5 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
6 = DI6 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
7 = DI7 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
8 = DI8 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge
9 = DI9 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
10 = DI10 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
11 = DI11 1= acknowledge OK, 0 = no acknowledge, only available with digital
extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.21 MainContAck (main contactor acknowledge)

C
NotUsed
DI11
DI3
-
The drive trips with F524 MainContAck [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 7] if a digital input for the main
contactor is selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds:
Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.22 DynBrakeAck (dynamic braking acknowledge)

C
NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
The drive sets A105 DynBreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 4] if a digital input for dynamic breaker
is selected and the acknowledge (dynamic breaking active) is still present when On [UsedMCW
(7.04) bit 3] is set:
Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).
A105 DynBreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 4] should prevent the drive to be started while
dynamic breaking is active.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.23 DC BreakAck (DC breaker acknowledge)

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
The drive sets A103 DCBreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] if a digital input for the DC-breaker is
selected and the acknowledge is missing for 10 seconds:
Selection see ConvFanAck (10.20).
The motor will coast if A103 DCBreakAck [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 2] is set.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.24 Unused
10.25 DI1Invert (invert digital input 1)
Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

Inversion selection for digital input 1:

0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.26 DI2Invert (invert digital input 2)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

Inversion selection for digital input 2:

0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 110

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
10.27 DI3Invert (invert digital input 3)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 3:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.28 DI4Invert (invert digital input 4)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 4:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.29 DI5Invert (invert digital input 5)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 5:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.30 DI6Invert (invert digital input 6)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 6:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.31 DI7Invert (invert digital input 7)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 7:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.32 DI8Invert (invert digital input 8)

Direct

Direct

C
Inverted

-
Inversion selection for digital input 8:
0 = Direct
1 = Inverted
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.33 DI9Invert (invert digital input 9)

Direct

Direct
Inverted

-
E
Inversion selection for digital input 9:
0 = Direct only available with digital extension board
1 = Inverted only available with digital extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.34 DI10Invert (invert digital input 10)

Direct

Direct
Inverted

-
E
Inversion selection for digital input 10:
0 = Direct only available with digital extension board
1 = Inverted only available with digital extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

10.35 DI11Invert (invert digital input 11)

Direct

Direct
Inverted

-
E

Inversion selection for digital input 11:

0 = Direct only available with digital extension board
1 = Inverted only available with digital extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 111

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 11

Speed reference input

11.01 Unused
11.02 Ref1Mux (speed reference 1 selector/multiplexer)

Open
ACW Bit15
Close

C
Speed reference 1 selector:
0 = Open switch for speed ref. 1 is fixed open
1 = Close switch for speed ref 1 is fixed closed, default
2 = DI1 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
3 = DI2 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
4 = DI3 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
5 = DI4 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
6 = DI5 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
7 = DI6 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
8 = DI7 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
9 = DI8 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
10 = DI9 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
11= DI10 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
12 = DI11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
13 = MCW Bit11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
14 = MCW Bit12 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
15 = MCW Bit13 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
16 = MCW Bit14 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
17 = MCW Bit15 1= switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
18 = ACW Bit12 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
19 = ACW Bit13 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
20 = ACW Bit14 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
21 = ACW Bit15 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 1 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 112

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
11.03 Ref1Sel (speed reference 1 input signal)

C
AI2Direct+
SpeedRef2301

SpeedRef2301
Speed reference 1 value:
0 = SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef (23.01), default
1 = AuxSpeedRef AuxSpeedRef (23.13)
2 = AI1 analog input AI1
3 = AI2 analog input AI2
4 = AI3 analog input AI3
5 = AI4 analog input AI4
6 = AI5 analog input AI5
7 = AI6 analog input AI6
8 = FixedSpeed1 FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
9 = FixedSpeed2 FixedSpeed2 (23.03)
10 = MotPot motor poti controlled by MotPotUp (11.13), MotPotDown (11.14) and
MotPotMin (11.15)
11 = AuxRef-AI1 AuxSpeedRef (23.13) minus value of AI1
12 = reserved reserved
13 = MinAI2AI4 minimum of AI2 and AI4
14 = MaxAI2AI4 maximum of AI2 and AI4
15 = AI1Direct+ Fast speed reference input using analog input AI1. SpeedRefExt1 (2.30)
is written directly onto the speed error summation point and disconnected
from the speed ramp. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed.
16 = AI2Direct+ Fast speed reference input using analog input AI2. SpeedRefExt1 (2.30)
is written directly onto the speed error summation point and disconnected
from the speed ramp. Thus the speed ramp is bypassed.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

11.04 Unused
11.05 Unused
11.06 Ref2Sel (speed reference 2 input signal)

SpeedRef

SpeedRef

E
MaxAI2AI4
Speed reference 2 value:
0 = SpeedRef2301 SpeedRef (23.01), default
1 = AuxSpeedRef AuxSpeedRef (23.13)
2 = AI1 analog input AI1
3 = AI2 analog input AI2
4 = AI3 analog input AI3
5 = AI4 analog input AI4
6 = AI5 analog input AI5
7 = AI6 analog input AI6
8 = FixedSpeed1 FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
9 = FixedSpeed2 FixedSpeed2 (23.03)
10 = MotPot motor pot controlled by MotPotUp (11.13), MotPotDown (11.14) and
MotPotMin (11.15)
11 = AI2-AI3 AI2 minus AI3
12 = AI2+AI3 AI2 plus AI3
13 = AI1*AI2 AI1 multiplied with AI2
14 = AI2*AI3 AI2 multiplied with AI3
15 = MinAI2AI4 minimum of AI2 and AI4
16 = MaxAI2AI4 maximum of AI2 and AI4
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

11.07 Unused
11.08 Unused
11.09 Unused
11.10 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 113

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
11.11 Unused
11.12 Ref2Mux (speed reference 2 selector/multiplexer)

ACW Bit15
Open
Invert

E
Speed reference 2 selector:
0 = Invert1102 Invert speed ref. 1 selection; implements a change over switch together
with speed ref 2 selection. E.g. if speed ref. 1 selection switch is open the
switch for speed ref. 2 is closed and vice versa.
1 = Open switch for speed ref. 2 is fixed open, default
2 = Close switch for speed ref 2 is fixed closed
3 = DI1 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
4 = DI2 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
5 = DI3 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
6 = DI4 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
7 = DI5 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
8 = DI6 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
9 = DI7 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
10 = DI8 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref = 0
11 = DI9 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
12= DI10 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
13 = DI11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; only available with digital extension board
14 = MCW Bit11 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
15 = MCW Bit12 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
16 = MCW Bit13 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
17 = MCW Bit14 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
18 = MCW Bit15 1= switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
19 = ACW Bit12 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
20 = ACW Bit13 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
21 = ACW Bit14 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
22 = ACW Bit15 1 = switch is closed, speed ref 2 is active; 0 = switch is open, speed ref =
0; AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 114

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
11.13 MotPotUp (motor pot up)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
With the motor pot up function the motor speed is increased by means of the selected binary input.
The acceleration is limited by AccTime1 (22.01) until Ref1Max (11.05) respectively Ref2Max
(11.08) is reached. MotPotDown (11.14) overrides MotPotUp (11.13):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
2 = DI2 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
3 = DI3 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
4 = DI4 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
5 = DI5 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
6 = DI6 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
7 = DI7 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
8 = DI8 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed
9 = DI9 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
10 = DI10 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
11 = DI11 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= increase speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Note1:
The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel (11.03) = MotPot respectively Ref2Sel
(11.06) = MotPot.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 115

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
11.14 MotPotDown (motor pot down)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
With the motor pot down function the motor speed is decreased by means of the selected binary
input. The deceleration is limited by DecTime1 (22.02) until zero speed respectively MotPotMin
(11.15) is reached. MotPotDown (11.14) overrides MotPotUp (11.13):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
2 = DI2 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
3 = DI3 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
4 = DI4 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
5 = DI5 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
6 = DI6 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
7 = DI7 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
8 = DI8 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed
9 = DI9 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
10 = DI10 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
11 = DI11 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, only available with digital extension
board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= decrease speed, 0 = hold speed, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Note1:
The speed reference is selected by means of Ref1Sel (11.03) = MotPot respectively Ref2Sel
(11.06) = MotPot.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 116

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
11.15 MotPotMin (motor pot minimum)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
The motor pot minimum function releases the minimum speed level. The minimum speed level is
defined by FixedSpeed1 (23.02). When the drive is started the motor accelerates to FixedSpeed1
(23.02). It is not possible to set the speed below FixedSpeed1 (23.02) by means of the motor pot
function:
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 1= released, 0 = blocked
2 = DI2 1= released, 0 = blocked
3 = DI3 1= released, 0 = blocked
4 = DI4 1= released, 0 = blocked
5 = DI5 1= released, 0 = blocked
6 = DI6 1= released, 0 = blocked
7 = DI7 1= released, 0 = blocked
8 = DI8 1= released, 0 = blocked
9 = DI9 1= released, 0 = blocked, only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1= released, 0 = blocked, only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1= released, 0 = blocked, only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1= released, 0 = blocked, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1= released, 0 = blocked, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1= released, 0 = blocked, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1= released, 0 = blocked, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1= released, 0 = blocked, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1= released, 0 = blocked, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1= released, 0 = blocked, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1= released, 0 = blocked, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1= released, 0 = blocked, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 12

Constant speeds

12.01 unused
12.02 ConstSpeed1 (constant speed 1) 10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Defines constant speed 1 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or
application program.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

12.03 ConstSpeed2 (constant speed 2)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E

Defines constant speed 2 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or
application program.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 117

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
12.04 ConstSpeed3 (constant speed 3)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Defines constant speed 3 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or
application program.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

12.05 ConstSpeed4 (constant speed 4)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Defines constant speed 4 in rpm. The constant speed can be connected by Adaptive Program or
application program.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N
Group 13

Analog inputs

13.01 AI1HighVal (analog input 1 high value)

10000
10000
-10000

C
mV
+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in AI1HighVal
(13.01).
Example:
In case the min. / max. voltage ( 10 V) of analog input 1 should equal 250% of
TorqRefExt (2.24), set:
TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = AI1
ConvModeAI1 (13.03) = 10 V Bi,
AI1HighVal (13.01) = 4000 mV and
AI1LowVal (13.02) = -4000 mV
Note1:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate
20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.02 AI1LowVal (analog input 1 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000

C
mV
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 1 is scaled to the voltage in AI1LowVal
(13.02).
Note1:
AI1LowVal (13.02) is only valid if ConvModeAI1 (13.03) = 10 V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate
20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.03 ConvModeAI1 (conversion mode analog input 1)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

C
-

Analog input 1 signal offset. The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on
the SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 118

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
13.04 FilterAI1 (filter time analog input 1)

0
10000
0

C
ms
Analog input 1 filter time. The hardware filter time is 2ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.05 AI2HighVal (analog input 2 high value)

10000
10000
-10000

C
mV
+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in AI2HighVal
(13.05).
Note1:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate
20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.06 AI2LowVal (analog input 2 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000

C
mV
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 2 is scaled to the voltage in AI2LowVal
(13.06).
Note1:
AI2LowVal (13.06) is only valid if ConvModeAI2 (13.07) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate
20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.07 ConvModeAI2 (conversion mode analog input 2)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

C
-
Analog input 2 signal offset. The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on
the SDCS-CON-4 or SDCS-IOB-3 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

13.08 FilterAI2 (filter time analog input 2)

0
10000
0

C
ms
Analog input 2 filter time. The hardware filter time is 2ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.09 AI3HighVal (analog input 3 high value)

10000
10000
-10000

mV
+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in AI3HighVal E
(13.09).
Note1:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.10 AI3LowVal (analog input 3 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000
mV
E

-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 3 is scaled to the voltage in AI3LowVal
(13.10).
Note1:
AI3LowVal (13.10) is only valid if ConvModeAI3 (13.11) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 119

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
13.11 ConvModeAI3 (conversion mode analog input 3)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

-
E
Analog input 3 signal offset. Analog input 3 on the SDCS-CON-4 is only working with voltage. The
distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-IOB-3 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

13.12 FilterAI3 (filter time analog input 3)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Analog input 3 filter time. The hardware filter time is 2 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.13 AI4HighVal (analog input 4 high value)

10000
10000
-10000

mV
E
+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in AI4HighVal
(13.13).
Note1:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.14 AI4LowVal (analog input 4 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000
mV
E
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 4 is scaled to the voltage in AI4LowVal
(13.14).
Note1:
AI3LowVal (13.14) is only valid if ConvModeAI4 (13.15) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.15 ConvModeAI4 (conversion mode analog input 4)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

-
E
Analog input 4 signal offset. Analog input 4 on the SDCS-CON-4 is only working with voltage. The
distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-IOB-3 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

13.16 FilterAI4 (filter time analog input 4)

0
10000
0
ms
E

Analog input 4 filter time. The hardware filter time is 2 ms.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

13.17 TachoHighVal (analog input tacho high value)

10000
10000
-10000

mV
E

+100% of the input signal connected to analog input tacho is scaled to the voltage in TachoHighVal
(13.17).
Note1:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 120

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
13.18 TachoLowVal (analog input tacho low value)

10000
-10000

-10000
mV
E
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input tacho is scaled to the voltage in TachoLowVal
(13.18).
Note1:
TachoLowVal (13.18) is only valid if ConvModeTacho (13.19) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the jumper (SDCS-IOB-3) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.19 ConvModeTacho (conversion mode analog input tacho)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

-
E
Analog input tacho signal offset. Analog input tacho on the SDCS-CON-2 is only working with
voltage. The distinction between voltage and current is done via jumpers on the SDCS-IOB-3
board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

13.20 Unused
13.21 AI5HighVal (analog input 5 high value)

10000
10000
-10000

mV
E
+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AI5HighVal
(13.21).
Note1:
To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

13.22 AI5LowVal (analog input 5 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000
mV
E
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 5 is scaled to the voltage in AIO5LowVal
(13.22).
Note1:
AI5LowVal (13.22) is only valid if ConvModeAI5 (13.23) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 121

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
13.23 ConvModeAI5 (conversion mode analog input 5)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

-
E
Analog input 5 signal offset. The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and
current is done via DIP-switches on the RAIO-01 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Bipolar and unipolar:

Voltage and current:

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

13.24 Unused
13.25 AI6HighVal (analog input 6 high value)
10000
10000
-10000

mV
E

+100% of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AI6HighVal
(13.25).
Note1:
To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 122

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
13.26 AI6LowVal (analog input 6 low value)

10000
-10000

-10000
mV
E
-100% of the input signal connected to analog input 6 is scaled to the voltage in AIO6LowVal
(13.26).
Note1:
AI6LowVal (13.26) is only valid if ConvModeAI6 (13.27) = 10V Bi.
Note2:
To use current please set the DIP-switches (RAIO-01) accordingly and calculate 20 mA to 10 V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: SI Volatile: N

13.27 ConvModeAI6 (conversion mode analog input 6)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

-
E
Analog input 6 signal offset. The distinction between bipolar and unipolar respectively voltage and
current is done via DIP-switches on the RAIO-01 board:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V / -20 mA to 20 mA bipolar input, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar input
3 = 5V Offset 5 V / 10 mA offset in the range 0 V to 10 V / 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V / 12 mA offset in the range 2 V to 10 V / 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or
indication of bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 14

Digital outputs

14.01 DO1Index (digital output 1 index)

9999
603
-9999

C
-
Digital output 1 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO1BitNo (14.02) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Examples:
If DO1Index (14.01) = 801 (main status word) and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 1 (RdyRun) digital
output 1 is high when the drive is RdyRun.
If DO1Index (14.01) = -801 (main status word) and DO1BitNo (14.02) = 3 (Tripped) digital
output 1 is high when the drive is not faulty.
Digital output 1 default setting is: command FansOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.02 DO1BitNo (digital output 1 bit number)

0
15
0

C
-
Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO1Index (14.02).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.03 DO2Index (digital output 2 index)

9999
603
-9999

C
-

Digital output 2 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO2BitNo (14.04) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Digital output 2 default setting is: command FieldOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 5.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.04 DO2BitNo (digital output 2 bit number)

0
15
5

C
-

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO2Index (14.03).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 123

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
14.05 DO3Index (digital output 3 index)

9999
603
-9999

C
-
Digital output 3 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO3BitNo (14.06) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Digital output 3 default setting is: command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.06 DO3BitNo (digital output 3 bit number)

0
15
7

C
-
Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO3Index (14.05).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.07 DO4Index (digital output 4 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
-
Digital output 4 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO4BitNo (14.08) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.08 DO4BitNo (digital output 4 bit number)

0
15
0

C
-
Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO4Index (14.07).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.09 DO5Index (digital output 5 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
-
Digital output 5 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO5BitNo (14.10) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.10 DO5BitNo (digital output 5 bit number)

0
15
0

C
-
Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO5Index (14.09).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.11 DO6Index (digital output 6 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
-
Digital output 6 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO6BitNo (14.12) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.12 DO6BitNo (digital output 6 bit number)

0
15
0

C
-
Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO6Index (14.11).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.13 DO7Index (digital output 7 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
Digital output 7 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO7BitNo (14.14) - of the source -
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.14 DO7BitNo (digital output 7 bit number)

0
15
0

C
-

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO7Index (14.13).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

14.15 DO8Index (digital output 8 index)

9999
603
-9999

C
-

Digital output 8 is controlled by a selectable bit - see DO8BitNo (14.16) - of the source
(signal/parameter) selected with this parameter. The format is -xxyy, with: - = invert digital output,
xx = group and yy = index.
Digital output 8 default setting is: command MainContactorOn CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 7
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

14.16 DO8BitNo (digital output 8 bit number)

0
15
7

C
-

Bit number of the signal/parameter selected with DO8Index (14.15).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 124

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 15

Analog outputs

15.01 IndexAO1 (analog output 1 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
-
Analog output 1 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO1 (15.01). The
format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.02 CtrlWordAO1 (control word analog output 1)

32767
0
-32768

C
-
Analog output 1 can be written to via CtrlWordAO1 (15.02) using Adaptive Program, application
program or overriding control if IndexAO1 (15.01) is set to zero. Further description see group 19
Data Storage.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.03 ConvModeAO1 (convert mode analog output 1)

10V Bi
6V Offset
10V Bi

C
-
Analog output 1 signal offset:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V bipolar output, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V unipolar output
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output
3 = 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range 0 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals
(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals
(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.04 FilterAO1 (filter analog output 1)

0
10000
0

C
ms
Analog output 1 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.05 ScaleAO1 (scaling analog output 1)

0
10000
10000

C
mV
100% of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO1 (15.01) is scaled to the voltage in ScaleAO1
(16.05).
Example:
In case the min. / max. voltage ( 10 V) of analog output 1 should equal 250% of
TorqRefUsed (2.13), set:
IndexAO1 (15.01) = 213,
ConvModeAO1 (15.03) = 10V Bi and
ScaleAO1 (15.05) = 4000 mV
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

15.06 IndexAO2 (analog output 2 index)

9999
0
-9999

C
-

Analog output 2 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO2 (15.06). The
format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.07 CtrlWordAO2 (control word analog output 2)

32767
0
-32768

C
-

Analog output 2 can be written to via CtrlWordAO2 (15.07) using Adaptive Program, application
program or overriding control if IndexAO2 (15.06) is set to zero. Further description see group 19
Data Storage.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 125

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
15.08 ConvModeAO2 (convert mode analog output 2)

10V Bi

10V Bi
6V Offset

C
-
Analog output 2 signal offset:
0 = 10V Bi -10 V to 10 V bipolar output, default
1 = 0V-10V Uni 0 V to 10 V unipolar output
2 = 2V-10V Uni 2 V to 10 V unipolar output
3 = 5V Offset 5 V offset in the range 0 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals
(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
4 = 6V Offset 6 V offset in the range 2 V to 10 V for testing or indication of bipolar signals
(e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.09 FilterAO2 (filter analog output 2)

0
10000
0

C
ms
Analog output 2 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.10 ScaleAO2 (scaling analog output 2)

0
10000
10000

C
mV
100% of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO2 (15.06) is scaled to the voltage in ScaleAO2
(16.10).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 mV Type: I Volatile: N

15.11 IndexAO3 (analog output 3 index)

9999
-9999

E
Analog output 3 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO3 (15.11). The
format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

15.12 CtrlWordAO3 (control word analog output 3)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Analog output 3 can be written to via CtrlWordAO3 (15.12) using Adaptive Program, application
program or overriding control if IndexAO3 (15.11) is set to zero. Further description see group 19
Data Storage.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.13 ConvModeAO3 (convert mode analog output 3)

12mA Offset

-
E
4mA-20mA Uni

4mA-20mA Uni
Analog output 3 signal offset:
0 = 0mA-20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output
1 = 4mA-20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output, default
2 = 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of
bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
3 = 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of
bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.14 FilterAO3 (filter analog output 3)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Analog output 3 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.15 ScaleAO3 (scaling analog output 3)

0
20
20
mA
E

100% of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO3 (15.11) is scaled to the current in ScaleAO3
(16.15).
Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 mA Type: I Volatile: N

15.16 IndexAO4 (analog output 4 index)

9999
-9999

Analog output 4 is controlled by a source (signal/parameter) selected with IndexAO4 (15.16). The
format is -xxyy, with: - = negate analog output, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 126

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
15.17 CtrlWordAO4 (control word analog output 4)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Analog output 4 can be written to via CtrlWordAO4 (15.17) using Adaptive Program, application
program or overriding control if IndexAO4 (15.17) is set to zero. Further description see group 19
Data Storage.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

15.18 ConvModeAO4 (convert mode analog output 4)

12mA Offset

-
E
4mA-20mA Uni

4mA-20mA Uni
Analog output 4 signal offset:
0 = 0mA-20mA Uni 0 mA to 20 mA unipolar output
1 = 4mA-20mA Uni 4 mA to 20 mA unipolar output, default
2 = 10mA Offset 10 mA offset in the range 0 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of
bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
3 = 12mA Offset 12 mA offset in the range 4 mA to 20 mA for testing or indication of
bipolar signals (e.g. torque, speed, etc.)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

15.19 FilterAO4 (filter analog output 4)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Analog output 4 filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

15.20 ScaleAO4 (scaling analog output 4)

0
20
20
mA
E
100% of the signal/parameter selected with IndexAO4 (15.16) is scaled to the current in ScaleAO4
(16.20).
Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 mA Type: I Volatile: N
Group 16

System control inputs

16.01 Unused
16.02 ParLock (parameter lock)

Open
Locked
Open
-
E
The user can lock all parameters by means of ParLock (16.02) and SysPassCode (16.03):
To lock parameters set SysPassCode (16.03) to the desired value and change ParLock
(16.02) from Open to Locked.
Unlocking of parameters is only possible if the proper pass code (the value which was
present during locking) is used. To open parameters set SysPassCode (16.03) to the
proper value and change ParLock (16.02) from Locked to Open.
After the parameters are locked or opened the value in SysPassCode (16.03) is automatically
changed to 0:
0 = Open parameter change possible, default
1 = Locked parameter change not possible
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.03 SysPassCode (system pass code)

0
30000
0
-
E

The SysPassCode (16.03) is a number between 1 and 30000 to lock all parameters by means of
ParLock (16.02). After using Open or Locked SysPassCode (16.03) is automatically set back to
zero.
Attention:
Do not forget the pass code!
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 127

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
16.04 LocLock (local lock)

C
False
True
False
-
Local control can be disabled by setting LocLock (16.04) to True. If LocLock (16.04) is released in
local control, it becomes valid after the next changeover to remote control. No pass code is
required to change LocLock (16.04):
0 = False local control released, default
1 = True local control blocked
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.05 MacroChangeMode (macro change mode)

User1/2
Motor1/2
User1/2
-
E
The choice to release Motor1/2 (shared motion) or macros User1/2 is defined by means of
MacroChangeMode (16.05):
0 = User1/2 change between parameter sets User1 and User2, default
1 = Motor1/2 change between Motor1 and Motor2, shared motion (parameters for motor 2
see group 49)
ParChange (10.10) selects the binary signal to release either Motor1/User1 or Motor2/User2.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.06 ParApplSave (save/load parameters and enable/disable application programs)

Done
DisableAppl
Done
-
E
If parameters are written to cyclic, e.g. from an overriding control, they are only stored in the RAM
and not in the FLASH. By means of ParSave (16.06), all parameter values are saved from the
RAM into the FLASH.
ParSave (16.06) is also used to save/load a parameter set on/from the memory card and to
enable/disable application programs:
0 = Done parameters are saved or all other actions are finished, default
1 = Save save parameters into the FLASH
3 = SaveToMemC save parameter set from control board to memory card
4 = LoadFromMemC load parameter set from memory card to control board
4 = EableAppl enable application program
5 = DisableAppl disable application program
After an action (e.g. save, load, …) is finished ParSave (16.06) is changed back to Done. This will
take max. 1 second.
Note1:
Do not use the parameter save function unnecessarily
Note2:
Parameters changed by control panel or commissioning tools are immediately saved into the
FLASH.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

16.07 Unused
16.08 Unused
16.09 USI Sel (selector for user interface)
Compact

Compact

C
Extended

The user interface for the control panel (Compact/Extended parameter list) can be selected by
USI Sel (16.09):
0 = Compact short parameter list (C), default
1 = Extended long parameter list (E)
Note1:
USI Sel (16.09) works only for the control panel. DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light always
show the extended parameter list.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

16.10 Unused
16.11 SetSystemTime (set the drive’s system time)
0
64000
0
min
E

???
???
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1min Type: I Volatile: Y

16.12 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 128

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
16.13 Unused
16.14 ToolLinkConfig (tool link configuration)

9600

38400
reserved

E
The communication speed of the serial communication for the commissioning tool and the
application program tool can be selected with ToolLinkConfig (16.14):
0 = 9600 9600 Baud
1 = 19200 19200 Baud
2 = 38400 38400 Baud, default
3 = reserved
If ToolLinkConfig (16.14) is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 19

Data storage

This parameter group consists of unconnected parameters for linking, testing and commissioning
purposes.
Example1:
A value can be send from the overriding control to the drive via groups 90 or 91 to individual
parameters in group 19. The parameters of group 19 can be read with the control panel, the
commissioning tools, the Adaptive Program and application program.

SDCS-COM-8 / SDCS-CON-4
Dataset table
e.g. DriveWindow
Dataset Value
. . Address assignment of dataset
overriding control 1 Group Index
14 2 19.01
3 90 .08
. .

Example2:
A value can be send from the drive to the overriding control from individual parameters in group 19
via groups 92 or 93 The parameters of group 19 can be written to with the control panel, the
commissioning tools, the Adaptive Program and application program.

SDCS-COM-8 / SDCS-CON-4
Dataset table
e.g. Control panel
Dataset Value
. . Address assignment of dataset
overriding control 1 Group Index
15 2 19.02
3 92 .08
. .

Note1:
This parameter group can be used as well for reading/writing analog inputs/outputs.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 129

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
19.01 Data1 (data container 1)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 1 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its
value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not loose its value.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

19.02 Data2 (data container 2)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 2 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its
value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not loose its value.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

19.03 Data3 (data container 3)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 3 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its
value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not loose its value.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

19.04 Data4 (data container 4)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 4 (see group description above). This data container is of is of the type retain. Its
value will only be saved when the drive is de-energized. Thus it will not loose its value.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

19.05 Data5 (data container 5)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 5 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.06 Data6 (data container 6)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 6 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.07 Data7 (data container 7)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 7 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.08 Data8 (data container 8)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Data container 8 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.09 Data9 (data container 9) 32767

0
-32768

-
E
Data container 9 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.10 Data10 (data container 10)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Data container 10 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.11 Data11 (data container 11)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Data container 11 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

19.12 Data12 (data container 12)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Data container 12 (see group description above)

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 130

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 20

Limits

This parameter group consists of all user settable limits.

TorqRefUsed
Torque limiter
2.13

TorqUsedMax 20.22 TorqGenMax

TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18) 2.22 2.19 TorqMaxAll

TorqMax
20.05 TorqMax2005 2.20 TorqMinAll
Min
AI1, …, AI6 TorqLimAct 2.26

M1CurLimBrdg1 20.12

FluxRefFldWeak 3.24

0%

M1CurLimBrdg2 20.13 Max 97.01

TypeCode=2-Q
TorqUsedMin
TorqUsedMinSel (20.19) 2.23
TorqMin
20.06 TorqMin20.06
AI1, …, AI6
Negate [(-1) * (2.22)]

20.01 M1SpeedMin (motor 1 minimum speed)

10000
-10000

-1500

C
rpm
Motor 1 negative speed reference limit in rpm for:
SpeedRef2 (2.01)
SpeedRefUsed (2.17)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
M1SpeedMin (20.01) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Note2:
M1SpeedMin (20.01) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by
means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to
switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 131

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
20.02 M1SpeedMax (motor 1 maximum speed)

10000
1500
-10000

C
rpm
Motor 1 positive speed reference limit in rpm for:
SpeedRef2 (2.01)
SpeedRefUsed (2.17)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
M1SpeedMax (20.02) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Note2:
M1SpeedMax (20.02) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by
means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to
switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

20.03 ZeroSpeedLim (zero speed limit)

0
1000
75

C
rpm
On stop command [set UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 to zero], the drive will coast if the actual speed is in
the speed limit set by ZeroSpeedLim (20.03). While the actual speed is in the speed limit
ZeroSpeed [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 11] is high.
Note1:
In case FlyStart (21.10) = StartFrom0 and if the restart command comes before zero speed is
reached A137 SpeedNotZero [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 4] is generated.
Internally limited from: 0rpm to ( 2.29) rpm
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

20.04 Unused
20.05 TorqMax (maximum torque)

0
325
100
%
C
Maximum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for selector
TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18).
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.06 TorqMin (minimum torque) 0

-325

-100
%
C
Minimum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for selector TorqUsedMinSel
(20.19).
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.07 TorqMaxSPC (maximum torque speed controller)

0
325
325
%
E

Maximum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - at the output of the speed
controller:
TorqRef2 (2.09)
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 132

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
20.08 TorqMinSPC (minimum torque speed controller)

0
-325

-325%
%
E
Minimum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - at the output of the speed
controller.
TorqRef2 (2.09)
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.09 TorqMaxTref (maximum torque of torque reference A/B)

325
325
%
0.

E
Maximum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for external references:
TorqRefA (25.01)
TorqRefB (25.04)
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.10 TorqMinTref (minimum torque of torque reference A/B)

0
-325

-325
%
E
Minimum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for external references:
TorqRefA (25.01)
TorqRefB (25.04)
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.11 Unused
20.12 M1CurLimBrdg1 (motor 1 current limit of bridge 1)

0
325
100
%
C
Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Setting M1CurLimBrdg1 (20.12) to 0% disables bridge 1.
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.13 M1CurLimBrdg2 (motor 1 current limit of bridge 2)

0
-325

-100
%
C
Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Setting M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) to 0% disables bridge 2.
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Note2:
M1CurLimBrdg2 (20.13) is internally set to 0% if QuadrantType (4.15) = 2-Q (2-Q drive).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

20.14 ArmAlphaMax (maximum firing angle)

0
165
150
deg
E

Maximum firing angle ( ) in degrees.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 deg Type: SI Volatile: N

20.15 ArmAlphaMin (minimum firing angle)

0
165
15
deg
E

Minimum firing angle ( ) in degrees.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 deg Type: SI Volatile: N

20.16 Unused
20.17 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 133

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
20.18 TorqUsedMaxSel (maximum used torque selector)

TorqMax

TorqMax

C
AI6

-
TorqUsedMax (2.22) selector:
0 = TorqMax2005 TorqMax (20.05), default
1 = AI1 analog input 1
2 = AI2 analog input 2
3 = AI3 analog input 3
4 = AI4 analog input 4
5 = AI5 analog input 5
6 = AI6 analog input 6
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

20.19 TorqUsedMinSel (minimum used torque selector)

Negate

C
TorqMin

TorqMin
-
TorqUsedMin (2.23) selector:
0 = TorqMin2006 TorqMin (20.06), default
1 = AI1 analog input 1
2 = AI2 analog input 2
3 = AI3 analog input 3
4 = AI4 analog input 4
5 = AI5 analog input 5
6 = AI6 analog input 6
7 = Negate negated output of TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18) is used
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

20.20 Unused
20.21 Unused
20.22 TorqGenMax (maximum and minimum torque limit during regenerating)

0
325
325
%
E
Maximum and minimum torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - only during
regenerating.
Note1:
The used torque limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. other torque
limits, current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N
Group 21

Start / stop

21.01 Unused
21.02 Off1Mode (off 1 mode)
RampStop
DynBraking
RampStop

C
-

Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On (respectively Off1N) is set to
low:
0 = RampStop stop according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.03 StopMode (stop mode)

RampStop
DynBraking
RampStop

C
-

Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 Run is set to low:
0 = RampStop stop according to DecTime1 (22.02) or DecTime2 (22.10), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 134

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
21.04 E StopMode (emergency stop mode)

RampStop
DynBraking
RampStop

C
-
Conditions for motor deceleration when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2 Off3N (respectively E-stop) is set
low:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11),default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.05 E StopDecMin (emergency stop minimum deceleration rate)

0
18000
18000

E
rpm/s
During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised. This supervision starts after
the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly (21.07) is
elapsed. In case the drive isn’t able to decelerate within the window, defined by E StopDecMin
(21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06), it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 2 E-
StopCoast is set high.
Note1:
The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax (21.06) or E StopDecMin (21.05) is set to
default.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm/s Type: I Volatile: N

21.06 E StopDecMax (emergency stop maximum deceleration rate)

0
18000
18000

E
rpm/s
During an emergency stop the deceleration of the drive is supervised. This supervision starts after
the drive has received an emergency stop and the time delay defined in DecMonDly (21.07) is
elapsed. In case the drive isn’t able to decelerate within the window, defined by E StopDecMin
(21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06), it is stopped by coasting and AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 2 E-
StopCoast is set high.
Note1:
The supervision is disabled in case E StopDecMax (21.06) or E StopDecMin (21.05) is set to
default.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 rpm/s Type: I Volatile: N

21.07 DecMonDly (delay deceleration monitoring)

0
100
20
s
E
Time delay before the deceleration monitoring of the emergency stop starts. See also E
StopDecMin (21.05) and E StopDecMax (21.06).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

21.08 Unused
21.09 Unused
21.10 FlyStart (flying start)
StartFrom0
FlyingStart
FlyingStart

E
Selection of the desired operating response to a Run command [UsedMCW (7.04)) bit 3] during
braking or coasting:
0 = StartFrom0 wait until the motor has reached zero speed [see ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)],
then restart. In case the restart command comes before zero speed is
reached A137 SpeedNotZero [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 4] is generated.
1 = FlyingStart start motor with its actual speed, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.11 Unused
21.12 Unused
21.13 Unused
21.14 FanDly (fan delay)
0
300
30
s
E

After the drive has been switched off [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On = 0], both fans (motor and
converter) mustn't switched off before FanDly (21.14) has elapsed. If motor or converter
overtemperature is pending, the delay starts after the temperature has dropped below the
overtemperature limit.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 135

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
21.15 Unused
21.16 MainContCtrlMode (main contactor control mode)

On
OnHVCB
On
-
E
MainContCtrlMode (21.16) determines the reaction to On and Run commands [UsedMCW (7.04)
bits 0 and 3]:
0 = On main contactor closes with On = 1, default
1 = On&Run main contactor closes with On = Run = 1
2 = OnHVCB for high voltage AC circuit breaker configuration (for more information see
chapter XXXX); not implemented jet
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

21.17 Unused
21.18 FldHeatSel (field heat selector)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
FldHeatSel (21.18) releases the field heating for motor 1 and motor 2:
0 = NotUsed field heating is off, default
1 = On field heating is on, as long as: On = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0] and Off2N =
1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 1, Emergency Off / Coast Stop]
2 = OnRun field heating is on as long as: On = 1, Run = 0 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3]
and Off2N = 1
3 = ACW Bit12 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit12 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12]
and Run = 0
4 = ACW Bit13 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit13 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13]
and Run = 0
5 = ACW Bit14 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit14 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14]
and Run = 0
6 = ACW Bit15 field heating is on as long as: ACW Bit15 = 1 [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15]
and Run = 0
Note1:
The field heating references are set with M1FldHeatRef (44.04) and M2FldHeatRef (49.06). Field
heating for the individual motor can be disabled when the belonging reference is set to zero.
Field nominal currents are set with M1NomFldCur (99.11) and M2NomFldCur (49.05).
Note2:
In case the field exciter is not connected via a separate field contactor following settings apply for
field heating:
MainContCtrlMode (21.16) = On
FldHeatSel (21.18) = OnRun
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 22

Speed ramp

22.01 AccTime1 (acceleration time 1)

0
300
20

C
s

The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29):
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
AccTime1 (22.01) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.02 DecTime1 (deceleration time 1)

0
300
20

C
s

The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed:
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
DecTime1 (22.02) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 136

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
22.03 RampTimeScale (ramp time scaling)

100
1
0.1

-
E
Multiplier for AccTime1 (22.01) / AccTime2 (22.09) and DecTime1 (22.02) / DecTime2 (22.10) to
expand the ramp time.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

22.04 E StopRamp (emergency stop ramp)

0
3000
20

C
s
The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed. In case
emergency stop is released and E StopMode (21.04) = RampStop.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.05 ShapeTime (shape time)

0
30
0
s
E
Speed reference softening time. This function is bypassed during an emergency stop:

Max Speed reference

before ramp

0 Speed reference after

ramp, no shape time

Speed reference after

ramp, with shape time

Acceleration Shape
time time

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.06 Unused
22.07 VarSlopeRate (variable slope rate)

0
30000
0
ms
E
Variable slope is used to control the slope of the speed ramp during a speed reference change. It
is active only with VarSlopeRate (22.07) 0. VarSlopeRate (22.07) defines the speed ramp time t
for the speed reference change A:
Speed reference

t = cycle time of the overriding control (e.g. speed

SpeedRefUsed (2.17)
reference generation)
A = speed reference change during cycle time t
t

A
SpeedRef3 (2.02)

Time

Note1:
In case the overriding control systems cycle time of the speed reference and VarSlopeRate (22.07)
are equal the shape of SpeedRef3 (2.02) is a strait line.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 137

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
22.08 BalRampRef (balance ramp reference)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
The output of the speed ramp can be forced to the value defined by BalRampRef (22.08). The
function is released by setting AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 3 = 1.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

22.09 AccTime2 (acceleration time 2)

0
300
20
s
E
The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29):
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
AccTime2 (22.09) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

22.10 DecTime2 (deceleration time 2)

0
300
20
s
E
The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed:
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
DecTime2 (22.10) can be released with Ramp2Sel (22.11)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 138

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
22.11 Ramp2Select (ramp 2 selector)

Acc/Dec1
ACW Bit15
Acc/Dec1
-
E
Select active ramp parameters:
0 = Acc/Dec1 parameter set 1 [AccTime1 (22.01) and DecTime1 (22.02]) is active, default
1 = Acc/Dec2 parameter set 2 [AccTime2 (22.09) and DecTime2 (22.10)] is active
2 = SpeedLevel If |SpeedRef3 (2.02)| |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is active.
If |SpeedRef3 (2.02)| > |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set 2 is active.
3 = DI1 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
4 = DI2 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
5 = DI3 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
6 = DI4 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
7 = DI5 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
8 = DI6 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
9 = DI7 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
10 = DI8 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
11 = DI9 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
12 = DI10 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
13 = DI11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
14 = MCW Bit11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 11
15 = MCW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 12
16 = MCW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 13
17 = MCW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 14
18 = MCW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 15
19 = ACW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 12
20 = ACW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 13
21 = ACW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 14
22 = ACW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

22.12 JogAccTime (acceleration time jogging)

0
300
20
s
E
The time within the drive will accelerate from zero speed to SpeedScaleAct (2.29) in case of
jogging:
When using jog command Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8 speed is set by
FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
When using jog command Jog2 (10.18) ) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9 speed is set by
FixedSpeed2 (23.03)
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 139

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
22.13 JogDecTime (deceleration time jogging)

0
300
20
s
E
The time within the drive will decelerate from SpeedScaleAct (2.29) to zero speed in case of
jogging:
When using jog command Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8 speed is set by
FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
When using jog command Jog2 (10.18) ) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9 speed is set by
FixedSpeed2 (23.03)
To expand the ramp time use RampTimeScale (22.03)
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N
Group 23

Speed reference

23.01 SpeedRef (speed reference)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Main speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to SpeedRefUsed
(2.17) via:
Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or
Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

23.02 FixedSpeed1 (fixed speed 1)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
FixedSpeed1 (23.02) is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 (2.01) at
the speed ramp’s input. It can be released by Jog1 (10.17) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 8. The ramp
times are set with JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime (22.13).
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

23.03 FixedSpeed2 (fixed speed 2)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
FixedSpeed2 (23.03) is specifying a constant speed reference and overrides SpeedRef2 (2.01) at
the speed ramp’s input. It can be released by Jog2 (10.18) or MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 9. The ramp
times are set with JogAccTime (22.12) and JogDecTime (22.13).
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

23.04 SpeedCorr (speed correction)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E

The SpeedCorr (23.04) is added to the ramped reference SpeedRef3 (2.02).

32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the
drive.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

23.05 SpeedShare (speed sharing)

400
100
-400

%
E

Scaling factor SpeedRefUsed (2.17). Before speed ramp.

Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 140

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
23.06 SpeedErrFilt (filter for n)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Speed error ( n) filter time 1.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Idea of Window Control:

The idea of the Window Control is to block the speed controller as long as the speed error ( n)
respectively speed actual remains within the window set by WinWidthPos (23.08) and
WinWidthNeg (23.09). This allows the external torque reference [TorqRef1 (2.08)] to affect the
process directly. If the speed error ( n) respectively actual speed exceeds the programmed
window, the speed controller becomes active. This function could be called over/underspeed
protection in torque control mode:

WindowCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedErrWin

TorqRef2 (2.09) =0

WinWidthPos (23.08)
n
n =0
Window width
WinWidthNeg (23.09)

Time

WindowCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin

TorqRef2 (2.09) =0

WinWidthPos (23.08)
speed actual

Window width
WinWidthNeg (23.09)

Time

23.07 WinIntegOn (window integrator on)

On

-
E
Off

Off

Enables the integrator of the speed controller when window control is released:
0 = Off Integrator of the speed controller is blocked when window control is released
1 = On Integrator of the speed controller is enabled when window control is released
To release window control set TorqSel (26.01) = Add and AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 7 = 1.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

23.08 WinWidthPos (positive window width)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E

Positive speed limit for the window control, when the speed error ( n = nref - nact) is positive.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 141

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
23.09 WinWidthNeg (negative window width)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Negative speed limit for the window control, when the speed error ( n = nref - nact) is negative.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

23.10 SpeedStep (speed step)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
SpeedStep (23.10) is added to the speed error ( n) at the speed controller’s input. The given
min./max. values are limited by M1SpeedMin (20.02) and M1SpeedMax (20.02).
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the
drive.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y
nd
23.11 SpeedErrFilt2 (2 filter for n)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Speed error ( n) filter time 2.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

23.12 WinCtrlMode (window control mode)

SpeedErrWin

SpeedErrWin
SpeedActWin

-
E
Window control mode:
0 = SpeedErrWin standard window control, Speed error ( n) has to be in a window
defined by WinWidthPos (23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09), default
1 = SpeedActWin speed actual has to be in a window defined by WinWidthPos
(23.08) and WinWidthNeg (23.09)
Example1:
To get a window of 10rpm width around the speed error ( n) set:
WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedErrWin
WinWidthPos (23.08) = 5rpm and
WinWidthNeg (23.09) = -5rpm
Example2:
To get a window (e.g. 500rpm to 1000rpm) around speed actual set:
WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin
WinWidthPos (23.08) = 1000rpm and
WinWidthNeg (23.09) = 500rpm
To get a window (e.g. -50rpm to 100rpm) around speed actual set:
WinCtrlMode (23.12) = SpeedActWin
WinWidthPos (23.08) = 100rpm and
WinWidthNeg (23.09) = -50rpm
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

23.13 AuxSpeedRef (auxiliary speed reference)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E

Auxiliary speed reference input for the speed control of the drive. Can be connected to
SpeedRefUsed (2.17) via:
Ref1Mux (11.02) and Ref1Sel (11.03) or
Ref2Mux (11.12) and Ref2Sel (11.06)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

23.14 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 142

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
23.15 DirectSpeedRef (direct speed reference)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Direct speed input is connected to SpeedRef3 (2.02) by means of AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 10 = 1
and replaces the speed ramp output.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
Since this speed offset is added after the speed ramp, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the
drive.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: Y

23.16 SpeedRefScale (speed reference scaling)

100
1
-100

-
E
Speed reference scaling. After Speed ramp.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 24

Speed control

The Speed controller is based on the PID algorithm and is presented as follows:

⎡ ⎛ s TD ⎞⎤ 100% * Tn
Tref ( s ) = KpS * ⎢(nref ( s ) − nact ( s ) )* ⎜⎜1 +
1
+ ⎟⎟⎥ *
⎣ ⎝ s TiS s TF + 1 ⎠⎦ (2.29)
with:
Tref = torque reference
KpS = proportional gain [KpS (24.03)]
Nref = speed reference
Nact = speed actual
TiS = Integration time [TiS (24.09)]
TD = Derivation time [DerivTime (24.12)]
TF = Derivation filter time [DerivFiltTime (24.13)]
Tn = nominal motor torque
(2.29) = actual used speed scaling [SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]

n T
ref 1 100% * Tn ref
speed ------- KpS * -------------- torque
-
reference s TiS (2.29) reference

s TD
n ------------
act s TF + 1
speed actual

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 143

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
24.01 Unused
24.02 DroopRate (droop rate)

0
100
0
%
E
The amount of speed decrease caused by the load is determined by DroopRate (24.02). The result
is a load dependent speed decrease in percent of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).
Example:
With DroopRate (24.02) = 3% and TorqIntegRef (2.05) = 100% (nominal motor torque) the actual
speed decreases 3% of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.03 KpS (p-part speed controller)

0
325
5

C
-
Proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal torque with KpS (24.03) = 3, if the speed error ( n)
is 5% of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Load adaptive proportional gain:

p-part
The adaptive proportional gain of the
speed controller is used to smooth out
disturbances which are caused by low
KpS (24.03)
loads and backlash. Moderate filtering of
KpSWeakpFiltTime (24.06)
the speed error ( n) is typically not
enough to tune the drive.
The load adaptation is valid for positive
KpSMin (24.04) and negative torque.

TorqRef2 (2.09)
0 KpSWeakp 100%
(24.05)

24.04 KpSMin (minimum p-part speed controller)

0
(24.03)

-
E
KpSMin (24.04) determines the proportional gain when the speed controller output [TorqRef2
(2.09)] is zero. KpSMin (24.04) cannot be greater than KpS (24.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.05 KpSWeakp (weakening point of p-part speed controller) 0

325
0
%
E
The speed controller output [TorqRef2 (2.09)], in percent of the active motor nominal torque, where
the gain equals KpS (24.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.06 KpSWeakpFiltTime (filter time for weakening point of p-part speed controller)
0

100
ms
E
100

Filter time to soften the proportional gains rate of change.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.07 Unused
24.08 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 144

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
24.09 TiS (i-part speed controller)

0
64000
2500

C
ms
Integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29). TiS (24.09)
defines the time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the
proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal torque with KpS (24.03) = 3, if the speed error ( n)
is 5% of SpeedScaleAct (2.29). On that condition and with TiS (24.09) = 300 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal torque, if the speed error ( n) is constant,
after 300 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral part).
Setting TIS (24.09) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the speed controller and resets its
integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.10 TiSInitValue (initial value for i-part speed controller)

325
0
-325

%
E
Initial value of the speed controller integrator, in percent of the active motor nominal torque. The
integrator is set as soon as RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01)] becomes valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

24.11 BalRef ((balance reference)

325
0
-325

%
E
External value in percent of the active motor nominal torque. The speed controller output is forced
to BalRef (24.11) when AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 8 = 1.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

24.12 DerivTime (d-part speed controller)

0
10000
0
ms
E
Speed controller derivation time. DerivTime (24.12) defines the time within the speed controller
derives the error value. The speed controller works as PI controller, if DerivTime (24.12) is set to
zero.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.13 DerivFiltTime (filter time for d-part speed controller)

0
10000
8
ms
E
Derivation filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1.== 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.14 AccCompDerTime (acceleration compensation derivation time)

0
1000
0
s
E
AccCompDerTime (24.14) compensates the inertia by adding the derived and weighted
SpeedRef4 (2.18) to the speed controller output. The acceleration compensation is inactive, if
AccCompDerTime (24.14) is set to zero.
Example:
AccCompDerTime (24.14) equals the time required to accelerate the drive to SpeedScaleAct
(2.29) with motor nominal torque.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

24.15 AccCompFiltTime (filter time acceleration compensation)

0
10000
8
ms
E

Acceleration compensation filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

24.16 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 145

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Speed adaptive proportional gain and integral time:

p-part, p-part,
i-part i-part

KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) TiSValMinSpeed (24.20)

KpS (24.03) TiS (24.09)

or
TiS (24.09) KpS (24.03)

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20) KpSValMinSpeed (24.19)

Speed Speed
KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed KpSTiSMinSpeed KpSTiSMaxSpeed
(24.17) (24.18) (24.17) (24.18)

In certain applications it is useful to increase / decrease the proportional gain [KpS (24.03)] and
decrease / increase the integral time [TiS (24.09)] at low speeds to improve the performance of the
speed control. The linear increase and decrease of these parameters starts at KpSTiSMaxSpeed
(24.18) and ends at KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17) by means of KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) and
TiSValMinSpeed (24.20).
The speed adaptation is valid for positive and negative speeds.
24.17 KpSTiSMinSpeed (minimum speed for p- / i-part speed controller)

0
(24.18)

rpm
E
The speed limit below which the proportional gain and the integral time are defined by
KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) and TiSValMinSpeed (24.20).
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

24.18 KpSTiSMaxSpeed (maximum speed for p- / i-part speed controller)

10000
0
(24.17)

rpm
E
The speed limit above which the proportional gain and the integral time become constant and are
defined by KpS (24.03) and TiS (24.09).
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

24.19 KpSValMinSpeed (p-part speed controller value at minimum speed)

0
500
100
%
KpSValMinSpeed (24.19) determines the proportional gain percentage at the speed defined by E
parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.20 TiSValMinSpeed (i-part speed controller value at minimum speed)

0
500
100
%
E

TiSValMinSpeed (24.20) determines the integral time percentage at the speed defined by
parameter KpSTiSMinSpeed (24.17).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.21 ZeroFreqRFE (zero frequency resonance frequency eliminator)

0
150
45
Hz
E

Frequency of zero.
The filter is located at the input of the speed controller.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 Hz Type: I Volatile: N

24.22 ZeroDampRFE (zero damping resonance frequency eliminator)

1
0
-1

Damping of zero.
Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 146

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
24.23 PoleFreqRFE (pole frequency resonance frequency eliminator)

0
150
40
Hz
E
Frequency of pole.
The filter is located at the input of the speed controller.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 Hz Type: I Volatile: N

24.24 PoleDampRFE (pole damping resonance frequency eliminator)

0
1
0.25

E
Damping of pole.
Int. Scaling: 1000 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.25 SpeedErrorScale ( n scaling)

10
400
100
%
E
Scaling factor speed error ( n).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

24.26 Unused
24.27 KpS2 (2nd p-part speed controller)

0
325
5
-
E
2nd proportional gain of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

24.28 TiS2 (2nd i-part speed controller)

0
64000
2500
ms
E
2nd integral time of the speed controller can be released by means of Par2Select (24.29).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 147

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
24.29 Par2Select (selector for 2nd set of speed controller parameters)

ACW Bit15
ParSet1

ParSet1

E
Select active speed controller parameters:
0 = ParSet1 parameter set 1 [KpS (24.03) and TiS (24.09)] is active, default
1 = ParSet2 parameter set 2 [KpS2 (24.27) and TiS2 (24.28)] is active
2 = SpeedLevel If |MotSpeed (1.04)| |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is active.
If |MotSpeed (1.04)| > |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set 2 is active.
3 = SpeedError If |SpeedErrNeg (2.03)| |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set1 is
active.
If | SpeedErrNeg (2.03)| > |SpeedLev (50.10)|, then parameter set 2 is
active.
4 = DI1 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
5 = DI2 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
6 = DI3 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
7 = DI4 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
8 = DI5 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
9 = DI6 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
10 = DI7 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
11 = DI8 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active
12 = DI9 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
13 = DI10 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
14 = DI11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, only available
with digital extension board
15 = MCW Bit11 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 11
16 = MCW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 12
17 = MCW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 13
18 = MCW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 14
19 = MCW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 15
20 = ACW Bit12 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 12
21 = ACW Bit13 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 13
22 = ACW Bit14 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 14
23 = ACW Bit15 0 = parameter set 1 is active, 1 = parameter set 2 is active, AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 15
Note1:
Load and speed dependent adaptation parameters are valid regardless of the selected parameter
set.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 148

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 25

Torque reference

25.01 TorqRefA (torque reference A)

325
0
-325

%
E
External torque reference in percent of the active motor nominal torque. TorqRefA (25.01) can be
scaled by LoadShare (25.03).
Note1:
TorqRefA (25.01) is only valid, if TorqRefA Sel (25.10) = TorqRefA.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

25.02 TorqRefA FTC (torque reference A filter time)

0
10000
0
ms
E
TorqRefA (25.01) filter time.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: SI Volatile: N

25.03 LoadShare (load share)

400
100
-400

%
E
Scaling factor TorqRefA (25.01).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

25.04 TorqRefB (torque reference B)

325
0
-325

%
E
External torque reference in percent of the active motor nominal torque. TorqRefB (25.04) is
ramped by TorqRampUp (25.05) and TorqRampDown (25.06).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

25.05 TorqRampUp (torque ramp up)

0
120
0
s
E
Ramp time from 0% to 100%, of active motor nominal torque, for. TorqRefB (25.04).
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

25.06 TorqRampDown (torque ramp down)

0
120
0
s
E
Ramp time from 100% to 0%, of active motor nominal torque, for. TorqRefB (25.04).
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

25.07 Unused
25.08 Unused
25.09 Unused
25.10 TorqRefA Sel (torque reference A selector)
AI6

-
E
TorqRefA2501

TorqRefA2501

Selector for TorqRefExt (2.24):

0 = TorqRefA2501 TorqRefA (25.01), default
1 = AI1 analog input AI1
2 = AI2 analog input AI2
3 = AI3 analog input AI3
4 = AI4 analog input AI4
5 = AI5 analog input AI5
6 = AI6 analog input AI6
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 149

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 26

Torque reference handling

26.01 TorqSel (torque selector)

Speed
Zero
Limitation

-
E
Torque reference selector:
0 = Zero zero control, torque reference = 0
1 = Speed speed control, default
2 = Torque torque control
3 = Minimum minimum control: min [TorqRef1 (2.08), TorqRef2 (2.09)]
4 = Maximum maximum control: max [TorqRef1 (2.08), TorqRef2 (2.09)]
5 = Add add control: TorqRef1 (2.08) +TorqRef2 (2.09), used for window control
6 = Limitation limitation control: TorqRef1 (2.08) limits TorqRef2 (2.09). If TorqRef1 (2.08) =
50%, then TorqRef2 (2.09) is limited to 50%.
The output of the torque reference selector is TorqRef3 (2.10).
Note1:
TorqSel (26.01) is only valid, if TorqMuxMode (26.04) = TorqSel.
Note2:
In case of UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2 Off3N (respectively E-stop) is set low and E StopMode (21.04) =
RampStop or TorqueLimit, the torque selector is automatically set to Speed.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

26.02 LoadComp (load compensation)

325
0
-325

%
E
Load compensation - in percent of the active motor nominal torque -added to TorqRef3 (2.10). The
sum of TorqRef3 (2.10) and the LoadComp (26.02) results in TorqRef4 (2.11).
Note1:
Since this torque offset is added, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

26.03 Unused
Torque multiplexer function:
Torque selection

TorqRef2 Torque selector

2.09
Speed 1
0
Torque 2 TorqRef3
2.08 1 0
2 2.10
TorqRef1 Min 3
3
4 56
LoadComp

Max 4

+
Add 5
+

Lim 6

TorqMux (26.05) TorqMuxMode (26.04)

NotUsed TorqSel 26.01 TorqSel2601 (0…6)
DI1, …, DI11 Speed/Torq (1 or 2)
MCW Bit 11, …, MCW Bit15 Speed/Min (1 or 3)
ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15 Speed/Max (1 or 4)
Speed/Limit (1 or 6)

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 150

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
26.04 TorqMuxMode (torque multiplexer mode)

TorqSel2601
Speed/Limit
TorqSel2601
-
E
TorqMuxMode (26.04) selects a pair of operation modes. The change between operation modes is
done by means of TorqMux (26.05). Torque reference multiplexer:
0 = TorqSel2601 operation mode depends on TorqSel (26.01), default
1 = Speed/Torq operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):
- binary input = 0 speed control (1)
- binary input = 1 torque control (2)
2 = Speed/Min operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):
- binary input = 0 speed control (1)
- binary input = 1 minimum control (3)
3 = Speed/Max operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):
- binary input = 0 speed control (1)
- binary input = 1 maximum control (4)
4 = Speed/Limit operation mode depends on TorqMux (26.05):
- binary input = 0 speed control (1)
- binary input = 1 limitation control (6)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

26.05 TorqMux (torque multiplexer)

ACW Bit15
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
TorqMux (26.05) selects a binary input to change between operation modes. The choice of the
operation modes is provided by means of TorqMuxMode (26.04). Torque reference multiplexer
binary input:
0 = NotUsed operation mode depends on TorqSel (26.01), default
1 = DI1 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
2 = DI2 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
3 = DI3 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
4 = DI4 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
5 = DI5 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
6 = DI6 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
7 = DI7 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
8 = DI8 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04)
9 = DI9 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available
with digital extension board
10= DI10 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available
with digital extension board
11 = DI11 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), only available
with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), MainCtrlWord
(7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 0 = speed control, 1 = depends on TorqMuxMode (26.04), AuxCtrlWord
(7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 151

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
26.06 Unused
26.07 Unused
26.08 GearStartTorq (gearbox starting torque)

0
325
325
%
E
Gear backlash compensation:
GearStartTorq (26.08) is the reduced torque limit - in percent of the active motor nominal
torque - used after a torque direction change. The torque limit is reduced for the time
defined by GearTorqTime (26.09).
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

26.09 GearTorqTime (gearbox torque time)

0
10000
100
ms
E
Gear backlash compensation function:
When the torque is changing it’s direction, the torque limit is reduced for the time defined
by GearTorqTime (26.09).
Int. Scaling: 1 = 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

26.10 GearTorqRamp (gearbox torque ramp)

0
64000
100
ms
E
Gear backlash compensation function:
When the torque is changing it’s direction, the torque limit is reduced for the time defined
by GearTorqTime (26.09). After the time has elapsed, the torque limit is increased to it’s
normal value according to the ramp time defined by GearTorqRamp (26.10).
GearTorqRamp (26.10) defines the time within the torque increases from zero- to active
motor nominal torque.
Int. Scaling: 1 = 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

26.11 Unused
26.12 Unused
26.13 Unused
26.14 Unused
26.15 TorqCorrect (torque correction)

NotUsed

NotUsed
AI6

-
E
Torque correction value in percent of the active motor nominal torque:
0 = NotUsed no torque correction used, default
1 = AI1 torque correction via AI1 (fast AI)
2 = AI2 torque correction via AI2 (fast AI)
3 = AI3 torque correction via AI3
4 = AI4 torque correction via AI4
5 = AI5 torque correction via AI5
6 = AI6 torque correction via AI6
Note1:
If TorqCorrect (26.15) = AI3 then AI3 is connected to TorqCorr (2.14) and thus added to
TorqRefUsed (2.13).
Note2:
Since this torque offset is added, it must be set to zero prior to stopping the drive.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 152

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 30

Fault functions

30.01 StallTime (stall time)

0
200
0

C
s
The time allowed for the drive to undershoot StallSpeed (30.02) and exceed StallTorq (30.03).A
triggered stall protection leads to fault F531 MotorStalled [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 14].
The stall protection is inactive, if StallTime (30.01) is set to zero.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

30.02 StallSpeed (stall speed)

0
1000
5

C
rpm
Actual speed limit used for stall protection.
Internally limited from: 0rpm to ( 2.29)rpm
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

30.03 StallTorq (stall torque)

0
325
75
%
C
Actual torque limit used for stall protection.
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.04 Unused
30.05 ResCurDetectSel (residual current detection selector) l

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
The drive trips with F505 ResCurDetect [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 4] if the earth current exceeds
ResCurDetectLim (30.06) for ResCurDetectDel (30.07):
0 = NotUsed residual current detection is blocked, default
1 = AI4 The earth current is measured by means of a current difference sensor in
combination with AI4 (X3:11 and X3:12) on the SDCS-IOB-3 board.
2 = DI1 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
3 = DI2 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
4 = DI3 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
5 = DI4 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
6 = DI5 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
7 = DI6 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
8 = DI7 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays).
9 = DI8 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays.
10 = DI9 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays). Only available with digital extension board
11 = DI10 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays. Only available with digital extension board
12 = DI11 The earth current is measured by means of an external device (e.g. Bender
relays). Only available with digital extension board
Note1:
If ResCurDetectSel (30.05) is connected to a digital input only ResCurDetectDel (30.06) remains
valid. The trip limit ResCurDetectLim (30.05) is adjusted at the external device.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 153

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.06 ResCurDetectLim (residual current detection limit)

0
20
4
A
E
Residual current detection ripping level. If ResCurDetectSel (30.05) is connected to a digital input
ResCurDetectLim (30.06) is deactivated, because the limit is adjusted at the external device.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

30.07 ResCurDetectDel (residual current detection delay)

0
64000
10
ms
E
Time delay for F505 ResCurDetect [FaultWord1 (9.01)].

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.08 ArmOvrVoltLev (armature overvoltage level)

20
500
120
%
C
The drive trips with F503 ArmOverVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 2] if ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) - in
percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) - is exceeded.
Example:
With M1NomVolt (99.02) = 525V and ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08) = 120% the drive trips with armature
voltages > 630 V.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.09 ArmOvrCurLev (armature overcurrent level)

20
400
250
%
C
The drive trips with F502 ArmOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 1] if ArmOvrCurLev (30.09) - in
percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded.
Example:
With M1NomCur (99.03) = 850 A and ArmOvrCurLev (30.09) = 250% the drive trips with armature
currents > 2125 A.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.10 ArmCurRiseMax (maximum rise armature current)

0
325
325
%/ms
E
The drive trips with F539 FastCurRise [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 6] if ArmCurRiseMax (30.10) - in
percent of M1NomCur (99.03) per 1 ms is exceeded.
Note1:
This trip opens the main contactor and the DC-breaker, if present.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.11 Unused
30.12 M1FldMinTrip (motor 1 minimum field trip)

0
100
50
%
E
The drive trips with F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] if M1FldMinTrip (30.12) - in
percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.13 M1FldOvrCurLev (motor 1 field overcurrent level)

0
135
125
%
E
The drive trips with F515 M1FexOverCur [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 14] if M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13) - in
percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is exceeded.
The field overcurrent fault is inactive, if M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13) is set to 135%.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.14 SpeedFbMonLev (speed feedback monitor level)

0
10000
15
rpm
E

The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) if the measured speed feedback
[SpeedActEnc (1.03) or SpeedActTach (1.05)] does not exceed SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) while the
measured EMF exceeds EMF FbMonLev (30.15).
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Example:
With SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) = 15 rpm and EMF FbMonLev (30.15) = 50 V the drive trips when
the EMF is > 50 V while the speed feedback is 15 rpm.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 154

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.15 EMF FbMonLev (EMF feedback monitor level)

0
2000
50
V
E
The speed measurement monitoring function is activated, when the measured EMF exceeds EMF
FbMonLev (30.15). See also SpeedFbMonLev (30.14).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

30.16 M1OvrSpeed (motor 1 overspeed)

0
10000
1800

C
rpm
The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15] if M1OvrSpeed (30.16) is
exceeded.
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Note1:
The value of M1OvrSpeed (30.16) is as well used for the analog tacho tuning. Any change of its
value has the consequence that A115 TachoRange [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] comes up for 10
seconds and M1TachoAdjust (50.12) respectively M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) have to be adjusted
anew. The adjustment can be done by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

30.17 SpeedFbFltSel (speed feedback fault selector)

Fault
NotUsed
EMF/Alarm

-
E
SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) determines the reaction to a speed feedback problem:
0 = NotUsed no reaction
1 = Fault the drive trips according to SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) and sets F522
SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5], default
2 = EMF/Fault the speed feedback is switched to EMF, the drive stops according to E
StopRamp (22.11) and sets F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5]
3 = EMF/Alarm the speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb [AlarmWord2
(9.07) bit 8] is set
Note1:
In case the actual speed of the drive is in the field weakening area SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) reacts
as if it is set to Fault, this is not valid for selection NotUsed.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.18 CurRippleSel (current ripple selector)

NotUsed
Alarm
Fault
-
E
CurRippleSel (30.18) determines the reaction when CurRippleLim (30.19) is reached:
0 = NotUsed no reaction
1 = Fault the drive trips with F517 ArmCurRipple [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 0], default
2 = Alarm A117 ArmCurRipple [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 0] is set
Note1:
The current ripple function detects:
a broken fuse, thyristor or current transformer (T51, T52)
too high gain of the current controller
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.19 CurRippleLim (current ripple limit)

0
650
150
%
E

Threshold for CurRippleSel (30.18), in percent of M1NomCur (99.03). Typical values when a
thyristor is missing:
armature about 300%
high inductive loads (e.g. excitation) about 90%
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.20 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 155

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.21 PwrLossTrip (power loss trip)

Delayed
Immediately

Immediately
-
E
The action taken, when the mains voltage undershoots UNetMin2 (30.23):
0 = Immediately the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit
11], default
1 = Delayed A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the
mains voltage recovers before PowrDownTime (30.25) is elapsed,
otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.22 UNetMin1 (mains voltage minimum 1)

0
150
80
%
C
First (upper) limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10). If the
mains voltage undershoots UNetMin1 (30.22) following actions take place:
the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14),
single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible,
the controllers are frozen,
the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and
A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the mains voltage
recovers before PowrDownTime (30.25) is elapsed, otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt
[FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated.
Note1:
UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 (30.22) first.
Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 (30.22) has to be larger
than UNetMin2 (30.23).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.23 UnetMin2 (mains voltage minimum 2)

0
150
60
%
C
Second (lower) limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10). If the
mains voltage undershoots UnetMin2 (30.23) following actions take place:
if PwrLossTrip (30.21) = Immediately:
o the drive trips immediately with F512 MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11]
if PwrLossTrip (30.21) = Delayed:
o field acknowledge signals are ignored,
o the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14),
o single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as
possible,
o the controllers are frozen
o the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and
o A111 MainsLowVolt [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 10] is set as long as the mains
voltage recovers before PowrDownTime (30.25) is elapsed, otherwise F512
MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is generated.
Note1:
UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1 (30.22) first.
Thus for a proper function of the mains undervoltage monitoring UNetMin1 (30.22) has to be larger
than UNetMin2 (30.23).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

30.24 PowrDownTime (power down time)

0
64000
500

C
ms

The mains voltage must recover (over both limits) within PowrDownTime (30.24). Otherwise F512
MainsLowVolt [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 11] will be generated.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 156

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.25 FaultMask (mask faults)

-
-
-
-
E
Attention:
Activation of the fault mask may cause harm to personnel and / or equipment! Thus only
certified experts should use the fault mask for e.g. commissioning and fault tracing.

The faults or alarms are suppressed, if the according bit of the fault mask is set. The fault mask is
not stored, thus there is no fault suppressing after power-on. If a fault is suppressed, A123
FaultSuppres [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 6] is generated. Fault mask word:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 M1Fex 1 suppressed faults: F515 M1FexOverCur, F516 M1FexCom,
F521 FieldAck, F529 M1FexNotOK
0 no action
B2 M2Fex 1 suppressed faults: F518 M2FexOverCur, F519 M2FexCom,
F521 FieldAck, F530 M2FexNotOK
0 no action
B3 Speed 1 suppressed faults: F522 SpeedFb, F553 TachPolarity, F532
MotOverSpeed
0 no action
B4 Brake 1 suppressed faults: F552 MechBrake
0 no action
B5 reserved 1
0
B6 I/OBoard 1 suppressed faults: F508 I/OBoardLoss
0 no action
B7 Off2/Off3 1 suppressed alarms: A101 Off2ViaDI, A102 Off3ViaDI
0 no action
B8 ConvTemp 1 suppressed faults: F504 ConvOverTemp
0 no action
B9 Mains 1 suppressed faults: F512 MainsLowVolt, F513 MainsOvrVolt
0 no action
B10 reserved 1
0
B11 MainsSycn 1 suppressed faults: F514 MainsNotSync
0 no action
B12 OverCur 1 suppressed faults: F502 ArmOverCur
0 no action
B13 12-Pulse 1 suppressed faults: F533 ReversalTime, F534 12PcurDiff,
F535 12PulseCom, F536 12SlaveFail
0 no action
B14 Force 1 force drive to state RdyRun and RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01)
bit 0 and 1]
0 no action
B15 Bits0To13 1 suppressed faults: all as to be found in bits 0 to 13
0 no action
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

30.26 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 157

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Overview local and communication loss:
Device Loss control Time out Related fault Related alarm
Control panel LocalLossCtrl (30.27) fixed to 5s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss
DW
DWL
Rxxx (Fieldbus) ComLossCtrl (30.28) FB TimeOut (30.35) F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom
DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 (94.13), F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19),
MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
- 12P TimeOut (94.03) F535 12PulseCom -
- FexTimeOut (94.07) F516 M1FexCom -
F519 M2FexCom
SDCS-COM-8 Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05) Ch0TimeOut (70.04) F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com
Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15) Ch2TimeOut (70.14)

30.27 LocalLossCtrl (local or control panel loss control)

RampStop
FixedSpeed1
RampStop
-
E
LocalLossCtrl (30.27) determines the reaction to a local loss (control panel, DriveWindow,
DriveWindowLight).
F546 LocalCmdLoss [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 13] is set with:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
A130 LocalCmdLoss [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 13] is set with:
4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning
5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
Note1:
The time out for LocalLossCtrl (30.27) is fixed to 5s.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.28 ComLossCtrl (communication loss control)

RampStop
FixedSpeed1
RampStop
-
E
ComLossCtrl (30.28) determines the reaction to a communication loss (fieldbusses - Rxxx,
DCSLink - peer-to-peer respectively master-follower).
Depending on the type of communication loss either F528 FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit
11] or F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] is set with:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Depending on the type of communication loss either A128 FieldBusCom [AlarmWord2 (9.02) bit
11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.01) bit 11] is set with:
4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning
5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
Note1:
The time out for ComLossCtrl (30.28) is set by:
FB TimeOut (30.35) for all fieldbusses (Rxxx) and
MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) to MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) for the DCSLink (peer-to-peer
respectively master-follower communication).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 158

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.29 AI Mon4mA (analog input 4mA fault selector)

FixedSpeed1
Fault
NotUsed

-
E
AI Mon4mA (30.29) determines the reaction to an undershoot of one of the analog inputs under
4mA / 2V - if it is configured to this mode:
0 = NotUsed no reaction
1 = Fault the drive stops according to FaultStopMode (30.30) and trips with F551
AIRange [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 2], default
2 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AIRange
[AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 10]
3 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02) and sets A127
AIRange [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 10]
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.30 FaultStopMode (fault stop mode)

RampStop
DynBraking
RampStop

C
-
FaultStopMode (30.30) determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 4:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Note1:
FaultStopMode (30.30) doesn’t apply to communication faults.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.31 ExtFaultSel (external fault selector)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
The drive trips with F526 ExternalDI [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 9] if a binary input for an external fault
is selected and 1:
0 = NotUsed no reaction, default
1 = DI1 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
2 = DI2 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
3 = DI3 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
4 = DI4 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
5 = DI5 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
6 = DI6 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
7 = DI7 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
8 = DI8 1 = no fault, 0 = fault
9 = DI9 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, Only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, Only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, Only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1 = no fault, 0 = fault; external fault is connected to AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit
13
19 = ACW Bit14 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1 = no fault, 0 = fault, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 159

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
30.32 ExtAlarmSel (external alarm selector)

ACW Bit15

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
The drive sets A126 ExternalDI [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 9] if a binary input for an external alarm is
selected and 1:
0 = NotUsed no reaction, default
1 = DI1 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
2 = DI2 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
3 = DI3 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
4 = DI4 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
5 = DI5 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
6 = DI6 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
7 = DI7 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
8 = DI8 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm
9 = DI9 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm. Only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm. Only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm. Only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 1 = no alarm, 0 = alarm, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.33 ExtFaultOnSel (external fault on selector)

Fault

Fault
-
E
Fault&RdyO
ExtFaultOnSel (30.33) determines the reaction to an external fault:
0 = Fault external fault is always valid independent from drive state, default
1 = Fault&RdyRun external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun [MainStatWord
(8.01) bit 1] for at least 6s
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.34 ExtAlarmOnSel (external alarm on selector)

Alarm

Alarm
-
E
Alarm&Rdy
ExtAlarmOnSel (30.34) determines the reaction to an external alarm:
0 = Alarm external alarm is always valid independent from drive state, default
1 = Alarm&RdyRun external alarm is only valid when drive state is RdyRun [MainStatWord
(8.01) bit 1] for at least 6s
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

30.35 FB TimeOut (fieldbus time out)

0
64000
100

C
ms
Time delay before a communication break with a fieldbus is declared. Depending on the setting of
ComLossCtrl (30.28) either F528 FieldBusCom [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 11] or A128 FieldBusCom
[AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 11] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if FB TimeOut (30.35) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

30.36 SpeedFbFltMode (speed feedback fault mode)

CoastStop
DynBraking
CoastStop
-
E

SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) determines the reaction to a fault of trip level 3:

0 = CoastStop torque is zero, default
1 = DynBraking dynamic braking
Note1:
FaultStopMode (30.36) doesn’t apply to communication faults.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 160

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 31

Motor 1 temperature

31.01 M1ModelTime (motor 1 model time constant)

0
6400
240
s
E
Thermal time constant for motor 1. The time within the temperature rises to 63% of its nominal
value.
The motor thermal model is blocked, if M1ModelTime (31.01) is set to zero.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

31.02 Unused
31.03 M1AlarmLimLoad (motor 1 alarm limit load)

10
325
102
%
E
The drive sets A107 M1OverLoad [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 6] if M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03) - in
percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is
Mot1TempCalc (1.20).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

31.04 M1FaultLimLoad (motor 1 fault limit load)

10
325
106
%
E
The drive trips with F507 M1OverLoad [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 6] if M1FaultLimLoad (31.04) - in
percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is
Mot1TempCalc (1.20).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

31.05 M1TempSel (motor 1 temperature selector)

C
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
1PTC AI2/Con
M1TempSel (31.05) selects motor 1 measured temperature input.
Connection possibilities for PT100:
max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 or
up to 6 PT100 for motor 1 only.
Connection possibilities PTC:
max. 1 PTC for motor 1 and max. 1 PTC for motor 2 or
up to 2 PTC for motor 1 only:
0 = NotUsed motor 1 temperature measurement is blocked, default
1 = 1PT100 AI2 one PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
2 = 2PT100 AI2 two PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
3 = 3PT100 AI2 three PT100 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
4 = 4PT100 AI2/3 four PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 1 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
5 = 5PT100 AI2/3 five PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 2 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
6 = 6PT100 AI2/3 six PT100, 3 connected to AI2 and 3 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
7 = 1PT100 AI7 one PT100 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
8 = 2PT100 AI7 two PT100 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
9 = 3PT100 AI7 three PT100 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
10 = 4PT100 AI7/8 four PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 1 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
11 = 5PT100 AI7/8 five PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 2 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
12 = 6PT100 AI7/8 six PT100, 3 connected to AI7 and 3 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
13 = 1PTC AI2 one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
14 = 2PTC AI2/3 two PTC, 1 connected to AI2 and 1 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
15 = 1PTC AI2/Con one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-CON-4
Note1:
AI7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule (98.06).
Note2:
In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS-IOB-3 the input range must be
configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and constant current source
see Hardware manual.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 161

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
31.06 M1AlarmLimTemp (motor 1 alarm limit temperature)

4000
0
-10

C
°C / / -
The drive sets A106 M1OverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 5] if M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06) is
exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1TempMeas (1.22).
Note1:
The units depends on M1TempSel (31.05).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: SI Volatile: N

31.07 M1FaultLimTemp (motor 1 fault limit temperature)

4000
0
-10

C
°C / / -
The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 5] if M1FaultLimTemp (31.07) is
exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot1TempMeas (1.22).
Note1:
The units depends on M1TempSel (31.05).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: SI Volatile: N

31.08 M1KlixonSel (motor 1 klixon selector)

C
NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 5] if a digital input selected and the
klixon is open:
0 = NotUsed no reaction, default
1 = DI1 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
2 = DI2 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
3 = DI3 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
4 = DI4 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
5 = DI5 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
6 = DI6 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
7 = DI7 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
8 = DI8 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
9 = DI9 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
Note1:
It is possible to connect several klixons in series.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 34

Control panel display

Signal and parameter visualization on the control panel :

LOC 3 15rpm
D isp P aram 1 S el (34.01 ) 15.0 rpm
D isp P a ram 2 S el (34 .08 ) 3.7 V
D isp P aram 3 S el (34.15 ) 17.3 A
DIR MENU

Setting a display parameter to 0 results in no signal or parameter displayed.

Setting a display parameter from 101 to 9999 displays the belonging signal or parameter. If a
signal or parameter does not exist, the display shows “n.a.”.

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 162

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
34.01 DispParam1Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in control panel row 1)

0
9999
101

C
-
Index pointer to the destination of the control panel first display row [e.g. 101 equals MotSpeedFilt
(1.01)].
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

34.02 Unused
34.03 Unused
34.04 Unused
34.05 Unused
34.06 Unused
34.07 Unused
34.08 DispParam2Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in control panel row 2)

0
9999
114

C
-
Index pointer to the destination of the control panel second display row [e.g. 114 equals
ArmVoltAct (1.14)].
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

34.09 Unused
34.10 Unused
34.11 Unused
34.12 Unused
34.13 Unused
34.14 Unused
34.15 DispParam3Sel (select signal / parameter to be displayed in control panel row 3)

0
9999
116

C
-
Index pointer to the destination of the control panel third display row [e.g. 116 equals ConvCurAct
(1.16)].
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

34.16 Unused
34.17 Unused
34.18 Unused
34.19 Unused
34.20 Unused
34.21 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 163

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 42

Brake control

Brake control:

RdyRef
[MainStatWord (8.01) bit 2]
Brake open (lift) command
ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) Brake control
[ AuxStatWord (8.02)bit 8]
Run
[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3]
ForceBrake
[AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 12]

Brake
A22 MechBrake
Brake acknowledge supervision (with
[ AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5]
brake
acknowledge and
torque proving)
Brake open (lift) command F52 MechBrake
[AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] [[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3]

With brake control On [M1BrakeCtrl (42.01)] and RdyRef [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 2] equals 1 the
torque reference is set to StrtTorqRef (42.08). The brake open (lift) command is given, when
torque actual has reached StrtTorqRef (42.08). This function is called torque proving.

The brake open (lift) command [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8] is send directly, without time delay, to
the brake. At the same time a brake open delay [M1BrakeOpenDly (42.03)] is started. During the
delay, the brake acknowledge is ignored and the torque reference equals StrtTorqRef (42.08).
After the time delay is elapsed normal operation starts.
This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake.

With Run [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] set 0 and motor speed below ZeroSpeedLim (20.03), the brake
open (lift) command is removed and a brake close (apply) delay [M1BrakeCloseDly (42.04)] is
started. During the delay the brake acknowledge is ignored and the motor control remains active
with speed reference zero.
This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerated from ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)
to actual speed = 0. This is important for drives with an inaccurate speed feedback (e.g. EMF
control) and thus a relatively high setting of ZeroSpeedLim (20.03).
42.01 M1BrakeCtrl (motor 1 brake control)
NotUsed
On
NotUsed
-
E

Releases the control of the brake:

0 = NotUsed brake control blocked, default
1 = On brake control is released
The brake open (lift) command is readable in AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8 and can be connected to
the digital output controlling the brake.
The brake control can be overwritten by AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 12. The brake is always applied in
case ForceBrake = 1. Otherwise the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 164

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
42.02 M1BrakeAckSel (motor 1 brake acknowledge selector)

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
The drive sets either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] or trips with F552 MechBrake
[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06 ) if a digital input is selected and the
brake acknowledge fails:
0 = NotUsed brake acknowledge is blocked, default
1 = DI1 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
2 = DI2 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
3 = DI3 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
4 = DI4 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
5 = DI5 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
6 = DI6 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
7 = DI7 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
8 = DI8 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
9 = DI9 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
10 = DI10 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
11 = DI11 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

42.03 M1BrakeOpenDly (motor 1 brake open delay)

0
5
0
s
E
Brake open (lift) delay. This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

42.04 M1BrakeCloseDly (motor 1 brake close delay)

0
5
0
s
E
Brake close (apply) delay. This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerated
from ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) to actual speed = 0.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

42.05 Unused
42.06 BrakeFaultFunc (brake fault function)

Alarm
Fault
Fault
-
E
BrakeFaultFunc (42.06) determines the reaction to an invalid brake acknowledge:
0 = Alarm the drive sets A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5]
1 = Fault the drive trips with F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3], default
Note1:
With Run [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] set 0, motor speed below ZeroSpeedLim (20.03),
M1BrakeCloseDly (42.04) elapsed and acknowledge brake applied (closed) is missing F552
MechBrake [FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] is overwritten and A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit
5] is set.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 165

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
42.07 StrtTorqRefSel (starting torque reference selector)

NotUsed

NotUsed
AI6

-
E
Start torque selector:
0 = NotUsed start torque reference is fixed zero (torque proving disabled), default
1 = Memory torque memory released
2 = StrtTorqRef StrtTorqRef (42.08)
3 = AI1 analog input AI1
4 = AI2 analog input AI2
5 = AI3 analog input AI3
6 = AI4 analog input AI4
7 = AI5 analog input AI5
8 = AI6 analog input AI6
Note1:
Torque proving is to give the brake open (lift) command only, when torque actual has reached
StrtTorqRef (42.08). In case torque actual does not reach StrtTorqRef (42.08) either A122
MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] is set or the drive trips with F552 MechBrake [FaultWord4
(9.04) bit 3] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06).
Note2:
Torque memory is the presetting of the torque when starting with e.g. suspended load. The preset
torque equals the actual torque stored when the brake open (lift) command is removed. If the
preset torque is zero, StrtTorqRef (42.08) is used.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

42.08 StrtTorqRef (starting torque reference)

0
325
100
%
E
Start torque - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for torque proving.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

42.09 BrakeEStopMode (emergency stop mode brake)

Disable
Enable
Disable
-
E
BrakeEStopMode (42.09) determines the reaction when UsedMCW (7.04) bit 2 Off3N (respectively
E-stop) is set low:
0 = Disable the brake is closed according to standard brake control, default
1 = Enable the brake is closed immediately with the E-stop
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 43

Current control

43.01 OperModeSel (operation mode selector)

12PSerSlave
ArmConv

ArmConv
-
Converter mode selection: E
0 = ArmConv 6 pulse single armature converter, default
1 = FieldConv field exciter mode; Attention: The digital input for the external
overvoltage protection is assigned by means of OvrVoltProt (10.13).
2 = 12PParMaster 12-pulse parallel master
3 = 12PParSlave 12-pulse parallel slave
4 = 12PSerMaster 12-pulse serial master
5 = 12PSerSlave 12-pulse serial slave
6 = reserved
to
11 = reserved
This parameter is write protected while Run [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] = 1.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 166

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
43.02 CurSel (current reference selector)

C
CurRef311
FluxRefEMF
CurRef311
-
CurSel (43.02) selector:
0 = CurRef311 CurRef (3.11) calculated from torque reference, default
1 = CurRefExt CurRefExt (43.03) external current reference
2 = AI1 analog input AI1
3 = AI2 analog input AI2
4 = AI3 analog input AI3
5 = AI4 analog input AI4
6 = AI5 analog input AI5
7 = AI6 analog input AI6
8 = FexCurRef field current reference from armature converter via DCSLink, only if
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv
9 = FluxRefEMF FluxRefEMF (3.27) EMF controller reference, only if OperModeSel (43.01)
= FieldConv
Note1:
In case OperModeSel (43.01) is 12PParSlave CurSel (43.02) is overwritten by the current
reference from the 12-pulse parallel master.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.03 CurRefExt (external current reference)

325
0
-325

E
External current reference in percent of M1NomCur (99.03).
Note1:
CurRefExt (43.03) is only valid, if CurSel (43.02) = CurRefExt.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

43.04 CurRefSlope (current reference slope)

40
10
0.2

%/ms
E
CurRefSlope (43.04) in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) per 1 ms. The di/dt limitation is located at
the input of the current controller.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

43.05 ControlModeSel (control mode selector)

Standard

Standard
-
E
PowerSupply2
Current controller mode selection:
0 = Standard PI-controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current actual plus
feed forward, default
1 = FeedFwdRef PI-controller with RL compensation of EMF based on current reference
plus feed forward
2 = NoFeedFwd PI-controller without RL compensation of EMF. Feed forward takes
place
3 = PowerSupply1 not implemented jet
4 = PowerSupply2 PwrSupplyRefExt (43.24) is fed into the current control chain (directly
after the current controller). The current controller is blocked.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.06 M1KpArmCur (motor 1 p-part armature current controller)

0
100

C
0.1
-

Proportional gain of the current controller.

Example:
The controller generates 15 % of motor nominal current [M1NomCur (99.03)] with M1KpArmCur
(43.06) = 3, if the current error is 5 % of M1NomCur (99.03).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 167

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
43.07 M1TiArmCur (motor 1 i-part armature current controller)

0
10000
50

C
ms
Integral time of the current controller. M1TiArmCur (43.07) defines the time within the integral part
of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal current [M1NomCur (99.03)] with M1KpArmCur
(43.06) = 3, if the current error is 5% of M1NomCur (99.03). On that condition and with
M1TiArmCur (43.07) = 50 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal current, if the current error is constant,
after 50 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral part).
Setting M1TiArmCur (43.07) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets
its integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

43.08 M1DiscontCurLim (motor 1 discontinuous current limit)

0
325
100
%
C
Threshold continuous / discontinuous current in percent of M1NomCur (99.03). The actual
continuous / discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 12.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.09 M1ArmL (motor 1 armature inductance)

0
640
0

C
mH
Inductance of the armature circuit in mH. Used for the EMF compensation:
dIA
EMF = U A − RA * I A − LA *
dt
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 mH Type: I Volatile: N

43.10 M1ArmR (motor 1 armature resistance)

0
65500
0

C
m
Resistance of the armature circuit in m . Used for the EMF compensation:
dIA
EMF = U A − RA * I A − LA *
dt
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 m Type: I Volatile: N

43.11 Unused
43.12 Uk (relative short circuit impedance)

0
15
0
%
E
For more information contact Your ABB representative.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 168

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
43.13 FiringLimMode (firing limit mode)

CalcSingle
FixSingle
Fix

-
E
FiringLimMode (43.13) selects the strategy for ArmAlphaMax (20.14):
0 = Fix the firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax (20.14)
1 = FixSingle The firing angle limit is defined by ArmAlphaMax (20.14). When
ArmAlphaMax (20.14) is reached single firing pulses are fired, default
2 = Calculated the firing limit is reduced from 165° to ArmAlphaMax (20.14) depending on
the actual motor current and M1DiscontCurLim (43.08)
3 = CalcSingle function same as in Calculated, but single pulses are fired when the limit is
reached
degrees
( )

= 165°

ArmAlphaMax (20.14)

actual motor
M1DiscontCurLim current
(43.08)

Note1:
Single firing pulses force discontinuous current automatically to zero.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

43.14 RevDly (reversal delay)

0
600
5
ms
E
RevDly (43.14) defines the delay time in ms for the bridge reversal after zero current has been
detected.

I The reversal delay time starts when zero

act current has been detected, after a command
Command to CtrlStatMas (6.09) to change current direction has been given.
change direction bit 8 is set
RevDly After a command to change current direction
(43.14) the opposite current direction has to be
reached before ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) plus
RevDly (43.14) has been elapsed otherwise
t
the drive trips with F533 ReversalTime
[FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0]..
ZeroCurTimeOut
(97.19)

RevDly (43.14) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave with one
exception only:
If there is no current measurement in the 12-pulse serial slave [OperModeSel (43.01) =
12PserSlave], set RevDly (43.14) in the 12-pulse serial slave to maximum (600 ms). This
setting causes the 12-pulse serial slave to base its bridge changeover on the zero current
information received via DCSLink [CtrlStatMas (6.09) bit 8]. No additional reversal delay is
added, since the master delays bit 8 according to its own RevDly (43.14).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

43.15 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 169

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
43.16 RevMode (reversal mode)

Soft
Hard
Soft
-
E
RevMode (43.16) defines the behavior of the speed controller and speed reference during bridge
and field reversal (torque reversal):
0 = Soft the speed controller is frozen during reversal bumpless reversal, default
1 = Hard the speed controller is released during reversal the contouring error is balanced
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Speed depending current limit:

I

ArmCurLimSpd1 (43.18)
ArmCurLimSpd2 (43.19)
ArmCurLimSpd3 (43.20)
ArmCurLimSpd4 (43.21)

ArmCurLimSpd5 (43.22)

n
0 MaxCurLimSpeed n
max
(43.17)
n = maximum absolute value ofM1SpeedMin (20.01) and M1SpeedMax (20.02)
max
43.17 MaxCurLimSpeed (speed limit for maximum armature current)

0
10000
1500
rpm
E
Minimum speed level for armature current reduction.
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

43.18 ArmCurLimSpeed1 (armature current at speed limit 1)

0
325
325
%
E
Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at MaxCurLimSpeed (43.17).
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.19 ArmCurLimSpeed2 (armature current at speed limit 2)

0
325
325
%
Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed: E
(43.17) + * [nmax − (43.17)]
1
4
with: nmax = Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 170

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
43.20 ArmCurLimSpeed3 (armature current at speed limit 3)

0
325
325
%
E
Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed:

(43.17) + * [nmax − (43.17)]

1
2
with: nmax = Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.21 ArmCurLimSpeed4 (armature current at speed limit 4)

0
325
325
%
E
Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at speed:

(43.17) + * [nmax − (43.17)]

3
4
with: nmax = Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|]
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.22 ArmCurLimSpeed5 (armature current at speed limit 5)

0
325
325
%
E
Armature current limit - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - at nmax = Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|].
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

43.23 Unused
43.24 PwrSupplyRefExt (external reference power supply)

150
0
-150

%
E
External power supply current reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02).
Note1:
PwrSupplyRefExt (43.24) is only valid, if ControlModeSel (43.05) = PowerSupply2.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 171

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 44

Field excitation

44.01 FldCtrlMode (field control mode)

C
Fix
EMF/Rev/Opti
Fix
-
Motor 1 field control mode selection:
0 = Fix constant field (no field weakening), no EMF control, no field reversal,
default
1 = EMF field weakening active, EMF control active, no field reversal
2 = Fix/Rev constant field (no field weakening), no EMF control, field reversal active
3 = EMF/Rev field weakening active, EMF control active, field reversal active
4 = Fix/Opti constant field (no field weakening), no EMF control, no field reversal,
optitorque active
5 = EMF/Opti field weakening active, EMF control active, no field reversal, optitorque
active
6 = Fix/Rev/Opti constant field (no field weakening), no EMF control, field reversal active,
optitorque active
7 = EMF/Rev/Opti field weakening active, EMF control active, field reversal active,
optitorque active
Note1:
The field control mode for motor 2 depends on the setting of M2RefFieldMode (45.13).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

44.02 M1KpFex (motor 1 p-part field current controller)

0
325

C
0.1
-
Proportional gain of the field current controller.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal field current [M1NomFldCur (99.11)] with M1KpFex
(44.02) = 3, if the field current error is 5% of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

44.03 M1TiFex (motor 1 i-part field current controller)

0
64000
200

C
ms
Integral time of the field current controller. M1TiFex (44.03) defines the time within the integral part
of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal field current [M1NomFldCur (99.11)] with M1KpFex
(44.02) = 3, if the field current error is 5% of M1NomFldCur (99.11). On that condition and with
M1TiFex (44.03) = 200 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal field current, if the current error is
constant, after 200 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral
part).
Setting M1TiFex (44.03) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets
its integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

44.04 M1FldHeatRef (motor 1 field heating reference)

0
100
100
%
E

Field current reference - in percent of M1NomFieldCur (99.11) - for field heating [FldHeatSel
(21.18)] or field reducing.
The field reducing is released for motor 1 by means of M1FldHeatRef (44.04) < 100% and
activated, if:
Run = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] for longer than 10 s and
the other motor is selected via ParChange (10.10 and can be seen in MotSel (8.09))
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.05 Unused
44.06 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 172

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
44.07 EMF CtrlPosLim (positive limit EMF controller)

0
100
10
%
E
Positive limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.08 EMF CtrlNegLim (negative limit EMF controller)

0
-100

-100
%
E
Negative limit for EMF controller in percent of nominal flux.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.09 KpEMF (p-part EMF controller)

0
325
0.5
-
E
Proportional gain of the EMF controller.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF (44.09) = 3, if the EMF error is
5% of M1NomVolt (99.02).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

44.10 TiEMF (i-part EMF controller)

0
64000
50
ms
E
Integral time of the EMF controller. TiEMF (44.10) defines the time within the integral part of the
controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal EMF with KpEMF (44.09) = 3, if the EMF error is
5% of M1NomVolt (99.02). On that condition and with TiEMF (44.10) = 20 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal EMF, if the EMF error is constant, after
20 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral part).
Setting TiEMF (44.10) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the EMF controller and resets its
integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

44.11 Unused
44.12 FldCurFlux40 (field current at 40% flux)

0
100
40
%
E
Field current at 40% flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.13 FldCurFlux70 (field current at 70% flux)

0
100
70
%
E
Field current at 70% flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.14 FldCurFlux90 (field current at 90% flux)

0
100
90
%
E
Field current at 90% flux in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.15 FldWeakDyn (dynamic field weakening)

80
100
100
%
E
If the motor speed passes the field weakening point (== base speed) quickly, voltage overshoot
may occur. To solve this problem the field weakening point can be lowered by means of
FldWeakDyn (44.15). FldWeakDyn (44.15) is set in percent of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
Note1:
The lowered field weakening point is compensated by the EMF controller in case of constant speed
or slow speed change. EMF CtrlPosLim (44.07) has to be set high enough to allow the EMF
controller to compensate.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.16 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 173

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
44.17 FldBoostSel (field boost selector)

ACW Bit15
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
Selector for FldBoostSel (44.17):
0 = NotUsed field boost is blocked, default
1 = Run field boost starts with Run = 1 [MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 3]
2 = DI1 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
3 = DI2 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
4 = DI3 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
5 = DI4 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
6 = DI5 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
7 = DI6 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
8 = DI7 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
9 = DI8 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost
10 = DI9 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension
board
11 = DI10 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension
board
12 = DI11 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost. Only available with digital extension
board
13 = MCW Bit11 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
14 = MCW Bit12 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
15 = MCW Bit13 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
16 = MCW Bit14 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
17 = MCW Bit15 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
18 = ACW Bit12 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
19 = ACW Bit13 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
20 = ACW Bit14 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
21 = ACW Bit15 1 = field boost, 0 = no field boost, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

44.18 FldBoostFact (field boost factor)

100
160
100
%
E
Field boost factor in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11). The resulting field boost current must be
lower than the nominal current of the used field exciter. If the field boost current is out of range
A132 ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.
Note1:
If FldBoostFact (44.18) > 100% and M1UsedFexType (99.12) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or
FEX-4-Term5A S M1FldSacle (45.20) has to be set accordingly.
Example:
M1NomFldCur (99.11) = 20 A and FldBoostFact (44.18) = 150% then S M1FldSacle (45.20) = 30 A
Note2:
If FldBoostFact (44.18) > 100% and M2UsedFexType (49.07) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or
FEX-4-Term5A S M2FldSacle (45.21) has to be set accordingly.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.19 FldBoostTime (field boost time)

0
600
0
s
E

Time the field boost should last.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

44.20 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 174

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
44.21 RevVoltMargin (reversal voltage margin)

0
20
6
%
E
RevVoltMargin (44.21) - in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10) - is a safety margin for the motor
voltage for regenerative mode. Setting RevVoltMargin (44.21) to 0 disables the function.
U di

generating motoring
U motMax : max. motoring
U genMax : max. regenerative
voltage ( = 15°) °
voltage ( = 150°)
°
RevVoltMargin (44.21)
U genMotor : regenerative motor
voltage with safety margin

U genMotor : regenerative motor

voltage with safety margin
RevVoltMargin (44.21)
U genMax : max. regenerative
U motMax : max. motoring voltage
voltage ( = 150°) °)
( = 15°)
°
motoring generating

For regenerative mode is valid:

U genMotor =| U genMax | −U Safety

with U genMax = 1.35 * cos α max *U Mains

U genMax = 1.35 * cos (20.14) *U Mains
and U Safety = (44.21) follows :

U genMotor =| 1.35 * cos (20.14) *U Mains | −(44.21) *U Mains

Example:
With ArmAlphaMax (20.14) = 150°, RevVoltMargin (44.21) = 10% and UMains = NomMainsVolt
(99.10) follows:

U genMotor =| 1.35 * cos 150° *U Mains | −0.1*U Mains

U genMotor =| −1.16 *U Mains | −0.1*U Mains

U genMotor = 1.06 *U Mains

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

44.22 VoltRefExt (external voltage reference)

100
0
-100

External voltage reference in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02).

Note1:
VoltRefExt (44.22) is only valid, if EMF RefSel (44.23) = VoltRefExt.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 175

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
44.23 EMF RefSel (EMF reference selector)

EMF Internal
VoltRefExt

E
AI6
-
EMF RefSel (44.23) selector:
0 = EMF Internal internally calculated EMF, default
1 = VoltRefExt VoltRefExt (44.22) external voltage reference
2 = AI1 analog input AI1
3 = AI2 analog input AI2
4 = AI3 analog input AI3
5 = AI4 analog input AI4
6 = AI5 analog input AI5
7 = AI6 analog input AI6
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

44.24 Unused
44.25 VoltCorr (voltage correction)

100
0
-100

E
Voltage correction in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02). Added to VoltRef1 (3.25).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: Y

44.26 VoltRefSlope (voltage reference slope)

100
30
0.01

%/ms
E
Voltage reference slope in percent M1NomVolt (99.02) per 1 ms. The dv/dt limitation is located at
the input of the EMF controller.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

44.27 FluxCorr (flux correction)

100
0
-100

%
E
FluxCorr (44.27) is added to the sum of the flux reference FluxRefSum (3.28).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N
Group 45

Field converter settings

45.01 M1FreewhlLev (motor 1 freewheeling level)

0
1000
20
%/ms
E
Motor 1 field exciter free wheeling level [only when M1UsedFexType (99.12) = DCF804-0050 or
DCF804-0060] in percent / ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage. If 2 successive AC-voltage
measurements differ more than M1FreewhlLev (45.01), the free-wheeling function is activated.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.02 M1PosLimCtrl (motor 1 positive output limit field current controller)

0
100
100
%
E
Positive output limit for motor 1 field exciter current controller in percent of the maximum field
exciter output voltage.
Note:
4-Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M1PosLimCtrl (45.02) also as
negative limit.
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.03 Unused
45.04 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 176

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
45.05 M1FldRefMode (motor 1 field current reference mode)

M1FldRefExt
Internal

Internal
-
E
M1FldRefMode (45.05) selector:
0 = Internal motor 1 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel (8.09)
or field heating FldHeatSel (21.18), default
1 = M2FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 2
2 = M1FldRefExt M1FldRefExt (45.06) external field current reference

M1FldRefMode 45.05
Internal
Opti
Torque
Field M1FldRefExt 45.06
reversal
M2FldCurRef

M2FldRefMode 45.13
Internal

M2FldRefExt 45.14
M1FldCurRef

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.06 M1FldRefExt (motor 1 external field current reference)

100
0
-100

%
E
Motor 1 external field current reference input in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11).
Note1:
M1FldRefExt (45.06) is only valid, if M1FldRefMode (45.05) = M1FldRefExt.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.07 ForceFldDir (force field current direction)

NotUsed
ExtReverse
NotUsed
-
E
Motor 1 field direction force command:
0 = NotUsed the field direction is controlled by FldCtrlMode (44.01) and TorqRefUsed
(2.13), default
1 = Forward field direction is forced to forward direction
2 = Reverse field direction is forced to reverse direction
3 = ExtReverse In case an external contactor in the field current loop is used to change the
field direction, ForceFldDir (45.07) has to be switched between Forward
and ExtReverse. ExtReverse adapts the armature voltage and speed
supervision. The external contactor interlocking and the control of
ForceFldDir (45.07) has to be done by means of Adaptive Program,
application program or overriding control.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 177

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
45.08 FluxRevMonDly (flux reversal monitoring delay)

0
20000
0
ms
E
Maximum allowed time within Mot1FldCurRel (1.29) and the internal motor flux doesn’t correspond
to each other during field reversal. During this time F522 SpeedFb [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 5] is
disabled.
Note1:
FluxRevMonDly (45.08) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev, EMF/Rev,
Fix/Rev/Opti or EMF/Rev/Opti.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.09 FldRevHyst (field current reversal hysteresis)

0
100
2
%
E
The sign of Mot1FldCurRel (1.29) is used to generate the field reversal acknowledge. To avoid
signal noise problems a small hysteresis - in percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) - is used while
detecting the sign.
Note1:
FldRevHyst (45.09) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev, EMF/Rev, Fix/Rev/Opti or
EMF/Rev/Opti.
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.10 FldRefHyst (field torque reference hysteresis)

0
100
2
%
E
TorqRefUsed (2.13) hysteresis - in percent of the active motor nominal torque - for field reversal
[FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev or EMF/Rev]. The field reversal is controlled by the sign of
TorqRefUsed (2.13).
Note1:
FldRefHyst (45.10) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Rev or EMF/Rev.
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.11 FldRefGain (field current reference gain)

0
100
50
%
E
OptiTorque calculates the field current reference depending on TorqRefUsed (2.13). Thus, the field
current is reduced to a smaller value, if TorqRefUsed (2.13) is accordingly low. This speeds up the
field reversal, assuming TorqRefUsed (2.13) is low during field reversal. OptiTorque is activated by
means of FldCtrlMode (44.01) and like field reversal only available for motor 1 field exciter.
The relation between TorqRefUsed (2.13) and FldCurRefM1 (3.30) is linear and without offset. It is
defined by means of the FldRefGain (45.11). The gain is related to M1NomFldCur (99.11) as well
as to the active motor nominal torque.
Example:
With a setting of 20%, 100% field current is generated at TorqRefUsed (2.13) = 20%.
Note1:
FldRefGain (45.11) is only effective for FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix/Opti, EMF/Opti, Fix/Rev/Opti or
EMF/Rev/Opti.
Int. Scaling: 100 = 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

45.12 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 178

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
45.13 M2FldRefMode (motor 2 field current reference mode)

M2FldRefExt
Internal

Internal
-
E
M2FldRefMode (45.13) selector:
0 = Internal motor 2 field current reference according to shared motion MotSel (8.09)
or field heating FldHeatSel (21.18), default
1 = M1FldCurRef field current reference is taken from motor 1
2 = M2FldRefExt M2FldRefExt (45.14) external field current reference

M1FldRefMode 45.05
Internal
Opti
Torque
Field M1FldRefExt 45.06
reversal
M2FldCurRef

M2FldRefMode 45.13
Internal

M2FldRefExt 45.14
M1FldCurRef

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

45.14 M2FldRefExt (motor 2 external field current reference)

100
0
-100

%
E
Motor 2 external field current reference input in percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05).
Note1:
M2FldRefExt (45.14) is only valid, if M2FldRefMode (45.13) = M2FldRefExt.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.15 M2FreewhlLev (motor 2 freewheeling level)

0
1000
20
%/ms
E
Motor 2 field exciter free wheeling level [only when M2UsedFexType (49.07) = DCF804-0050 or
DCF804-0060] in percent / ms of the actual field exciter supply voltage. If 2 successive AC-voltage
measurements differ more than M2FreewhlLev (45.15), the free-wheeling function is activated.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 %/ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.16 M2PosLimCtrl (motor 2 positive output limit field current controller

0
100
100
%
E

Positive output limit for motor 2 field exciter current controller in percent of the maximum field
exciter output voltage.
Note:
4-Q field exciters which can reverse the field current will used M2PosLimCtrl (45.16) also as
negative limit.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 179

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
45.17 FldCurTrim (field current trimming)

20
0
%
-20

E
The field current of motor 1 and motor 2 can be corrected by means of FldCurTrim (45.17) in
percent of M1NomFldCur (99.11) respectively M2NomFldCur (49.05):
0% to 20%: The value is subtracted from motor 1 field current reference. The result is
visible in FldCurRefM1 (3.30).
-20% to 0%: The absolute value is subtracted from motor 2 field current reference. The
result is visible in FldCurRefM2 (3.31).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

45.18 FldMinTripDly (delay field current minimum trip)

50
10000
2000
ms
E
FldMinTripDly (45.18) delays F541 M1FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 8] respectively F542
M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9]. If the field current recovers before the delay is elapsed
F541 / F542 will be disregarded:
M1FldMinTrip (30.12)
M2FldMinTrip (49.08)
Note1:
FldMinTripDly (45.18) is blocked when OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

45.19 Unused
45.20 S M1FldScale (set: motor 1 field current scaling factor)

0
60
0
A
E
Motor 1 field exciter scaling factor. S M1FldScale (45.20) is write protected, unless ServiceMode
(99.06) = SetTypeCode.
To use S M1FldScale (45.20) following inequation has to be valid:
M1NomFldCur (99.11) S M1FldScale (45.20) maximum field current of the used field
exciter
For S M1FldScale (45.20) > maximum field current of the used field exciter A132
ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.
For M1NomFldCur (99.11) > S M1FldScale (45.20) the scaling is automatically set by
M1NomFldCur (99.11).
The scaling factor is released when M1NomFldCur (99.11) < S M1FldScale (45.20)
and M1UsedFexType (99.12) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or FEX-4-Term5A.
If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

45.21 S M2FldScale (set: motor 2 field current scaling factor) 0

60
0
A
E
Motor 2 field exciter scaling factor. S M2FldScale (45.21) is write protected, unless ServiceMode
(99.06) = SetTypeCode.
To use S M2FldScale (45.21) following inequation has to be valid:
M2NomFldCur (49.05) S M2FldScale (45.21) maximum field current of the used field
exciter
For S M2FldScale (45.21) > maximum field current of the used field exciter A132
ParConflict [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 15] is generated.
For M2NomFldCur (49.05) > S M2FldScale (45.21) the scaling is automatically set by
M2NomFldCur (49.05).
The scaling factor is released when M2NomFldCur (49.05) < S M2FldScale (45.21)
and M2UsedFexType (49.07) = OnBoard to DCF804-0060 or FEX-4-Term5A.
If the scaling is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

45.22 M1OperModeFex4 (motor 1 fex4 operation mode selector)

1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
-
E

The DCF803-0035 can be connected to either a 3-phase supply or a single phase supply:
0 = 1-phase single phase supply
1 = 3-phase 3-phase supply, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 180

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
45.23 M2OperModeFex4 (motor 2 fex4 operation mode selector)

1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
-
E
The DCF803-0035 can be connected to either a 3-phase supply or a single phase supply:
0 = 1-phase single phase supply
1 = 3-phase 3-phase supply, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 47

12-pulse operation

47.01 12P Mode (12-pulse mode)

DiodeBridge
Normal

Normal
-
E
The setting of OperModeSel (43.01) determines the reaction of 12P Mode (47.01). OperModeSel
(43.01) = 12PParMaster respectively 12PParSlave:
0 = Normal 12-pulse parallel master and 12-pulse parallel slave use their own current
controller independently, default
1 = Difference the 12-pulse parallel slave calculates the difference between the 12-pulse
parallel master actual current and its own actual current and controls this
difference to zero by means of its current controller
2 = Sequential not used for 12-pulse parallel mode
3 = DiodeBridge not used for 12-pulse parallel mode
OperModeSel (43.01) = 12PSerMaster respectively 12PSerSlave:
0 = Normal 12-pulse serial master and 12-pulse serial slave are controlled by the same
firing angle, default
1 = Difference not used for 12-pulse serial mode
2 = Sequential Sequential control of the firing angles. Only one unit changes its firing
angle, while the other unit’s firing angle is fixed at the minimum- or
maximum firing angle. See diagram below.
3 = DiodeBridge the 12-pulse serial slave converter is a diode bridge

ArmAlphaMin (20.15)

Firing
angle of
slave Firing
angle of
master

ArmAlphaMax (20.14)
output voltage of system
-
UDC-master + UDC -slave
minimum 0 maximum
DC-voltage DC-voltage

12P Mode (47.01) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave. In case of
DiodeBridge the setting is only possible in the 12-pulse master.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 181

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
47.02 DiffCurLim (current difference level)

1
50
10
%
E
Permitted current difference between the converters in 12-pulse parallel configuration in percent of
M1NomCur (99.03).
The drive trips with F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 1] if DiffCurLim (47.02) is still
exceeded when DiffCurDly (47.03) is elapsed.
DiffCurLim (47.02) is only active in the 12-pulse parallel master.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

47.03 DiffCurDly (current difference delay)

10
64000
500
ms
E
DiffCurDly (47.03) delays F534 12PCurDiff [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 1]. If the current difference
becomes smaller than DiffCurLim (47.02) before the delay is elapsed F534 will be disregarded:
DiffCurLim (47.02)
DiffCurDly (47.03) is only active in the 12-pulse parallel master.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

47.04 Unused
47.05 12P RevTimeOut (12-pulse reversal timeout)

0
1000
100
-
E
Additionally in 12-pulse mode the current direction of both - master and slave - bridges is
monitored. The drive trips with F533 ReversalTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0] if the 2 converters
have different bridges fired for more than 12P RevTimeOut (47.05).
12P RevTimeOut (47.05) is only active in the 12-pulse master.

less than less than

12P RevTimeOut (47.05) 12P RevTimeOut (47.05)

current direction
12 -pulse master

current direction
12 -pulse slave

Note1:
12P RevTimeOut (47.05) must be longer than ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N
Group 49

Shared motion

49.01 M2NomVolt (motor 2 nominal voltage)

5
2000
350
V
E

Motor 2 nominal armature voltage (DC) from the motor rating plate.
Note1:
In 12-pulse serial mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself
is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor voltage, if one motor is connected. In case 2
motors in series are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated voltage.
Note2:
The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 182

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.02 M2NomCur (motor 2 nominal current)

0
30000
0
A
E
Motor 2 nominal armature current (DC) from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected
to the drive, enter the total current of all motors.
Note1:
In 12-pulse parallel mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter
itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor current, if one motor is connected. In
case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated current.
Note2:
In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M2NomCur (49.02) to set the nominal
field current.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

49.03 M2BaseSpeed (motor 2 base speed)

10
6500
1500
rpm
E
Motor 2 base speed from the rating plate, usually the field weak point. M2BaseSpeed (49.03) is
must be set in the range of:
0.2 to 1.6 times of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

49.04 Unused
49.05 M2NomFldCur (motor 2 nominal field current)

655
0.3

0.3
A
E
Motor 2 nominal field current from the motor rating plate.
Note1:
In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M2NomCur (49.05) to set the nominal
field current.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

49.06 M2FldHeatRef (motor 2 field heating reference)

0
100
100
%
E
Field current reference - in percent of M2NomFieldCur (49.05) - for field heating [FldHeatSel
(21.18)] or field reducing.
The field reducing is released for motor 2 by means of M2FldHeatRef (49.06) < 100% and
activated, if:
Run = 1 [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3] for longer than 10 s and
the other motor is selected via ParChange (10.10 and can be seen in MotSel (8.09))
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.07 M2UsedFexType (motor 2 used field exciter type) NotUsed

reserved
NotUsed
-
E
Select motor 2 used field exciter type:
0 = NotUsed no or foreign field exciter connected
1 = OnBoard integrated 1-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default
2 = FEX-425-Int internal 1-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only)
3 = DCF803-0035 external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 5 A to 35 A
(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)
4 = DCF803-0050 external 1-Q 50 A field exciter
5 = DCF804-0050 external 4-Q 50 A field exciter
6 = DCF803-0060 external 1-Q 60 A field exciter
7 = DCF804-0060 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter
8 = DCS800-S01 external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter
9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter
10 = reserved
to
19 = reserved
20 = FEX-4-Term5A external 1-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A
(terminals X100.2 and X100.3)
21 = reserved
If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 183

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.08 M2FldMinTrip (motor 2 minimum field trip)

0
100
50
%
E
The drive trips with F542 M2FexLowCur [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 9] if M2FldMinTrip (49.08) - in
percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05) - is still undershot when FldMinTripDly (45.18) is elapsed.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.09 M2FldOvrCurLev (motor 2 field overcurrent level)

0
135
125
%
E
The drive trips with F518 M2FexOverCur [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 1] if M2FldOvrCurLev (49.09) - in
percent of M2NomFldCur (49.05) - is exceeded.
The field overcurrent fault is inactive, if M2FldOvrCurLev (49.09) is set to 135%.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.10 M2KpFex (motor 2 p-part field current controller)

0
325
0.1
-
E
Proportional gain of the field current controller.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal field current [M2NomFldCur (49.05)] with M2KpFex
(49.10) = 3, if the field current error is 5% of M2NomFldCur (49.05).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

49.11 M2TiFex (motor 2 i-part field current controller)

0
64000
200
ms
E
Integral time of the field current controller. M2TiFex (49.11) defines the time within the integral part
of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal field current [M2NomFldCur (49.05] with M2KpFex
(49.10) = 3, if the field current error is 5% of M2NomFldCur (49.05). On that condition and with
M2TiFex (49.11) = 200 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal field current, if the current error is
constant, after 200 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral
part).
Setting M2TiFex (49.11) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the field current controller and resets
its integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

49.12 M2CurLimBrdg1 (motor 2 current limit of bridge 1)

0
325
100
%
E
Current limit bridge 1 in percent of M2NomCur (49.02).
Setting M2CurLimBrdg1 (49.12) to 0% disables bridge 1.
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

49.13 M2CurLimBrdg2 (motor 2 current limit of bridge 2)

0
-325

-100
%
E
Current limit bridge 2 in percent of M2NomCur (49.02).
Setting M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13) to 0% disables bridge 2.
Note1:
The used current limit depends also on the converter's actual limitation situation (e.g. torque limits,
other current limits, field weakening). The limit with the smallest value is valid.
Note2:
M2CurLimBrdg2 (49.13) is internally set to 0% if QuadrantType (4.15) = 2-Q (2-Q drive).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: SI Volatile: N

49.14 M2KpArmCur (motor 2 p-part armature current controller)

0
100
0.1
-
E

Proportional gain of the current controller.

Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal current [M2NomCur (49.02)] with M2KpArmCur
(49.14) = 3, if the current error is 5% of M2NomCur (49.02).
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 184

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.15 M2TiArmCur (motor 2 i-part armature current controller)

0
10000
50
ms
E
Integral time of the current controller. M2TiArmCur (49.15) defines the time within the integral part
of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part.
Example:
The controller generates 15% of motor nominal current [M2NomCur (49.02)] with M2KpArmCur
(49.14) = 3, if the current error is 5% of M2NomCur (49.02). On that condition and with
M2TiArmCur (49.15) = 50 ms follows:
the controller generates 30% of motor nominal current, if the current error is constant,
after 50 ms are elapsed (15% from proportional part and 15% from integral part).
Setting M2TiArmCur (49.15) to 0 ms disables the integral part of the current controller and resets
its integrator.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

49.16 M2DiscontCurLim (motor 2 discontinuous current limit)

0
325
100
%
E
Threshold continuous / discontinuous current in percent of M2NomCur (49.02). The actual
continuous / discontinuous current state can be read from CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) bit 12.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.17 M2ArmL (motor 2 armature inductance)

0
640
0
mH
E
Inductance of the armature circuit in mH. Used for the EMF compensation:
dIA
EMF = U A − RA * I A − LA *
dt
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 mH Type: I Volatile: N

49.18 M2ArmR (motor 2 armature resistance)

0
65500
0

E
m
Resistance of the armature circuit in m . Used for the EMF compensation:
dIA
EMF = U A − RA * I A − LA *
dt
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 m Type: I Volatile: N

49.19 M2SpeedMin (motor 2 minimum speed)

10000
-10000

-1500
rpm
E
Motor 2 negative speed reference limit in rpm for:
SpeedRef2 (2.01)
SpeedRefUsed (2.17)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
M2SpeedMin (49.19) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Note2:
M2SpeedMin (49.19) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by
means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to
switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 185

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.20 M2SpeedMax (motor 2 maximum speed)

10000
1500
-10000

rpm
E
Motor 2 positive speed reference limit in rpm for:
SpeedRef2 (2.01)
SpeedRefUsed (2.17)
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Note1:
M2SpeedMax (49.20) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Note2:
M2SpeedMax (49.20) is also applied to SpeedRef4 (2.18) to avoid exceeding the speed limits by
means of SpeedCorr (23.04). To be able to overspeed the drive (e.g. for winder) it is possible to
switch off the speed limit for SpeedRef4 (2.18) by means of AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 4.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: SI Volatile: N

49.21 M2OvrSpeed (motor 2 overspeed)

0
10000
1800
rpm
E
The drive trips with F532 MotOverSpeed [FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 15] if M2OvrSpeed (49.21) is
exceeded.
32767
Internally limited from: 0rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000
Note1:
The value of M2OvrSpeed (49.21) is as well used for the analog tacho tuning. Any change of its
value has the consequence that A115 TachoRange [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 15] comes up for 10
seconds and M2TachoAdjust (49.26) respectively M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) have to be adjusted
anew. The adjustment can be done by means of ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

49.22 M2SpeedScale (motor 2 speed scaling)

0
6500
0
rpm
E
Motor 2 speed scaling in rpm. M2SpeedScale (49.22) defines the speed - in rpm - that corresponds
to 20.000 speed units. The speed scaling is released when M2SpeedScale (49.22) 10:
20.000 speed units == M2SpeedScale (49.22), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) 10
20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M2SpeedMin (49.19) and
M2SpeedMax (49.20), in case M2SpeedScale (49.22) < 10
or mathematically
If (49.22) 10 then 20.000 == (49.22) in rpm
If (49.22) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(49.19)|, |(49.20)|] in rpm
The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act (2.29).
Note1:
M2SpeedScale (49.22) has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding
control (e.g. serial communication).
Note2:
M2SpeedScale (49.22) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M2BaseSpeed (49.03).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Commissioning hint:
set M2SpeedScale (49.22) to maximum speed
set M2BaseSpeed (49.03) to base speed
set M2SpeedMax (49.20) / M2SpeedMin (49.19) to maximum speed
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 186

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.23 M2EncMeasMode (motor 2 encoder measuring mode)

A+/B Dir

E
A+-/B+-
A+-/B+-
-
M2EncMeasMode (49.23) selects the measurement mode for the pulse encoder:
0 = A+/B Dir channel A: rising edges for speed; channel B: direction
1 = A+- channel A: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: not used
2 = A+-/B Dir channel A: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: direction
3 = A+-/B+- channel A & B: rising and falling edges for speed and direction, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.24 M2SpeedFbSel (motor 2speed feedback selector)

EMF
External
EMF
-
E
Motor 2 speed feedback selection:
0 = EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF, default
1 = Encoder speed is measured by means of a pulse encoder
2 = Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho
3 = External MotSpeed (1.04) is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.25 M2EncPulseNo (motor 2 encoder pulse number)

20
10000
1024
ppr
E
Number of pulse encoder pulses per revolution.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ppr Type: I Volatile: N

49.26 M2TachoAdjust (motor 2 tacho adjust)

10000
0
-10000

rpm
E
Fine tuning of analog tacho. The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held
tacho:
M2TachoAdjust (49.26) = speed actualHandHeldTacho
32767
Internally limited to: ± (2.29) * rpm
20000
Note1:
Changes of M2TachoAdjust (49.26) are only valid during tacho fine tuning [ServiceMode (99.06) =
TachFineTune]. During tacho fine tuning M2SpeedFbSel (49.24) is automatically forced to EMF.
Attention:
The value of M2TachoAdjust (49.26) has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and
not the delta between speed reference and measured speed.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: Y

49.27 M2TachoVolt1000 (motor 2 tacho voltage at 1000rpm)

270
0
-1

V
E
M2TachoVolt1000 (49.27) is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed
of 1000 rpm:
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) 1 V, the setting is used to calculate tacho gain
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = 0 V, the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed
feedback assistant
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = -1 V, the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of
the speed feedback assistant
Note1:
Use ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

49.28 M2BrakeCtrl (motor 2 brake control)

NotUsed
On
NotUsed
-
E

Releases the control of the brake:

0 = NotUsed brake control blocked, default
1 = On brake control is released
The brake open (lift) command is readable in AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 8 and can be connected to
the digital output controlling the brake.
The brake control can be overwritten by AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03) bit 12. The brake is always applied in
case ForceBrake = 1. Otherwise the brake is controlled by the internal brake logic.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 187

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.29 M2BrakeAckSel (motor 2 brake acknowledge selector)

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
The drive sets either A122 MechBrake [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 5] or trips with F552 MechBrake
[FaultWord4 (9.04) bit 3] depending on BrakeFaultFunc (42.06 ) if a digital input is selected and the
brake acknowledge fails:
0 = NotUsed brake acknowledge is blocked, default
1 = DI1 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
2 = DI2 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
3 = DI3 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
4 = DI4 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
5 = DI5 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
6 = DI6 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
7 = DI7 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
8 = DI8 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted)
9 = DI9 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
10 = DI10 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
11 = DI11 0 = brake is applied, 1 = brake is open (lifted). Only available with digital
extension board
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.30 M2BrakeOpenDly (motor 2 brake open delay)

0
5
0
s
E
Brake open (lift) delay. This function compensates for the mechanical open (lift) delay of the brake.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.31 M2BrakeCloseDly (motor 2 brake close delay)

0
5
0
s
E
Brake close (apply) delay. This function compensates for the time the drive needs to decelerated
from ZeroSpeedLim (20.03) to actual speed = 0.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.32 M2ModelTime (motor 2 model time constant)

0
6400
240
s
E
Thermal time constant for motor 1. The time within the temperature rises to 63% of its nominal
value.
The motor thermal model is blocked, if M2ModelTime (49.32) is set to zero.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

49.33 M2AlarmLimLoad (motor 2 alarm limit load)

10
325
102
%
E
The drive sets A110 M2OverLoad [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 9] if M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33) - in
percent of M2NomCur (49.02) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is
Mot2TempCalc (1.21).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

49.34 M2FaultLimLoad (motor 2 fault limit load)

10
325
106
%
E
The drive trips with F510 M2OverLoad [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 9] if M2FaultLimLoad (49.34) - in
percent of M2NomCur (49.02) - is exceeded. Output value for motor 1 thermal model is
Mot2TempCalc (1.21).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 188

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.35 M2TempSel (motor 2 temperature selector)

NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
1PTC AI2/Con
M2TempSel (49.33) selects motor 2 measured temperature input.
Connection possibilities for PT100:
max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 or
up to 6 PT100 for motor 2 only.
Connection possibilities PTC:
max. 1 PTC for motor 2 and max. 1 PTC for motor 1 or
up to 2 PTC for motor 2 only:
0 = NotUsed motor 2 temperature measurement is blocked, default
1 = 1PT100 AI3 one PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
2 = 2PT100 AI3 two PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
3 = 3PT100 AI3 three PT100 connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
4 = 4PT100 AI3/2 four PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
5 = 5PT100 AI3/2 five PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 2 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
6 = 6PT100 AI3/2 six PT100, 3 connected to AI3 and 3 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
7 = 1PT100 AI8 one PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
8 = 2PT100 AI8 two PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
9 = 3PT100 AI8 three PT100 connected to AI8 on RAIO2
10 = 4PT100 AI8/7 four PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 1 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
11 = 5PT100 AI8/7 five PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 2 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
12 = 6PT100 AI8/7 six PT100, 3 connected to AI8 and 3 connected to AI7 on RAIO2
13 = 1PTC AI3 one PTC connected to AI3 on SDCS-IOB-3
14 = 2PTC AI3/2 two PTC, 1 connected to AI3 and 1 connected to AI2 on SDCS-IOB-3
15 = 1PTC AI2/Con one PTC connected to AI2 on SDCS-CON-4
Note1:
AI7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO ExtModule (98.06).
Note2:
In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI of the SDCS-IOB-3 the input range must be
configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and constant current source
see Hardware manual.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

49.36 M2AlarmLimTemp (motor 2 alarm limit temperature)

4000
0
-10

°C
E
The drive sets A108 M2OverTemp [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 8] if M2AlarmLimTemp (49.36) is
exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas (1.23).
Note1:
The units depends on M2TempSel (49.35).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: SI Volatile: N

49.37 M2FaultLimTemp (motor 2 fault limit temperature)

4000
0
-10

°C
The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 8] if M2FaultLimTemp (49.37) is E
exceeded. Output value for motor 1 measured temperature is Mot2TempMeas (1.23).
Note1:
The units depends on M2TempSel (49.35).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C / 1 /1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 189

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
49.38 M2KlixonSel (motor 2 klixon selector)

NotUsed
DI11
NotUsed
-
E
The drive trips with F509 M2OverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 8] if a digital input selected and the
klixon is open:
0 = NotUsed no reaction, default
1 = DI1 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
2 = DI2 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
3 = DI3 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
4 = DI4 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
5 = DI5 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
6 = DI6 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
7 = DI7 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
8 = DI8 0 = fault, 1 = no fault
9 = DI9 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 0 = fault, 1 = no fault. Only available with digital extension board
Note1:
It is possible to connect several klixons in series.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 50

Speed measurement

50.01 M1SpeedScale (motor 1 speed scaling)

0
6500
0

C
rpm
Motor 1 speed scaling in rpm. M1SpeedScale (50.01) defines the speed - in rpm - that corresponds
to 20.000 speed units. The speed scaling is released when M1SpeedScale (50.01) 10:
20.000 speed units == M1SpeedScale (50.01), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) 10
20.000 speed units == maximum absolute value of M1SpeedMin (20.01) and
M1SpeedMax (20.02), in case M1SpeedScale (50.01) < 10
or mathematically
If (50.01) 10 then 20.000 == (50.01) in rpm
If (50.01) < 10 then 20.000 == Max [|(20.01)|, |(20.02)|] in rpm
The actual used speed scaling is visible in SpeedScale Act (2.29).
Note1:
M1SpeedScale (50.01) has to be set in case the speed is read or written by means of an overriding
control (e.g. serial communication).
Note2:
M1SpeedScale (50.01) is must be set in the range of:
0.625 to 5 times of M1BaseSpeed (99.04).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Commissioning hint:
set M1SpeedScale (50.01) to maximum speed
set M1BaseSpeed (99.04) to base speed
set M1SpeedMax (20.02) / M1SpeedMin (20.01) to maximum speed
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

50.02 M1EncMeasMode (motor 1 encoder measuring mode)

A+/B Dir
A+-/B+-
A+-/B+-
-
E

M1EncMeasMode (50.02) selects the measurement mode for the pulse encoder:
0 = A+/B Dir channel A: rising edges for speed; channel B: direction
1 = A+- channel A: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: not used
2 = A+-/B Dir channel A: rising and falling edges for speed; channel B: direction
3 = A+-/B+- channel A & B: rising and falling edges for speed and direction, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 190

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
50.03 M1SpeedFbSel (motor 1speed feedback selector)

C
EMF
External
EMF
-
Motor 1 speed feedback selection:
0 = EMF speed is calculated by means of the EMF, default
1 = Encoder speed is measured by means of a pulse encoder
2 = Tacho speed is measured by means of an analog tacho
3 = External MotSpeed (1.04) is updated by Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

50.04 M1EncPulseNo (motor 1 encoder pulse number)

20
10000
1024

C
ppr
Number of pulse encoder pulses per revolution.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ppr Type: I Volatile: N

50.05 Unused
50.06 SpeedFiltTime (actual speed filter time)

0
10000
5
ms
E
Speed actual filter time for MotSpeed (1.04).

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

50.07 PosCountMode (position counter mode)

PulseEdges
Scaled
Scaled
-
E
The position counter is based on the pulse count of the pulse encoder, with all pulse edges are
counted. The 32-bit position value is divided in 2 16-bit words:
0 = PulseEdges for low word PosCountLow (3.07) respectively PosCountInitLo (50.08) is
valid 1 == 1 pulse edge
for high word PosCountHigh (3.08) respectively PosCountInitHi (50.09) is
valid 1 == 65536 pulse edges
1 = Scaled for low word PosCountLow (3.07) respectively PosCountInitLo (50.08) is
valid 0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°
for high word PosCountHigh (3.08) respectively PosCountInitHi (50.09) is
valid 1 == 1 revolution, default
The position counter is controlled by SyncCommand (10.04) and AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bits 9 to 11.
The status can be seen from AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 5 SyncRdy.
The position control function has to be implemented by Adaptive Program, application program or
overriding control.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

50.08 PosCountInitLo (Position counter low initial value)

0
65536
0
-
E
Position counter initial low word. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):
PulseEdges 1 == 1 pulse edge
Scaled 0 == 0° and 65536 == 360°
See also SyncCommand (10.04).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

50.09 PosCountInitHi (Position counter high initial value)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Position counter initial high word. Unit depends on setting of PosCountMode (50.07):
PulseEdges 1 == 65536 pulse edges
Scaled 1 == 1 revolution
See also SyncCommand (10.04).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

50.10 SpeedLev (speed level)

0
10000
1500
rpm
E

When MotSpeed (1.04) reaches SpeedLev (50.10) the bit AboveLimit [MainStatWord (8.01) bit
10] is set.
32767 32767
Internally limited from: − (2.29) * rpm to (2.29) * rpm
20000 20000
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 191

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
50.11 DynBrakeDyl (delay dynamic braking)

3000
0
-1

s
E
In case of dynamic braking with EMF feedback [M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = EMF] or a speed
feedback fault there is no valid information about the motor speed and thus no zero speed
information. To prevent an interlocking of the drive after dynamic braking the speed is assumed
zero after DynBrakeDyl (50.11) is elapsed:
-1 s = the motor voltage is measured directly at the motor terminals and is thus
valid during dynamic braking
0s= no zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated
1 s to 3000 s = zero speed signal for dynamic braking is generated after the programmed
time is elapsed
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

50.12 M1TachoAdjust (motor 1 tacho adjust)

10000
0
-10000

C
rpm
Fine tuning of analog tacho. The value equals the actual speed measured by means of a hand held
tacho:
M1TachoAdjust (50.12) = speed actualHandHeldTacho
32767
Internally limited to: ± (2.29) * rpm
20000
Note1:
Changes of M1TachoAdjust (50.12) are only valid during tacho fine tuning [ServiceMode (99.06) =
TachFineTune]. During tacho fine tuning M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) is automatically forced to EMF.
Attention:
The value of M1TachoAdjust (50.12) has to be the speed measured by the hand held tacho and
not the delta between speed reference and measured speed.
Int. Scaling: (2.29) Type: I Volatile: Y

50.13 M1TachoVolt1000 (motor 1 tacho voltage at 1000 rpm)

0
270
60

C
V
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) is used to adjust the voltage the analog tacho is generating at a speed
of 1000 rpm:
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) 1 V, the setting is used to calculate tacho gain
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = 0 V, the tacho gain is measured by means of the speed
feedback assistant
M1TachoVolt1000 (50.13) = -1 V, the tacho gain was successfully measured by means of
the speed feedback assistant
Note1:
Use ServiceMode (99.06) = TachFineTune or assistant (control panel or DriveWindow Light).
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

50.14 Unused
50.15 PosSyncMode (position counter synchronization mode)
Single

Single
Cyclic

-
E
Position counter synchronization mode:
0 = Single the next synchronization must be prepared by resetting SyncRdy [AuxStatWord
(8.02) bit 5] with ResetSyncRdy [AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 11], default
1 = Cyclic the synchronization happens on every occurrence of the synchronization event
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

50.16 Unused
50.17 WinderScale (winder scaling)
100
1
-100

-
E

Speed actual scaling. Before speed error ( n) generation.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 192

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 51

Fieldbus

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for fieldbus adapters (Fxxx, Rxxx
and Nxxx). The parameter names and the number of the used parameters depend on the selected
fieldbus adapter (see fieldbus adapter manual).
Note1:
If a fieldbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon the next power up of the
fieldbus adapter.
51.01 Fieldbus1 (fieldbus parameter 1)

C
-
-
-
-
Fieldbus parameter 1

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

C
… …
51.15 Fieldbus15 (fieldbus parameter 15)

0
32767
0

C
-
Fieldbus parameter 15

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

51.16 Fieldbus16 (fieldbus parameter 16)

0
32767
0

C
-
Fieldbus parameter 16

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

C
… …
51.31 Fieldbus31 (fieldbus parameter 31)

0
32767
0

C
-
Fieldbus parameter 31

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Group 52

Modbus

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the Modbus adapter RMBA-xx
(see also Modbus adapter manual).
Note1:
If a Modbus parameter is changed its new value takes effect only upon the next power up of the
Modbus adapter.
52.01 StationNumber (station number)
1
247
1
-
E

Defines the address of the station. Two stations with the same station number are not allowed
online.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 193

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
52.02 BaudRate (baud rate)

600
19200
9600
-
E
Defines the transfer rate of the Modbus link:
0 = reserved
1 = 600 600 Baud
2 = 1200 1200 Baud
3 = 2400 2400 Baud
4 = 4800 4800 Baud
5 = 9600 9600 Baud, default
6 = 19200 19200 Baud
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

52.03 Parity (parity)

reserved
Even
Even
-
E
Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting must be used in all online stations:
0 = reserved
1 = None1Stopbit no parity bit, one stop bit
2 = None2Stopbits no parity bit, two stop bits
3 = Odd odd parity indication bit, one stop bit
4 = Even even parity indication bit, one stop bit, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N
Group 70

DDCS control

70.01 Ch0 NodeAddr (channel 0 node address)

0
254
1
-
E
Channel 0 is used for communication with the overriding control. Node address channel 0:
if APC2 or NCSA-01 (AC31) is used Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01) = 1
if AC70 or AC80 is used via the optical module bus (adapters TB810 or TB811) Ch0
NodeAddr (70.01) is calculated from the POSTION terminal of the DRIENG data base
element as follows:
1. multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16
2. add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result
Example:
POSITION | Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01)
101 | 16*1+01 = 17
712 | 16*7+12 = 124
if AC 800M is used via the optical module bus Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01) is calculated from
the position of the DCS600 ENG hardware module as follows:
1. multiply the hundreds of the value POSITION by 16
2. add the tens and ones of the value POSITION to the result
Example:
POSITION | Ch0 NodeAddr (70.01)
112 | 16*1+12 = 28
503 | 16*5+03 = 83
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.02 Ch0 LinkControl (channel 0 link control) l

1
15
10
-
E

DDCS channel 0 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in special
cases to optimize the communication performance of the link.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 194

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
70.03 Ch0 BaudRate (channel 0 baud rate)

E
8 Mbits/s
1 Mbits/s
4 Mbits/s
-
Channel 0 communication speed. Ch0 BaudRate (70.03) must be set to 4 Mbits/s when Advant
controller communication modules (e.g. FCI or FBA) are used. Otherwise the overriding control
automatically sets the communication speed.
0 = 8 Mbits/s
1 = 4 Mbits/s, default
2 = 2 Mbits/s
3 = 1 Mbits/s
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.04 Ch0 TimeOut (channel 0 timeout)

0
64000
100
ms
E
Time delay before a communication break with channel 0 is declared. Depending on the setting of
Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) either F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] or A113 COM8Com
[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if Ch0 TimeOut (70.04) is set to 0 ms.
Note1:
The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message.
Note2:
The time out starts when the link doesn’t update any of the first 2 receive datasets addressed by
Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
Example:
When Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) = 10 the reception of datasets 10 and 12 is supervised.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

70.05 Ch0 ComLossCtrl (channel 0 communication loss control)

RampStop
FixedSpeed1
RampStop
-
E
Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 0.
F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] is set with:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
A113 COM8Com [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set with:
4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning
5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
Note1:
The time out for Ch0 ComLossCtrl (70.05) is set by:
Ch0 TimeOut (70.04)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.06 CH0 HW Config (channel 0 hardware configuration)

Ring
Star
Star
-
E
CH0 HW Config (70.06) is used to enable / disable the regeneration of the Channel 0
optotransmitters in DDCS mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = No]. Regeneration means that the drive
echoes all messages back. DDCS mode is typically used with APC2, AC70, AC80 and module bus
of AC 800M.
0 = Ring Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology. Typically when
Channel 0 of all SDCS-COM-8 has been connected to a ring.
1 = Star Regeneration is disabled. Used with star-type topology. Typically with
configurations using the NDBU-x5 branching units, default
Note1:
This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = Yes].
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.07 Ch1 LinkControl (channel 1 link control) l

1
15
10
-
E

Channel 1 is used for communication with the AMIA-xx adapter. DDCS channel 1 intensity control
for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the
communication performance of the link.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 195

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
70.08 Ch2 NodeAddr (channel 2 node address)

1
125
1
-
E
Channel 2 is used for point to point communication connections between drives (e.g. master-
follower communication). Node address channel 2:
0= master drive, this value is set internally if Ch2 MaFoMode (70.09) = Master
1, …, 125 = Node addresses of slave drives
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.09 Ch2 MaFoMode (channel 2 master-follower mode)

Follower
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
Channel 2 can be used to send reference values (e.g. torque reference) from the master to one or
several followers. Master-follower is an application in which machinery is run by several drives with
all motor shafts coupled to each other by gears, chains, belts etc.
0 = reserved
1 = NotUsed channel 2 is not used for master-follower communication, default
2 = Master the drive is the master of the master-follower link and broadcasts via channel 2
the contents of dataset 41 [defined by Ch2 MasSig1 (70.10) to Ch2 MasSig3
(70.12)]
3 = Follower the drive is a follower of the master-follower link and receives via channel 2 the
contents of dataset 41 [defined by Ch2 FolSig1 (70.18) to Ch2 FolSig3 (70.20)]
Note1:
The followers node address is defined by Ch2 NodeAddr (70.08).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.10 Ch2 MasSig1 (channel 2 master signal 1)

0
9999
701
-
E
Master signal 1 broadcasts via channel 2 as 1st value of dataset 41 to all followers. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.11 Ch2 MasSig2 (channel 2 master signal 2)

0
9999
2301
-
E
Master signal 2 broadcasts via channel 2 as 2nd value of dataset 41 to all followers. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.12 Ch2 MasSig3 (channel 2 master signal 3)

0
9999
210
-
E
rd
Master signal 3 broadcasts via channel 2 as 3 value of dataset 41 to all followers. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 210 equals TorqRef3 (2.10).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.13 Ch2 LinkControl (channel 2 link control)

1
15
10
-
E
DDCS channel 2 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This parameter can be used in special
cases to optimize the communication performance of the link.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.14 Ch2 TimeOut (channel 2 timeout)

0
64000
100
ms
E

Time delay before a communication break with channel 2 is declared. Depending on the setting of
Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) either F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] or A113 COM8Com
[AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if Ch2 TimeOut (70.14) is set to 0 ms.
Note1:
The supervision is activated after the reception of the first valid message.
Note2:
The time out starts when the link doesn’t update the master-follower dataset.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 196

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
70.15 Ch2 ComLossCtrl (channel 2 communication loss control)

RampStop
FixedSpeed1
RampStop
-
E
Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) determines the reaction to a communication loss of channel 2.
F543 COM8Com [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 10] is set with:
0 = RampStop stop according to E StopRamp (22.11), default
1 = TorqueLimit stop by active torque limit
2 = CoastStop torque is zero
3 = DynBraking dynamic braking
A113 COM8Com [AlarmWord1 (9.06) bit 12] is set with:
4 = LastSpeed the drive continues to run at the last speed before the warning
5 = FixedSpeed1 the drive continuous to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02)
Note1:
The time out for Ch2 ComLossCtrl (70.15) is set by:
Ch2 TimeOut (70.14)
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.16 Unused
70.17 Unused
70.18 Ch2 FolSig1 (channel 2 follower signal 1)

0
9999
701
-
E
Follower signal 1 receives via channel 2 the 1st value of dataset 41 from the master. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.19 Ch2 FolSig2 (channel 2 follower signal 2)

0
9999
2301
-
E
Follower signal 2 receives via channel 2 the 2nd value of dataset 41 from the master. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.20 Ch2 FolSig3 (channel 2 follower signal 3)

0
9999
2501
-
E
Follower signal 3 receives via channel 2 the 3rd value of dataset 41 from the master. The format is
xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA (25.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.21 Ch3 HW Config (channel 3 hardware configuration) Ring

Star
Star
-
E
CH0 HW Config (70.06) is used to enable / disable the regeneration of the Channel 3
optotransmitters. Regeneration means that the drive echoes all messages back.
0 = Ring Regeneration is enabled. Used with ring-type bus topology.
1 = Star Regeneration is disabled. Used with star-type topology. Typically with
configurations using the NDBU-x5 branching units, default
Note1:
This parameter has no effect in DriveBus mode [Ch0 DriveBus (71.01) = Yes].
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

70.22 Ch3 NodeAddr (channel 3 node address)

1
254
1
-
E

Channel 3 is used for communication with start-up and maintenance tools (e.g. DriveWindow). If
several drives are connected together via channel 3, each of them must be set to a unique node
address. Node address channel 3:
0, …, 75 valid node address for SDCS-COM-8
76, …, 124 reserved node address for NDBU-x5 branching units
125, …, 254 valid node address for SDCS-COM-8
Attention:
A new node address becomes only valid after the next SDCS-COM-8 power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 197

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
70.23 Ch3 LinkControl (channel 3 link control)

1
15
15
-
E
DDCS channel 3 intensity control for transmission LEDs. This value is adjusted by the link
including each device on the link. This parameter can be used in special cases to optimize the
communication performance of the link.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

70.24 Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (channel 0 dataset base address)

1
16
10
-
E
st
Dataset number of the 1 dataset used for the communication with the overriding control system
(e.g. field bus adapters, Advant controllers). The dataset addressed by Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24)
is the 1st dataset send from the overriding control to the drive, while the next dataset is the 1st one
send from the drive to the overriding control and so on. Up to 8 datasets for each direction are
supported (addressing of the data sets see groups 90 to 93).
Examples:
Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) = 1 dataset range 1, …, 16
Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) = 10 dataset range 10, …, 25
Note1:
The datasets for the APC-mailbox function (32 and 33) as well as for the master-follower
communication (41) are not programmable.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 71

Drivebus

71.01 Ch0 DriveBus (channel 0 drive bus)

No
Yes
Yes
-
E
Communication mode selection for channel 0. The DriveBus mode is used with the AC80 and AC
800M controllers.
0 = No DDCS mode
1 = Yes DriveBus mode, default
Attention:
A new mode becomes only valid after the next SDCS-COM-8 power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 198

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 83

Adaptive program control

83.01 AdapProgCmd (Adaptive Program command)

Stop
SingleStep
Stop
-
E
Selects the operation mode for the adaptive Program:
0 = Stop stop, the Adaptive Program is not running and cannot be edited, default
1 = Start running, the Adaptive Program is running and cannot be edited
2 = Edit edit, the Adaptive Program is not running and can be edited
3 = SingleCycle The Adaptive Program runs only once. If a breakpoint is set with
BreakPoint (83.06) the Adaptive Program will stop before the breakpoint.
After the SingleCycle AdapProgCmd (83.01) is automatically set back to
Stop.
4 = SingleStep Runs only one function block. LocationCounter (84.03) shows the function
block number, which will be executed during the next SingleStep. After a
SingleStep AdapProgCmd (83.01) is automatically set back to Stop.
LocationCounter (84.03) shows the next function block to be executed. To
reset LocationCounter (84.03) to the first function block set AdapProgCmd
(83.01) to Stop again (even if it is already set to Stop).
A136 NoAPTaskTime [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 3] is set when TimeLevSel (83.04) is not set to 5ms,
20ms, 100ms or 500ms but AdapProgCmd (83.01) is set to Start, SingleCycle or SingleStep
Note1:
AdapProgCmd (83.01) = Start, SingleCycle or SingleStep is only valid, if AdapPrgStat (84.01)
Running.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

83.02 EditCmd (edit command)

Done

Done
Unprotect

-
E
Edit application program. EditCmd (83.02) is automatically set back to Done after the chosen
action is finished:
0 = Done no action or edit application program completed, default
1 = Push Shifts the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock (83.03) and all
subsequent function blocks one spot forward. A new function block can be
placed in the now empty spot by programming its parameter set as usual.
Example:
A new function block needs to be placed in between the function block
number four (84.22) to (84.27) and five (84.28) to (84.33). In order to do this:
1. set AdapProgCmd (83.01) = Edit
2. set EditBlock (83.03) = 5 (selects function block 5 as the desired spot
for the new function block)
3. set EditCmd (83.02) = Push (shifts function block 5 and all
subsequent function blocks one spot forward)
4. Program empty spot 5 by means of (84.28) to (84.33)
2 = Delete Deletes the function block in the spot defined by EditBlock (83.03) and shifts
all subsequent function blocks one spot backward. To delete all function
blocks set EditBlock (83.03) = 17.
3 = Protect Turns all parameters of the Adaptive Program into protected mode
(parameters cannot be read or written to). Before using the Protect
command set the pass code by means of PassCode (83.05).
Attention: Do not forget the pass code!
4 = Unprotect Reset of protected mode. Before the Unprotect command can be used,
PassCode (83.05) has to be set.
Attention: The proper pass code has to be used!
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 199

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
83.03 EditBlock (edit block)

1
17
1
-
E
Defines the function block which is selected by EditCmd (83.02) = Push or Delete. After a Push or
Delete EditBlock (83.03) is automatically set back to 1.
Note1:
To delete all function blocks set EditBlock (83.03) = 17.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

83.04 TimeLevSel (time level select)

500ms

-
E
Off

Off
Selects the cycle time for the Adaptive Program. This setting is valid for all function blocks.
0 = Off no task selected
1 = 5ms Adaptive Program runs with 5 ms
2 = 20ms Adaptive Program runs with 20 ms
3 = 100ms Adaptive Program runs with 100 ms
4 = 500ms Adaptive Program runs with 500 ms
A136 NoAPTaskTime [AlarmWord3 (9.08) bit 3] is set when TimeLevSel (83.04) is not set to 5ms,
20ms, 100ms or 500ms but AdapProgCmd (83.01) is set to Start, SingleCycle or SingleStep.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

83.05 PassCode (pass code)

0
65535
0
-
E
The pass code is a number between 1 and 65535 to write protect Adaptive Programs by means of
EditCmd (83.02). After using Protect or Unprotect PassCode (83.05) is automatically set back to
zero.
Attention:
Do not forget the pass code!
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

83.06 BreakPoint (break point)

0
16
0
-
E
Breakpoint for AdapProgCmd (83.01) = SingleCycle.
The break point is not used, if BreakPoint (83.06) is set to zero.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y
Group 84

Adaptive program

84.01 AdapPrgStat (Adaptive Program status word)

-
-
-
-
E
Adaptive program status word:
Bit Name Value Comment
B0 Bit 0 1 Adaptive Program is running
0 Adaptive Program is stopped
B1 Bit 1 1 Adaptive Program can be edited
0 Adaptive Program cannot be edited
B2 Bit 2 1 Adaptive Program is being checked
0 no action
B3 Bit 3 1 Adaptive Program is faulty
0 Adaptive Program is OK
B4 Bit 4 1 Adaptive Program is protected
0 Adaptive Program is unprotected
Faults in the Adaptive Program can be:
used function block with not at least input 1 connection
used pointer is not valid
invalid bit number for function block Bset
location of function block PI-Bal after PI function block
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 200

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
84.02 FaultedPar (faulted parameters)

-
-
-
-
E
The Adaptive Program will be checked before running. If there is a fault, AdapPrgStat (84.01) is set
to “faulty” and FaultedPar (84.02) shows the faulty input.
Note1:
In case of a problem check the value and the attribute of the faulty input.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

84.03 LocationCounter (location counter)

-
-
-
-
E
Location counter for AdapProgCmd (83.01) = SingleStep shows the function block number, which
will be executed next.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

84.04 Block1Type (function block 1 type)

NotUsed

NotUsed
Sqrt

-
E
Selects the type for function block 1 [Block Parameter Set 1 (BPS1)]. Detailed description of the
type can be found in chapter ‘Function blocks’:
0 = NotUsed function block is not used
1 = ABS absolute value
2 = ADD sum
3 = AND AND
4 = Bitwise bit compare
5 = Bset bit set
6 = Compare compare
7 = Count counter
8 = D-Pot ramp
9 = Event event
10 = Filter filter
11 = Limit limit
12 = MaskSet mask set
13 = Max maximum
14 = Min minimum
15 = MulDiv multiplication and division
16 = OR OR
17 = ParRead parameter read
18 = ParWrite parameter write
19 = PI PI-controller
20 = PI-Bal initialization for PI-controller
21 = Ramp ramp
22 = SqWav square wave
23 = SR SR flip-flop
24 = Switch-B switch Boolean
25 = Switch-I switch integer
26 = TOFF timer off
27 = TON timer on
28 = Trigg trigger
29 = XOR exclusive OR
30 = Sqrt square root
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 201

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
84.05 Block1In1 (function block 1 input 1)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Selects the source for input 1 of function block 1 (BPS1). There are 2 types of inputs,
signals/parameters and constants:
Signals/parameters are all signals and parameters available in the drive. The format is -
xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Example:
To connect negated SpeedRef (23.01) set Block1In1 (84.05) = -2301 and Block1Attrib
(84.08) = 0h.
To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In1 (84.05) =
801 and Block1Attrib (84.08) = 3h.
Constants are feed directly into the function block input and have to be declared by
means of Block1Attrib (84.08).
Example:
To connect the constant value of 12345 set Block1In1 (84.05) = 12345 and Block1Attrib
(84.08) = 1000h.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

84.06 Block1In2 (function block 1 input 2)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Selects the source for input 2 of function block 1 (BPS1). Description see Block1In1 (84.05),
except:
Example:
To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In2 (84.06) = 801 and
Block1Attrib (84.08) = 30h.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

84.07 Block1In3 (function block 1 input 3)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Selects the source for input 2 of function block 1 (BPS1). Description see Block1In1 (84.05),
except:
Example:
To get only a certain bit e.g. RdyRef bit 3 of MainStatWord (8.01) set Block1In3 (84.07) = 801 and
Block1Attrib (84.08) = 300h.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 202

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
84.08 Block1Attrib (function block 1 attribute)

0h

0h
FFFFh

-
E
Defines the attributes of function block 1 for all three inputs [Block1In1 (84.05), Block1In2 (84.06)
and Block1In3 (84.07)] (BPS1).
Block1Attrib (84.08) is divided into 4 parts:
Bit number 0 - 3 for input 1 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.
Bit number 4 - 7 for input 2 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.
Bit number 8 - 11 for input 3 to get a certain bit out of a packed Boolean word.
Bit number 12 - 14 for input 1 - 3 to feed a constant directly into the input
15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 Bit number
0 packed
Boolean

3. 2. 1. Function block Function block Function block

To use an input input 3 bit input 2 bit input 1 bit
as a constant selection selection selection
value, the bit
belonging to the This function offers the opportunity to isolate a
input must be certain bit out of a packed Boolean word. It is used
set high. to connect the Boolean inputs of a function block to
a certain bit of a packed Boolean word. With:
Bit 0 == 0000 == 0h
Bit 1 == 0001 == 1h
…
Bit 15 == 1111 == Fh

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: h Volatile: N

84.09 Block1Output (function block 1 output)

-
-
-
-
E
Function block 1 output, can be used as an input for further function blocks.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: Y

84.10 The description of the parameters for function blocks 2 to 16 is basically the same as for function

E
to block 1. For Your convenience the following table shows the parameter numbers of all function
84.99 blocks1:

Function BlockxType BlockxIn1 BlockxIn2 BlockxIn3 BlockxAttrib BlockxOutput BlockxOut

block input 1 input 2 input 1 signal pointer
1 84.04 84.05 84.06 84.07 84.08 84.09 86.01
2 84.10 84.11 84.12 84.13 84.14 84.15 86.02
3 84.16 84.17 84.18 84.19 84.20 84.21 86.03
4 84.22 84.23 84.24 84.25 84.26 84.27 86.04
5 84.28 84.29 84.30 84.31 84.32 84.33 86.05
6 84.34 84.35 84.36 84.37 84.38 84.39 86.06
7 84.40 84.41 84.42 84.43 84.44 84.45 86.07
8 84.46 84.47 84.48 84.49 84.50 84.51 86.08
9 84.52 84.53 84.54 84.55 84.56 84.57 86.09
10 84.58 84.59 84.60 84.61 84.62 84.63 86.10
11 84.64 84.65 84.66 84.67 84.68 84.69 86.11
12 84.70 84.71 84.72 84.73 84.74 84.75 86.12
13 84.76 84.77 84.78 84.79 84.80 84.81 86.13
14 84.82 84.83 84.84 84.85 84.86 84.87 86.14
15 84.88 84.89 84.90 84.91 84.92 84.93 86.15
16 84.94 84.95 84.96 84.97 84.98 84.99 86.16

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 203

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Group 85

User constants

85.01 Constant1 (constant 1)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.02 Constant2 (constant 2)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.03 Constant3 (constant 3)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.04 Constant4 (constant 4)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.05 Constant5 (constant 5)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.06 Constant6 (constant 6)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.07 Constant7 (constant 7)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.08 Constant8 (constant 8)

32767
0
-32768

-
Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program. E

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.09 Constant9 (constant 9)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.10 Constant10 (constant 10)

32767
0
-32768

-
E

Sets an integer constant for the Adaptive Program.

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

85.11 String1 (string 1)

‘string’
‘string’
‘’
-
E

Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name
of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the control panel and in
DriveWindow.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 204

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
85.12 String2 (string 2)

‘string’
‘string’
‘’
-
E
Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name
of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the control panel and in
DriveWindow.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.13 String3 (string 3)

‘string’
‘string’
‘’
-
E
Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name
of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the control panel and in
DriveWindow.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.14 String4 (string 4)

‘string’
‘string’
‘’
-
E
Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name
of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the control panel and in
DriveWindow.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N

85.15 String5 (string 5)

‘string’
‘string’
‘’
-
E
Sets a string for the Adaptive Program. With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (e.g. name
of an event) with a maximum of 12 characters. This string is shown in the control panel and in
DriveWindow.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI/C Volatile: N
Group 86

Adaptive program outputs

86.01 Block1Out (block 1 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 1 output [Block1Output (84.09)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.02 Block2Out (block 2 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 2 output [Block2Output (84.15)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.03 Block3Out (block 3 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 3 output [Block3Output (84.21)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.04 Block4Out (block 4 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E

The value of function block 4 output [Block1Output (84.27)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.05 Block5Out (block 5 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E

The value of function block 5 output [Block1Output (84.33)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 205

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
86.06 Block6Out (block 6 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 6 output [Block1Output (84.39)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.07 Block7Out (block 7 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 7 output [Block1Output (84.45)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.08 Block8Out (block 8 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 8 output [Block1Output (84.51)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.09 Block9Out (block 9 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 9 output [Block1Output (84.57)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.10 Block10Out (block 10 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 10 output [Block1Output (84.63)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.11 Block11Out (block 11 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 11 output [Block1Output (84.69)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.12 Block12Out (block 12 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 12 output [Block1Output (84.75)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.13 Block13Out (block 13 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
The value of function block 13 output [Block1Output (84.81)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter) E
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.14 Block14Out (block 14 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E

The value of function block 14 output [Block1Output (84.87)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

86.15 Block15Out (block 15 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E

The value of function block 15 output [Block1Output (84.93)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 206

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
86.16 Block16Out (block 16 output)

9999
0
-9999

-
E
The value of function block 16 output [Block16Output (84.99)] is written to a sink (signal/parameter)
by means of this index pointer [e.g. 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01)].
The format is -xxyy, with: - = negate signal/parameter, xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 90

Receiving datasets addresses 1

Addresses for the received data transmitted from the overriding control to the drive.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
The dataset base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
90.01 DsetXVal1 (dataset X value 1)

0
9999
701
-
E
Dataset X value 1 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
Default setting of 701 equals MainCtrlWord (7.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.02 DsetXVal2 (dataset X value 2)

0
9999
2301
-
E
Dataset X value 2 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
Default setting of 2301 equals SpeedRef (23.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.03 DsetXVal3 (dataset X value 3)

0
9999
2501
-
E
Dataset X value 2 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
Default setting of 2501 equals TorqRefA (25.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.04 DsetXplus2Val1 (dataset X+2 value 1)

0
9999
702
-
E
Dataset X+2 value 1 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.
Default setting of 702 equals AuxCtrlWord (7.02).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.05 DsetXplus2Val2 (dataset X+2 value 2)

0
9999
703
-
E
Dataset X+2 value 2 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.
Default setting of 703 equals AuxCtrlWord2 (7.03).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.06 DsetXplus2Val3 (dataset X+2 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
Dataset X+2 value 3 (interval: 2 ms). E
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 2.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.07 DsetXplus4Val1 (dataset X+4 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E

Dataset X+4 value 1 (interval: 10 ms).

Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 4.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.08 DsetXplus4Val2 (dataset X+4 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E

Dataset X+4 value 2 (interval: 10 ms).

Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 4.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.09 DsetXplus4Val3 (dataset X+4 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E

Dataset X+4 value 3 (interval: 10 ms).

Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24) + 4.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 207

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
90.10 DsetXplus6Val1 (dataset X+6 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+6 value 1 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.11 DsetXplus6Val2 (dataset X+6 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+6 value 2 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.12 DsetXplus6Val3 (dataset X+6 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+6 value 3 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 6.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.13 DsetXplus8Val1 (dataset X+8 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+8 value 1 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.14 DsetXplus8Val2 (dataset X+8 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset x+8 value 2 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.15 DsetXplus8Val3 (dataset X+8 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+8 value 3 (interval: 10 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 8.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.16 DsetXplus10Val1 (dataset X+10 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+10 value 1 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.17 DsetXplus10Val2 (dataset X+10 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+10 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

90.18 DsetXplus10Val3 (dataset X+10 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+10 value 3 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 10.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 91

Receiving datasets addresses 2

Addresses for the received data transmitted from the overriding control to the drive.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
The dataset base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24).
91.01 DsetXplus12Val1 (dataset X+12 value 1)
0
9999
0
-
E

Dataset X+12 value 1 (interval: 50 ms).

Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 208

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
91.02 DsetXplus12Val2 (dataset X+12 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+12 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

91.03 DsetXplus12Val3 (dataset X+12 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+12 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 12.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

91.04 DsetXplus14Val1 (dataset X+14 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+14 value 1 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

91.05 DsetXplus14Val2 (dataset X+14 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+14 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

91.06 DsetXplus14Val3 (dataset X+14 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+14 value 3 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 14.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 92

Transmit datasets addresses 1

Addresses for the transmit data send from the drive to the overriding control.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
The dataset base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24).
92.01 DsetXplus1Val1 (dataset X+1 value 1)

0
9999
801
-
E
Dataset X+1 value 1 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.
Default setting of 801 equals MainStatWord (8.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.02 DsetXplus1Val2 (dataset X+1 value 2)

0
9999
104
-
E
Dataset X+1 value 2 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.
Default setting of 104 equals MotSpeed (1.04).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.03 DsetXplus1Val3 (dataset X+1 value 3)

0
9999
209
-
E

Dataset X+1 value 3 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 1.
Default setting of 209 equals TorqRef2 (2.09).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.04 DsetXplus3Val1 (dataset X+3 value 1)

0
9999
802
-
E

Dataset X+3 value 1 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.
Default setting of 802 equals AuxStatWord (8.02).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.05 DsetXplus3Val2 (dataset X+3 value 2)

0
9999
101
-
E

Dataset X+3 value 2 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.
Default setting of 101 equals MotSpeedFilt (1.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 209

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
92.06 DsetXplus3Val3 (dataset X+3 value 3)

0
9999
108
-
E
Dataset X+3 value 3 (interval: 2 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 3.
Default setting of 108 equals MotTorq (1.08).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.07 DsetXplus5Val1 (dataset X+5 value 1)

0
9999
901
-
E
Dataset X+5 value 1 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.
Default setting of 901 equals FaultWord1 (9.01).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.08 DsetXplus5Val2 (dataset X+5 value 2)

0
9999
902
-
E
Dataset X+5 value 2 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.
Default setting of 902 equals FaultWord2 (9.02).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.09 DsetXplus5Val3 (dataset X+5 value 3)

0
9999
903
-
E
Dataset X+5 value 3 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 5.
Default setting of 903 equals FaultWord3 (9.03).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.10 DsetXplus7Val1 (dataset X+7 value 1)

0
9999
904
-
E
Dataset X+7 value 1 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.
Default setting of 904 equals FaultWord4 (9.04).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.11 DsetXplus7Val2 (dataset X+7 value 2)

0
9999
906
-
E
Dataset X+7 value 2 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.
Default setting of 906 equals AlarmWord1 (9.06).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.12 DsetXplus7Val3 (dataset X+7 value 3)

0
9999
907
-
E
Dataset X+7 value 3 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 7.
Default setting of 907 equals AlarmWord2 (9.07).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.13 DsetXplus9Val1 (dataset X+9 value 1)

0
9999
908
-
E
Dataset X+9 value 1 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.
Default setting of 908 equals AlarmWord3 (9.08).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.14 DsetXplus9Val2 (dataset X+9 value 2)

0
9999
803
-
E
Dataset X+9 value 2 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.
Default setting of 803 equals LimWord (8.03).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.15 DsetXplus9Val3 (dataset X+9 value 3)

0
9999
805
-
E

Dataset X+9 value 3 (interval: 10 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 9.
Default setting of 805 equals DI StatWord (8.05).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.16 DsetXplus11Val1 (dataset X+11 value 1)

0
9999
806
-
E

Dataset X+11 value 1 (interval: 50 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.
Default setting of 806 equals DO StatWord (8.06).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

92.17 DsetXplus11Val2 (dataset x+11 value 2)

0
9999
124
-
E

Dataset X+11 value 2 (interval: 50 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.
Default setting of 124 equals BridgeTemp (1.24).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 210

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
92.18 DsetXplus11Val3 (dataset X+11 value 3)

0
9999
122
-
E
Dataset X+11 value 3 (interval: 50 ms). Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 11.
Default setting of 112 equals Mot1TempMeas (1.22).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 93

Transmit datasets addresses 2

Addresses for the transmit data send from the drive to the overriding control.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
The dataset base address is set in Ch0 DsetBaseAddr(70.24).
93.01 DsetXplus13Val1 (dataset X+13 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+13 value 1 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

93.02 DsetXplus13Val2 (dataset X+13 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+13 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

93.03 DsetXplus13Val3 (dataset X+13 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+13 value 3 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 13.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

93.04 DsetXplus15Val1 (dataset X+15 value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+15 value 1 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

93.05 DsetXplus15Val2 (dataset X+15 value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+15 value 2 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

93.06 DsetXplus15Val3 (dataset X+15 value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Dataset X+15 value 3 (interval: 50 ms).
Dataset address = Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24) + 15.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 94

DCSLink control

This parameter group defines the communication parameters for the DCSLink board SDCS-DSL-4.
For communication between the armature converter and the field exciters respectively 12-pulse
communication only the basic communication parameters [(94.01) to (94.09)] have to be set.

For master-follower and peer-to-peer communication the basic communication parameters have to
be set. The data transfer is done by means of the 4 available mailboxes [(94.12) to (94.35)].

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 211

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Parameter settings, default values:
single drive with excitation DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1 see example 1
M1FexNode (94.08) = 21
M2FexNode (94.09) = 30
12-pulse drive DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) = 1 see example 2
12P SlaNode (94.04) = 31
M1FexNode (94.08) = 21

Parameter settings for:

master-follower (94.01) 1 2 3 … 11 see example 3
field exciter (94.08) 21 22 23 … 31 see example 3
12-pulse slave (94.04) and (94.01) 31 32 - - - see example 4
peer-to-peer (94.01) 1 2 3 - - see example 5

Example 1:
Single drive with one respectively two field exciters

st excitation
1 st
single drive
P94.01 = 21
= 21
P94.01
P94.01==11
P94.08 = 21 nd excitation
2 nd
P94.09 = 30
P94.01= 30= 30

Example 2:
12-pulse configuration
12 - pulse slave drive
12 - pulse master drive
P94.01 = 31
= 31
P94.01
P94.01==22
P94.04 = 32 st excitation
1 st
P94.08 = 22 P94.01= 21= 21

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 212

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Example 3:
Master-follower configuration (broadcast)

Master drive st follower drive

1 st st excitation
1 st
P94.01
P94.01==11 P94.01
P94.01= 2 = 2 P94.01 = 22
= 22
P94.08 = 21 P94.08 = 22

st excitation
1 st nd follower drive
2 nd st excitation
1 st
P94.01 = 21
= 21 P94.01
P94.01= 3 = 3 P94.01 = 23
= 23
P94.08 = 23

th follower drive
10 th st excitation
1 st
P94.01 = 11
= 11 P94.01 = 31
= 31
P94.08 = 31

Example 4:
Two 12-pulse drives in master-follower configuration

MASTER
12 -pulse slave drive
12 - pulse master drive
P94.01 = 31
= 31
P94.01
P94.01==11
P94.04 = 31 st excitation
1 st
P94.08 = 21
P94.01 =21= 21

12 -pulse slave drive

12 - pulse master drive
P94.01 = 32
= 32
P94.01
P94.01==22
P94.04 = 32 st excitation
1 st
P94.08 = 22
P94.01 = 22
= 22
FOLLOWER

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 213

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Example 5:
Peer-to-peer configuration

st drive
1 st nd drive
2 nd rd drive
3 rd
P94.01 = 1 P94.01 = 2 P94.01 = 3

94.01 DCSLinkNodeID (DCSLink node ID)

0
63
1
-
E
Defines the DCSLink node ID of the station. Two stations with the same node ID are not allowed.
Maximum allowed station count is 50. See also examples 1 to 5 above. The DCSLink node ID is
inactive, if DCSLinkNodeID (94.01) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.02 BaudRate (baud rate)

20 kBit/s
1 MBit/s
500 kBit/s
-
E
Defines the transfer rate of the DCSLink. The transfer rate decreases with the total length of the
DCSLink cable:
0 = 20 kBit/s 20 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m
1 = 50 kBit/s 50 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m
2 = 125 kBit/s 125 kBit/s, total cable length max. 500 m
3 = 250 kBit/s 250 kBit/s, total cable length max. 250 m
4 = 500 kBit/s 500 kBit/s, total cable length max. 100 m, default
5 = 800 kBit/s 800 kBit/s, total cable length max. 50 m
6 = 888 kBit/s 888 kBit/s, total cable length max. 35 m
7 = 1 MBit/s 1 MBit/s, total cable length approximately 25 m, default
Note1:
Maximum total cable length should not exceed 100 m. Maximum amount of connected stations is
50 (e.g. 25 drives including one external field exciter each).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

94.03 12P TimeOut (12-pulse timeout)

0
64000
100
ms
E
Time delay before a 12-pulse communication break is declared. F535 12PulseCom [FaultWord3
(9.03) bit 2] is set.
The communication fault is inactive, if 12P TimeOut (94.03) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.04 12P SlaNode (12-pulse slave node ID)

0
63
31
-
E
Defines the DCSLink node ID of the 12-pulse slave drive in the 12-pulse master drive. See also
examples 2 and 4 above. The 12-pulse node ID is inactive, if 12P SlaNode (94.04) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.05 Unused
94.06 Unused
94.07 FexTimeOut (field exciter timeout)
0
64000
100
ms
E

Time delay before a field exciter communication break is declared. Depending on the fex with the
communication break either F516 M1FexCom [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 15] or F519 M2FexCom
[FaultWord2 (9.02) bit 2] is set.
The communication fault is inactive, if FexTimeOut (94.07) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.08 M1FexNode (motor 1 field exciter node ID)

0
32
21
-
E

Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 1 field exciter in the drive. See also examples 1 to 4 above.
The field exciter node ID is inactive, if M1FexNode (94.08) is set to 0.
Note1:
M1FexNode (94.08) is void, when M1UsedFexType (99.12) = NotUsed or OnBoard.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 214

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
94.09 M2FexNode (motor 2 field exciter node ID)

0
32
30
-
E
Defines the DCSLink node ID of motor 2 field exciter in the drive. See also example 1 above. The
field exciter node ID is inactive, if M2FexNode (94.09) is set to 0.
Note1:
M2FexNode (94.09) is void, when M2UsedFexType (49.07) = NotUsed or OnBoard.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.10 Unused
94.11 Unused
The peer-to-peer and master-follower communication utilizes 4 mailboxes to transfer data. Thus
data transfer to any station in the system is possible. Each mailbox can transmit / receive up to 4
values. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit data, negative receive data. To get
communication mailbox node ID pairs are needed.
Example 6:
Peer-to-peer configuration, sending signals from drive 2 using MailBox3 (94.24) to drive 3 using
MailBox3 (94.24) by means of 5 to transmit data and -5 to receive data.

st drive
1 st
P94.01
P94.01 == 11
P94.12
P94.12 == 11
P94.18 = -2 -2
P94.24
P94.24 == 33
P94.30 = -4 -4
nd drive
2 nd
P94.01
P94.01 == 22
P94.12 = -3 -3
P94.18
P94.18 == 44
P94.24
P94.24 == 55
P94.30 = -6 -6
rd drive
3 rd
P94.01
P94.01 == 33
P94.12 = -1 -1
P94.18
P94.18 == 22
P94.24 = -5 -5
P94.30
P94.30 == 66

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 215

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
Example 7:
Master-follower configuration; send TorqRef3 (2.10) from the master drive via MailBox1 (94.12) to
TorqRefA (25.01) of the followers via MailBox2 (94.18).

Master drive 1 st follower drive

P94.01 = 1 P94.01
P94.01 = 2= 2
P94.12 = 1 P94.18 = -1 - 1
P94.14 = 210 (Tref3) ) P94.20 = 2501 (TrefA ) )
ref3 refA

nd follower drive
2 nd
P94.01
P94.01 = 3= 3
P94.18 = -1 - 1
P94.20 = 2501 (TrefA ) )
refA

10 th follower drive
P94.01 = 11
= 11
P94.18
P94.18 == -1 - 1
P94.20 = 2501 (TrefA ) )
refA

94.12 MailBox1 (mailbox 1 node ID)

64
0
-64

-
E
Mailbox 1 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal1.1 (94.13), TrmtRecVal1.2 (94.14),
TrmtRecVal1.3 (94.15) and TrmtRecVal1.4 (94.16)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit
data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also
examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox1 (94.12) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.13 MailBoxCycle1 (cycle time mailbox 1)

0
64000
100
ms
E
The function of MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is depending on MailBox1 (94.12). MailBox1 (94.12) is
positive (== transmit data):
Communication cycle time, sets the communication interval.
The communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.
MailBox1 (94.12) is negative (== receive data):
Communication timeout, the time delay before a peer-to-peer or master-follower
communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either
F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06)
bit 11] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle1 (94.13) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.14 TrmtRecVal1.1 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.15 TrmtRecVal1.2 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E

Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 2.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 216

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
94.16 TrmtRecVal1.3 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 3.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.17 TrmtRecVal1.4 (mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 4)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 1 transmit / receive value 4.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.18 MailBox2 (mailbox 2 node ID)

64
0
-64

-
E
Mailbox 2 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal2.1 (94.20), TrmtRecVal2.2 (94.21),
TrmtRecVal2.3 (94.22) and TrmtRecVal2.4 (94.23)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit
data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also
examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox2 (94.18) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.19 MailBoxCycle2 (cycle time mailbox 2)

0
64000
100
ms
E
The function of MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is depending on MailBox2 (94.18). MailBox2 (94.18) is
positive (== transmit data):
Communication cycle time, sets the communication interval.
The communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle2 (94.19) is set to 0 ms.
MailBox2 (94.18) is negative (== receive data):
Communication timeout, the time delay before a peer-to-peer or master-follower
communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either
F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06)
bit 11] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle2 (94.18) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.20 TrmtRecVal2.1 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 1.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.21 TrmtRecVal2.2 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 2.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.22 TrmtRecVal2.3 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 3.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.23 TrmtRecVal2.4 (mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 4)

0
9999
0
-
E

Mailbox 2 transmit / receive value 4.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.24 MailBox3 (mailbox 3 node ID)

64
0
-64

-
E

Mailbox 3 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal3.1 (94.26), TrmtRecVal3.2 (94.27),

TrmtRecVal3.3 (94.28) and TrmtRecVal3.4 (94.29)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit
data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also
examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox3 (94.24) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 217

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
94.25 MailBoxCycle3 (cycle time mailbox 3)

0
64000
100
ms
E
The function of MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is depending on MailBox3 (94.24). MailBox3 (94.24) is
positive (== transmit data):
Communication cycle time, sets the communication interval.
The communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is set to 0 ms.
MailBox3 (94.24) is negative (== receive data):
Communication timeout, the time delay before a peer-to-peer or master-follower
communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either
F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06)
bit 11] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle3 (94.25) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.26 TrmtRecVal3.1 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 1.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.27 TrmtRecVal3.2 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 2.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.28 TrmtRecVal3.3 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 3.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.29 TrmtRecVal3.4 (mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 4)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 3 transmit / receive value 4.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.30 MailBox4 (mailbox 4 node ID)

64
0
-64

-
E
Mailbox 4 can transmit / receive up to 4 values [TrmtRecVal4.1 (94.32), TrmtRecVal4.2 (94.33),
TrmtRecVal4.3 (94.34) and TrmtRecVal4.4 (94.35)]. Positive mailbox node ID numbers transmit
data, negative receive data. To get communication, mailbox node ID pairs are needed. See also
examples 6 and 7 above. The mailbox is inactive, if MailBox4 (94.30) is set to 0.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.31 MailBoxCycle4 (cycle time mailbox 4)

0
64000
100
ms
E
The function of MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is depending on MailBox4 (94.30). MailBox4 (94.30) is
positive (== transmit data):
Communication cycle time, sets the communication interval.
The communication is inactive, if MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is set to 0 ms.
MailBox4 (94.30) is negative (== receive data):
Communication timeout, the time delay before a peer-to-peer or master-follower
communication break is declared. Depending on the setting of ComLossCtrl (30.28) either
F544 P2PandMFCom [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 11] or A112 P2PandMFCom [AlarmWord1 (9.06)
bit 11] is set.
The communication fault and alarm are inactive, if MailBoxCycle4 (94.31) is set to 0 ms.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

94.32 TrmtRecVal4.1 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 1)

0
9999
0
-
E

Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 1.

The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 218

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
94.33 TrmtRecVal4.2 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 2)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 2.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.34 TrmtRecVal4.3 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 3)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 3.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

94.35 TrmtRecVal4.4 (mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 4)

0
9999
0
-
E
Mailbox 4 transmit / receive value 4.
The format is xxyy, with: xx = group and yy = index.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N
Group 97

Measurement

97.01 TypeCode (type code)

None
S01-5203-05
factory preset value
-
E
TypeCode (97.01) is preset in the factory and is write protected, unless ServiceMode (99.06) =
SetTypeCode:
0 = None the type code is set by user, see S ConvScaleCur (97.02), S
ConvScaleVolt (97.03), S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) and S BlockBridge2
(97.07) for e.g. rebuild kits
1 = S01-0020-04 type code, see table
to
142 = S01-5203-05 type code, see table

The drive’s basic Type Code:

DCS800-AAX-YYYY-ZZ
Product family: DCS800
Type: AA = S0 Modules

Bridge type: X =1 single bridge (2-Q)

=2 2 anti parallel bridges (4-Q)

Module type: YYYY = converter type current

Rated AC Voltage: ZZ = 04 230 VAC - 400 VAC

= 05 230 VAC – 525 VAC
= 06 270 VAC – 600 VAC
= 07 315 VAC – 700 VAC
= 08 360 VAC – 800 VAC
= 10 450 VAC – 1000 VAC

If the type code is changed its new value is taken over after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 219

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
97.02 S ConvScaleCur (set: converter current scaling)

0
30000
0
A
E
Adjustment of current measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). S ConvScaleCur
(97.02) is write protected, unless ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode:

0A= take value from TypeCode (97.01)

1 A to 30000 A = take value from S ConvScaleCur (97.02)
This value overrides the type code. The new value is taken over and visible in ConvNomCur (4.05)
after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

97.03 S ConvScaleVolt (set: converter voltage scaling)

0
2000
0
V
E
Adjustment of voltage measuring channels (SDCS-PIN-4 or SDCS-PIN-51). S ConvScaleVolt
(97.03) is write protected, unless ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode:
0V= take value from TypeCode (97.01)
1 V to 2000 V = take value from S ConvScaleVolt (97.03)
This value overrides the type code. The new value is taken over and visible in ConvNomVolt (4.04)
after the next power up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

97.04 S MaxBrdgTemp (set: maximum bridge temperature)

0
150
0
°C
E
Adjustment of the converters heat sink temperature tripping level in degree centigrade:
0 °C = take value from TypeCode (97.01)
1 °C to 150 °C = take value from S MaxBrdgTemp (97.04)
This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in MaxBridgeTemp (4.17).
Note1:
Maximum bridge temperature for converters size D6 and D7 is 45 °C.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 °C Type: I Volatile: N

97.05 ConvTempDly (converter temperature delay)

0
300
0
s
E
Instead of measuring the converter temperature it is possible to measure the converter fan current
by means of the PW-1002/3 board. ConvTempDly (97.05) avoids false fault messages during the
fan acceleration:
0s = Converter temperature measurement is released. The drive trips with F504
ConvOverTemp [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 4] in case of excessive converter
temperature.
1 s to 300 s = Converter fan current measurement is released when the drive is in On state
[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 0 On = 1]. The drive trips with F511 ConvFanCur
[FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 10] in case of missing or excessive converter fan
current, after ConvTempDly (97.05) is elapsed.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

97.06 Unused
97.07 S BlockBridge2 (set: block bridge 2)
RelBridge2
Auto

Auto
-
E

Bridge 2 can be blocked:

0 = Auto operation mode is taken from TypeCode (97.01), default
1 = BlockBridge2 block bridge 2 (== 2-Q operation)
2 = RelBridge2 release bridge 2 (== 4-Q operation)
This value overrides the type code and is immediately visible in QuadrantType (4.15).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

97.08 Unused
97.09 MainsCompTime (mains compensation time)
0
1000
10
ms
E

Mains voltage compensation filter time constant. Is used for the mains voltage compensation at the
current controller output.
Setting MainsCompTime (97.09) to 1000 ms disables the mains voltage compensation.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.10 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 220

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
97.11 Unused
97.12 CompUkPLL (phase locked loop to compensate for uk)

0
15
0
%
E
The measured phase angle of the firing unit's PLL can be corrected in order to compensate the
error caused by the commutation related voltage drops. The compensation depends on the uk
(short circuit voltage) of the mains.
CompUkPLL (97.12) defines the mains short circuit voltage - in percent of NomMainsVolt (99.10) -
which is caused by the converter’s nominal current for the PLL correction:
Sc
CompUkPLL = uk * *100%
St
with: uk = related mains short circuit voltage,
Sc = apparent power of converter and
St = apparent power of transformer
Commissioning hint:
CompUkPLL (97.12) is used to compensate for measurement faults of the mains due to
commutation notches, in case the mains are measured on the secondary side of the dedicated
transformer.
The whole situation leads to unstable armature current during high motor loads. Increase
CompUkPLL (97.12) slowly (1 by 1) until the armature current becomes stable.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.13 DevLimPLL (phase locked loop deviation limit)

5
20
10
°
E
Maximum allowed deviation of the mains cycle time between two measurements. The drive trips
with F514 MainsNotSync [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 13], if limit is overshot:
1
for 50Hz mains is valid: 360° == 20ms =
50 Hz
1
for 60Hz mains is valid: 360° == 16.67 ms =
60 Hz
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 ° Type: I Volatile: N

97.14 KpPLL (phase locked loop p-part)

8
0.25

3.75
-
E
Gain of firing unit’s phase lock loop.

Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 Type: I Volatile: N

97.15 Unused
97.16 AdjIDC (adjust DC current)
800
100
%
12.5

E
AdjIDC (97.16) is used to cover drives with different current measuring circuits for bridge 1 and
bridge 2. It rescales the measured armature current if bridge2 is active.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.17 OffsetIDC (offset DC current measurement)

5
0
%
-5

Offset value - in percent of M1NomCur (99.03) - added to the armature current measurement.
OffsetIDC (97.17) adjusts ConvCurAct (1.16) and the real armature current.
Setting OffsetIDC (97.17) to 0 disables the manual offset.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 221

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
97.18 ZeroCurDetect (zero current detection)

Current
ACW Bit15
Current
-
E
Selects the zero current detection method. Use a binary signal, if the zero current detection is done
by another converter:
0 = Current based on the converter’s own zero current detection resistors, default
1 = Voltage based on the converter’s own thyristor voltages
2 = CurAndVolt based on both, zero current detection resistors and thyristor voltages
3 = DI1 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
4 = DI2 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
5 = DI3 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
6 = DI4 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
7 = DI5 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
8 = DI6 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
9 = DI7 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
10 = DI8 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero
11 = DI9 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital
extension board
12 = DI10 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital
extension board
13 = DI11 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, only available with digital
extension board
14 = MCW Bit11 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
15 = MCW Bit12 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
16 = MCW Bit13 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
17 = MCW Bit14 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
18 = MCW Bit15 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
19 = ACW Bit12 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
20 = ACW Bit13 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
21 = ACW Bit14 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
22 = ACW Bit15 1 = zero current detected, 0 = current not zero, AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Note1:
If zero current is detected by means of the thyristor voltages either 10% of MainsVoltAct (1.11) or
10 V is undershot.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 222

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
97.19 ZeroCurTimeOut (zero current timeout)

0
12000
20
ms
E
After a command to change current direction the opposite current direction has to be reached
before ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) plus RevDly (43.14) has been elapsed otherwise the drive trips
with F533 ReversalTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0].
I act

Command to CtrlStatMas (6.09)

change direction bit 8 is set

RevDly
(43.14)

ZeroCurTimeOut
(97.19)

The reversal delay time starts when zero current has been detected, after a command to change
current direction has been given.

ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) must have the same setting for 12-pulse master and 12-pulse slave with
one exception only:
If there is no current measurement in the 12-pulse serial slave [OperModeSel (43.01) =
12PserSlave], set ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) in the 12-pulse serial slave to maximum
(600 ms).
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.20 TorqActFiltTime (actual torque filter time)

0
10000
1000
ms
E
Torque actual filter time constant for MotTorqFilt (1.07). Is used for the EMF controller and the
EMF feed forward.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 223

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
97.21 ResetAhCounter (reset ampere hour counter)

ACW Bit15
NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
Binary signal to reset AhCounter (1.39):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = DI1 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
2 = DI2 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
3 = DI3 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
4 = DI4 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
5 = DI5 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
6 = DI6 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
7 = DI7 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
8 = DI8 Reset by rising edge (0 1)
9 = DI9 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
10 = DI10 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
11 = DI11 Reset by rising edge (0 1), only available with digital extension board
12 = MCW Bit11 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 11
13 = MCW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 12
14 = MCW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 13
15 = MCW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 14
16 = MCW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0 1), MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit 15
17 = ACW Bit12 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 12
18 = ACW Bit13 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 13
19 = ACW Bit14 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 14
20 = ACW Bit15 Reset by rising edge (0 1), AuxCtrlWord (7.02) bit 15
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

97.22 Unused
97.23 AdjUDC (adjust DC voltage)

800
100
%
12.5

E
AdjUDC (97.23) is used to cover drives with different voltage measuring circuits for armature and
mains voltage. It rescales the armature voltage measurement.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.24 OffsetUDC (offset DC voltage measurement)

%
-5.0
5.1
5.1

E
Offset value - in percent of M1NomVolt (99.02) - added to the armature voltage measurement.
OffsetUDC (97.24) adjusts ArmVoltAct (1.14) and the real armature voltage.
Setting OffsetUDC (97.24) to 5.1 % disables the manual offset.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 % Type: I Volatile: N

97.25 EMF ActFiltTime (actual EMF filter time)

0
10000
10
ms
EMF actual filter time constant for EMF VoltActRel (1.17). Is used for the EMF controller and the E
EMF feed forward.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 ms Type: I Volatile: N

97.26 HW FiltUDC (hardware filter DC voltage)

FilterOff
FilterOn
FilterOn
-
E

Hardware filter for the UDC measuring circuit:

0 = FilterOff the filter time is set to 200 s
1 = FilterOn the filter time is set to 10 ms, default
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Option modules
Group 98

98.01 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 224

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.02 CommModule (communication modules)

NotUsed

NotUsed
-
E
FldBusModbus
For the communication modules following selections are available:

Fieldbus DDCS (e.g. DDCS Modbus

(Rxxx) AC 800M) (Nxxx) (RMBA-xx)
0 - - - -
1 X - - -
2 - X - -
3 - - X -
4 - - - X

5 X (read only) X - -
6 - X - X (read only)
7 - - X X (read only)
8 X - - X /read only)

0 = NotUsed no communication used, default

1 = Fieldbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via a fieldbus
module (Rxxx) connected in option slot 1. The dataset start address is
1. This choice is not valid for the Modbus.
2 = COM-8/AC800x The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-
COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The dataset start address is selected
by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
3 = COM-8/Nxxx The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS-COM-8
connected in option slot 3 and a fieldbus module (Nxxx). The dataset
start address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24).
4 = Modbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via the Modbus
(RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 1 [see ModBusModule2 (98.08)].
The dataset start address is 1
5 = AC800xFldbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-
COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The dataset start address is selected
by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24). An additional fieldbus module
(Rxxx) connected in option slot 1 is used for monitoring purposes only.
6 = AC800xModbus The drive communicates with the ABB overriding control via SDCS-
COM-8 connected in option slot 3. The dataset start address is selected
by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24). An additional Modbus (RMBA-
xx) connected in option slot 1 or 2 [see ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is
used for monitoring purposes only.
7 = NxxxModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via SDCS-COM-8
connected in option slot 3 and a fieldbus module (Nxxx). The dataset
start address is selected by means of Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24). An
additional Modbus (RMBA-xx) connected in option slot 1 or 2 [see
ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is used for monitoring purposes only.
8 = FldBusModbus The drive communicates with the overriding control via a fieldbus
module (Rxxx) connected in option slot 1. The dataset start address is 1
[see Ch0 DsetBaseAddr (70.24)]. An additional Modbus (RMBA-xx)
connected in option slot 2 or 3 [see ModBusModule2 (98.08)] is used
for monitoring purposes only.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 225

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.03 DIO ExtModule1 (digital extension module 1)

NotUsed
AMIA
NotUsed
-
E
RDIO-xx extension module interface selection. DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) releases DI9, DI10, DI11,
DO9 and DO10.
The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module
adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 2 (see switch S1) is only required for
connection via AIMA:
0 = NotUsed no RDIO-xx is used, default
1 = Slot1 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 1
2 = Slot2 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 2
3 = Slot3 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 3
4 = AMIA RDIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID =
2
The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the DIO extension module is
chosen, but not connected or faulty.
Note1:
For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO-xx by means of dip switch
S2. Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected.
Note2:
The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord (7.05).
RDIO 1:
Switch S1 Switch S2
ADDRESS
DI3
DI2
DI1

HW
Filtering: ON
ENABLED
S1 DISABLED
1 2 3 4
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 226

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.04 DIO ExtModule2 (digital extension module 2)

NotUsed
AMIA
NotUsed
-
E
RDIO-xx extension module interface selection. DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) releases DI12, DI13, DI14,
DO11 and DO12.
The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module
adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 3 (see switch S1) is only required for
connection via AIMA:
0 = NotUsed no RDIO-xx is used, default
1 = Slot1 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 1
2 = Slot2 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 2
3 = Slot3 RDIO-xx is connected in option slot 3
4 = AMIA RDIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID =
3
The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the DIO extension module is
chosen, but not connected or faulty.
Note1:
For faster input signal detection disable the hardware filters of the RDIO-xx by means of dip switch
S2. Always have the hardware filter enabled when an AC signal is connected.
Note2:
The digital inputs are available via DI StatWord (8.05)
The digital outputs are available via DO CtrlWord (7.05).
RDIO 1:
Switch S1 Switch S2
ADDRESS
DI3
DI2
DI1

HW
Filtering: ON
ENABLED
S1 DISABLED
1 2 3 4
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.05 Unused
98.06 AIO ExtModule (analog extension module)

NotUsed
AMIA
NotUsed
-
E
RAIO-xx extension module interface selection. AIO ExtModule (98.06) releases AI5, AI6, AO3 and
AO4.
The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module
adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 5 (see switch S1) is only required for
connection via AIMA:
0 = NotUsed no RAIO-xx is used, default
1 = Slot1 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 1
2 = Slot2 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 2
3 = Slot3 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 3
4 = AMIA RAIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID =
5
The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the AIO extension module is
chosen, but not connected or faulty.
RAIO 1:
Switch S1
ADDRESS

S1
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.07 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 227

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.08 ModBusModule2 (Modbus module 2)

NotUsed
Slot3
NotUsed
-
E
The Modbus module (RMBA-xx) can be connected in option slot 1, 2 or 3 [see also CommModule
(98.02)]:
0 = NotUsed no RMBA-xx is used, default
1 = Slot1 RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 1
2 = Slot2 RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 2
3 = Slot3 RMBA-xx is connected in option slot 3
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.09 Unused
98.10 Unused
98.11 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 228

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.12 AIO MotTempMeas (analog extension module for motor temperature measurement)

NotUsed
AMIA
NotUsed
-
E
RAIO-xx extension module interface selection. AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) releases AI7, AI8, AO5
and AO6. The analog in- and outputs are only used for motor temperature measurement [see
M1TempSel (31.05) and M2TempSel (49.33)]
The module can be connected in option slot 1, 2, 3 or alternatively onto the external I/O module
adapter (AIMA) connected via SDCS-COM-8. The node ID 9 (see switch S1) is only required for
connection via AIMA:
0 = NotUsed no RAIO-xx is used, default
1 = Slot1 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 1
2 = Slot2 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 2
3 = Slot3 RAIO-xx is connected in option slot 3
4 = AMIA RAIO-xx is connected onto the external I/O module adapter (AIMA), node ID =
9
The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the AIO extension module is
chosen, but not connected or faulty.
RAIO 2:
Switch S1
ADDRESS

S1

Switch S2
Set the operating mode to unipolar:
DIP switch setting (unipolar)
Input signal type
Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2
ON ON 0(4)...20 mA
0(2)...10 V
0...2 V
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 (Default)

Set the number of connected PT100 per channel:

DIP switch settings
Input signal type
Analogue input AI1 Analogue input AI2
2 or 3 PT100 ON ON

set the voltage

signal to
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
0...10 V

1 PT100 ON ON

set the voltage

signal to
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2...10 V

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.13 Unused
98.14 Unused

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 229

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
98.15 IO BoardConfig (I/O board configuration)

NotUsed
IOB-2+IOB-3
NotUsed
-
E
IO BoardConfig (98.15) selects the optional interface boards (SDCS-IOB-2 and / or SDCS-IOB-3)
for the standard I/O of the SDCS-CON-4:
0 = NotUsed no optional interface boards connected, default
1 = SDCS-IOB-2 only SDCS-IOB-2 connected
2 = SDCS-IOB-3 only SDCS-IOB-3 connected
3 = IOB-2+IOB-3 SDCS-IOB-2 and SDCS-IOB-3 connected
The drive trips with F508 I/OBoardLoss [FaultWord1 (9.01) bit 7], if the IO board configuration is
not met.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

98.16 SysComBoard (system communication board)

NotUsed
SDCS-COM-8
NotUsed
-
E
The SDCS-COM-8 (optical communication board) can only be connected in option slot 3.
SysComBoard (98.16) releases the SDCS-COM-8 board:
0 = NotUsed SDCS-COM-8 not used or blocked, default
1 = SDCS-COM-8 SDCS-COM-8 in option slot 3 is released

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

Group 99

Start-up data

99.01 Language (language)

English

English

C
Cesky

-
Select language:
0 = English default
1 = English AM not implemented jet
2 = Deutsch not implemented jet
3 = Italiano not implemented jet
4 = Español not implemented jet
5 = Português not implemented jet
6 = Nederlands not implemented jet
7 = Français not implemented jet
8 = Dansk not implemented jet
9 = Suomi not implemented jet
10 = Svenska not implemented jet
11 = Po-Russki not implemented jet
12 = Polski not implemented jet
13 = Turkish not implemented jet
14 = Cesky not implemented jet
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

99.02 M1NomVolt (motor 1 nominal voltage)

5
2000
350

C
V

Motor 1 nominal armature voltage (DC) from the motor rating plate.
Note1:
In 12-pulse serial mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the voltage the converter itself
is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor voltage, if one motor is connected. In case 2
motors in series are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated voltage.
Note2:
The hardware of the measuring circuit has to be adapted for motor voltages lower than 50V.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 230

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
99.03 M1NomCur (motor 1 nominal current)

0
30000
0

C
A
Motor 1 nominal armature current (DC) from the motor rating plate. If several motors are connected
to the drive, enter the total current of all motors.
Note1:
In 12-pulse parallel mode, this parameter has to be set to the value of the current the converter
itself is providing. This is usually 50 % of the rated motor current, if one motor is connected. In
case 2 motors in parallel are connected it is 100 % of one motor’s rated current.
Note2:
In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M1NomCur (99.03) to set the nominal
field current.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

99.04 M1BaseSpeed (motor 1 base speed)

10
6500
1500

C
rpm
Motor 1 base speed from the rating plate, usually the field weak point. M1BaseSpeed (99.04) is
must be set in the range of:
0.2 to 1.6 times of SpeedScaleAct (2.29).
If the scaling is out of range A124 SpeedScale [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 7] is generated.
Int. Scaling: 10 == 1 rpm Type: I Volatile: N

99.05 Unused
99.06 ServiceMode (service mode)

SetTypeCode

C
NormalMode

NormalMode
-
ServiceMode (99.06) contains several test modes, auto- and manual tuning procedures.
The drive mode is automatically set to NormalMode after an autotuning procedure or after the
thyristor diagnosis is finished or failed. In case errors occur during the selected procedure A121
AutotuneFail [AlarmWord2 (9.07) bit 4] is generated. The reason of the error can be seen in
Diagnosis (9.11).
SetTypeCode is automatically set to NormalMode after the next power up.
0 = NormalMode normal operating mode depending on OperModeSel (43.01), default
1 = ArmCurAuto autotuning armature current controller
2 = FieldCurAuto autotuning field current controller
3 = EMF FluxAuto autotuning EMF controller and flux linearization
4 = SpdCtrlAuto autotuning speed controller step response
5 = SpdFbAssist test speed feedback
6 = ArmCurMan manual tuning of armature current controller
7 = FieldCurMan manual tuning of field current controller
8 = ThyDiagnosis thyristor diagnosis
9 = FldRevAssist test field reversal
10 = SetTypeCode set type code, release for:
TypeCode (97.01)
S ConvScaleCur (97.02)
S ConvScaleVolt (97.03)
S M1FldScale (45.20)
S M2FldScale (45.21)
The new values will be taken over after the next power up
11 = SpdCtrlMan manual tuning of speed controller step response
12 = EMF Man manual tuning of EMF controller; not implemented jet
13 = reserved
14 = TachFineTune tacho fine tuning
Note1:
The reference chain is blocked while ServiceMode (99.06) NormalMode.
Note1:
Depending on MotSel (8.09) the field current of motor 1 or motor 2 is tuned.
Note2:
A 3-phase field exciter cannot be tuned by means of its armature converter. Tune it by setting
ServiceMode (99.06) = ArmCurAuto in the 3-phase field exciter itself.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 231

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
99.07 ApplRestore (application restore)

Done
Yes
Done

C
-
Setting ApplRestore (99.07) = Yes starts the loading / storing of the macro (preset parameter set)
selected by means of ApplMacro (99.08). ApplRestore (99.07) is automatically set back to Done
after the chosen action is finished:
0 = Done no action or macro change completed, default
1 = Yes macro selected with ApplMacro (99.08) will be loaded into the drive
Note1:
Macro changes are only accepted in Off state [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 1 = 0].
Note2:
It takes about 2s, until the new parameter values are active.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

99.08 ApplMacro (application macro)

C
NotUsed
TorqCtrl
NotUsed
-
ApplMacro (99.08) selects the macro (preset parameter sets) to be loaded / stored into the RAM
and FLASH. In addition to the preset macros, two user-defined macros (User1 and User2) are
available.
The operation selected by ApplMacro (99.08) is started immediately by setting ApplRestore
(99.07) = Yes. ApplMacro (99.08) is automatically set back to NotUsed after the chosen action is
finished. The selected macro is shown in MacroSel (8.10):
0 = NotUsed default
1 = Factory load macro factory (default parameter set) into RAM and FLASH
2 = User1Load load macro User1 into RAM and FLASH
3 = User1Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User1
4 = User2Load load macro User2 into RAM and FLASH
5 = User2Save save actual parameter set form RAM into macro User2
6 = Standard load macro standard into RAM and FLASH
7 = Man/Const load macro manual / constant speed into RAM and FLASH
8 = Hand/Auto load macro hand (manual) / automatic into RAM and FLASH
9 = Hand/MotPot load macro hand (manual) / motor potentiometer into RAM and FLASH
10 = reserved reserved
11 = MotPot load macro motor potentiometer into RAM and FLASH
12 = TorqCtrl load macro torque control into RAM and FLASH
Note1:
When loading a macro, group 99 is set / reset as well.
Note2:
If User1 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 3 is set. If User2 is active AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 4 is set.
Note3:
It is possible to change all preset parameters of a loaded macro. On a macro change or an
application restore command of the actual macro the macro depending parameters are restored to
the macro’s default values.
Note4:
In case macro User1 or User2 is loaded by means of ParChange (10.10) it is not saved into the
FLASH and thus not valid after the next power on.
Note5:
The DriveWindow backup function only saves the active macro. Thus both macros User1 and
User2 must be backed-up separately.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: Y

99.09 DeviceNumber (device number) / DeviceName (device name)

0
65535
0
-
E

The user can set a drive number by means of the control panel or DriveWindow Light.
With DriveWindow it is possible to fill in a string (name) with a maximum of 12 characters. This
name will override the numbers and is shown as well in the control panel and in DriveWindow
Note1:
With a SDCS-CON-8 parameter (99.09) is named DeviceNumber, otherwise DeviceName.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I/C Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 232

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
99.10 NomMainsVolt (nominal mains voltage)

C
(97.01) / (97.03)
(97.01) / (97.03)
V
Nominal mains voltage (AC) from the converter rating plate. The default and maximum values are
preset automatically according to TypeCode (97.01) respectively S ConvScaleVolt (97.03).

Absolute max. is 2000 V

Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 V Type: I Volatile: N

99.11 M1NomFldCur (motor 1 nominal field current)

655

C
0.3

0.3
A
Motor 1 nominal field current from the motor rating plate.
Note1:
In case the converter is used as a 3-phase field exciter use M1NomCur (99.03) to set the nominal
field current.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 A Type: I Volatile: N

99.12 M1UsedFexType (motor 1 used field exciter type)

C
NotUsed
reserved
OnBoard
-
Select motor 1 used field exciter type:
0 = NotUsed no or foreign field exciter connected
1 = OnBoard integrated 2-Q field exciter (for sizes D1 - D4 only), default
2 = FEX-425-Int internal 2-Q 25 A field exciter (for size D5 only)
3 = DCF803-0035 external 2-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 35 A
(terminals X100.1 and X100.3)
4 = DCF803-0050 external 2-Q 50 A field exciter
5 = DCF804-0050 external 4-Q 50 A field exciter
6 = DCF803-0060 external 2-Q 60 A field exciter
7 = DCF804-0060 external 4-Q 60 A field exciter
8 = DCS800-S01 external 2-Q 3-phase field exciter
9 = DCS800-S02 external 4-Q 3-phase field exciter
10 = reserved
to
19 = reserved
20 = FEX-4-Term5A external 2-Q 35 A field exciter used for field currents from 0.3 A to 5 A
(terminals X100.2 and X100.3)
21 = reserved
If the fex type is changed its new value is taken over after the next power-up.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: C Volatile: N

99.13 Unused
99.14 Unused
99.15 Pot1 (potentiometer 1)
32767
0
-32768

-
E
Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square
wave generator.
Note1:
The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave [e.g. SqrWaveIndex (99.18)
= 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]:
100% voltage == 10000
100% current == 10000
100% torque == 10000
100% speed == SpeedScaleAct (2.29) == 20000
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 233

Index Signal / Parameter name

unit
min.

def.
max.

E/C
99.16 Pot2 (potentiometer 2)

32767
0
-32768

-
E
Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning functions - see ApplMacro (99.08) - and the square
wave generator.
Note1:
The value is depending on the chosen destination of the square wave [e.g. SqrWaveIndex (99.18)
= 2301 relates to SpeedScaleAct (2.29)]:
100% voltage == 10000
100% current == 10000
100% torque == 10000
100% speed == SpeedScaleAct (2.29) == 20000
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: SI Volatile: N

99.17 SqrWavePeriod (square wave period)

655
10
0.01

s
E
The time period of the square wave generator.
Int. Scaling: 100 == 1 s Type: I Volatile: N

99.18 SqrWaveIndex (square wave index)

0
9999
0
-
E
Index pointer to the source (signal/parameter) of the square wave signal [e.g. 2301 equals
SpeedRef (23.01)].
Note1:
After a power-up SqrWaveIndex (99.18) is set back to 0 and thus disables the square wave
function.
Int. Scaling: 1 == 1 Type: I Volatile: Y

Signal and parameter list

3ADW000193R0201_DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 234

DCS800 panel operation

Chapter overview
This chapter describes the handling of the DCS800 panel..

Start-up
The commissioning configures the drive and sets parameters that define how the
drive operates and communicates. Depending on the control and communication
requirements, the commissioning requires any or all of the following:
The Start-up Assistant (via DCS800 panel or DriveWindow Light) steps you
through the default configuration. The DCS800 panel Start-up Assistant
runs automatically at the first power up, or can be accessed at any time
using the main menu.
Application macros can be selected to define common, alternate system
configurations. See chapter Application Macros.
Additional adjustments can be made using the DCS800 panel to manually
select and set individual parameters. See chapter Signal and parameter
list.

Control panel
Use the DCS800 panel to control the DCS800, to read status data, to adjust
parameters and to use the pre-programmed assistants.

Features:
The DCS800 panel features:
Alphanumeric LCD display
Language selection for the display by means of Language (99.01)
Drive connection can be made or detached at any time
Start-up Assistant for ease drive commissioning
Copy function, parameters can be copied into the DCS800 panel memory
to be downloaded to other drives or as backup
Context sensitive help
Fault- and alarm messages including fault history

DCS800 panel operation

 235

Display overview
The following table summarizes the button functions and displays of the DCS800
panel.

Status LED: LCD display – Divided into three main areas:

• Green for normal operation • Top line variable, depending on the mode of operation.
• Flashing green for alarms • Middle area – variable, in general, shows parameter values, menus or
• Red for faults lists.
• Bottom line – shows current function of the two soft keys, and the clock
display, if enabled.

Soft key 1 - Function varies, and is Soft key 2 – Function varies, and is
defined by the text in the lower-left defined by the text in the lower-right
corner of the LCD display. corner of the LCD display.

Up – Down –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list • Scrolls down through a menu or list
displayed in the middle of the displayed in the middle of the LCD
LCD display. Display.
• Increments a value if a parameter • Decrements a value if a parameter
is selected. is selected.
• Increments the reference if the • Decrements the reference if the
upper-right corner is highlighted upper-right corner is highlighted (in
(in reverse video). reverse video).

LOC/REM – Changes between local Help – Displays context sensitive

and remote control of the drive. information when the button is
pressed. The information displayed
STOP – Stops the drive in local START – Starts the drive in local describes the item currently
control from DCS800 panel and control from DCS800 panel and highlighted in the middle area of the
when the Start-up Assistant is used. when the Start-up assistant is used. display.
DCS800 FW pan sum.dsf

General display features

Soft key functions:
The soft key functions are defined by the text displayed just above each key.

Display contrast:
To adjust display contrast, simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN,
as appropriate.

DCS800 panel operation

 236

Output mode
Use the output mode to read information on the drive’s status and to operate the
drive. To reach the output mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status
information as described below.

Status information:

LOC 3 15rpm
15.0 rpm
3.7 V
17.3 A
DIR MENU

Top: The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the
drive:
LOC indicates that the drive control is local from the DCS800 panel.
REM indicates that the drive control is remote, via local I/O or overriding
control.
indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows:

DCS800 panel display Significance

Rotating arrow (clockwise or Drive is running and at setpoint
counter clockwise)
Shaft direction is forward or reverse
Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint
Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present, but motor is not
running. E.g. start enable is missing
Upper right position shows the active reference.

Middle: Using parameter Group 34, the middle of the LCD display can be
configured to display up to three parameter values:
By default, the display shows three signals.
Use DispParam1Set (34.01), DispParam2Set (34.08) and DispParam3Set
(34.15) to select signals or parameters to display. Entering value 0 results
in no value displayed. For example, if 34.01 = 0 and 34.15 = 0, then only
the signal or parameter specified by 34.08 appears on the DCS800 panel
display.

Bottom: The bottom of the LCD display shows:

Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys.
Lower middle displays the current time (if configured to do so).

Operating the Drive:

LOC/REM: Each time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and is
controlled as specified in CommandSel (10.01).
To switch to local control (LOC) and control the drive using the DCS800 panel,
press the button.
When switching from remote control (REM) to local control (LOC) the

DCS800 panel operation

 237

drive’s status (e.g. On, Run) and the remotely set speed reference are
copied and used. Thus the drive e.g. keeps on running when switching from
remote control (REM) to local control (LOC).
When switching from local control (LOC) to remote control (REM) the
drive’s status (e.g. On, Run) and the speed reference of the remote control
are taken.
To switch back to remote control (REM) press the button.

Start/Stop: To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons.

Shaft direction: To change the shaft direction press DIR.

Speed reference: To modify the speed reference (only possible if the display in
the upper right corner is highlighted) press the UP or DOWN button (the reference
changes immediately).
The speed reference can be modified via the DCS800 panel when in local control
(LOC).

Note:
The START / STOP buttons, shaft direction (DIR) and reference functions are only
valid in local control (LOC).

Other modes
Below the output mode, the DCS800 panel has:
Other operating modes are available through the MAIN MENU.
A fault mode that is triggered by faults. The fault mode includes a
diagnostic assistant mode.
An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms.

LOC 3 MAIN MENU----------------1

PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
MACROS
EXIT ENTER

Access to the MAIN MENU and other modes:

To reach the MAIN MENU:
1. Press EXIT, as necessary, to step back through the menus or lists
associated with a particular mode. Continue until you are back to the output
mode.
2. Press MENU from the output mode. At this point, the middle of the display
is a listing of the other modes, and the top-right text says “MAIN MENU”.
3. Press UP/DOWN to scroll to the desired mode.
4. Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted.

Following modes are available in the MAIN MENU:

1. Parameters mode
2. Start-up assistants mode

DCS800 panel operation

 238

3. Macros mode (currently not used)

4. Changed parameters mode
5. Fault logger mode
6. Clock set mode
7. Parameter backup mode
8. I/O settings mode (currently not used)
The following sections describe each of the other modes.

Parameters mode:

Use the parameters mode to view and edit parameter values:

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight PARAMETERS in the MAIN MENU, then
press ENTER.
LOC 3 MAIN MENU----------------1
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
MACROS
EXIT ENTER
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter group, then press
SEL.
LOC 3 PAR GROUPS------------01
99 Start-up data
01 Phys Act Values
02 SPC Signals
03 Ref/Act Values
04 Information
EXIT SEL
3. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter in a group, then
press EDIT to enter PAR EDIT mode.
LOC 3 PARAMETERS--------------
9901 Language
9902 M1NomVolt
350 V
9903 M1NomCur
9904 M1BaseSpeed
EXIT EDIT
Note:
The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

4. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired parameter value.

LOC 3 PAR EDIT---------------------

9902 M1NomVolt

60 V
CANCEL SAVE
Note:
To get the parameter default value press UP/DOWN simultaneously.

5. Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or
press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications.

DCS800 panel operation

 239

6. Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups, and again to step
back to the MAIN MENU.

Start-up assistants mode:

Use the start-up assistants mode for basic commissioning of the drive.
When the drive is powered up the first time, the start-up assistants guides you
through the setup of the basic parameters.
There are seven start-up assistants available. They can be activated one after the
other, as the ASSISTANTS menu suggests, or independently. The use of the
assistants is not required. It is also possible to use the parameter mode instead.
The assistant list in the following table is typical:

1. Name plate data Enter the motor data, the mains (supply) data, the most important
protections and follow the instructions of the assistant.
After filling out the parameters of this assistant it is - in most cases -
possible to turn the motor for the first time.

2. Macro assistant Selects an application macro.

3. Autotuning field current Enter the field circuit data and follow the instructions of the assistant.
controller During the autotuning the main respectively field contactor will be
closed, the field circuit is measured by means of nominal field current
and the field current control parameters are set. The armature current is
not released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not
turn.
When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by
the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is
possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

4. Autotuning armature Enter the motor nominal current, the basic current limitations and follow
current controller the instructions of the assistant.
During the autotuning the main contactor will be closed, the armature
circuit is measured by means of armature current bursts and the
armature current control parameters are set. The field current is not
released while the autotuning is active and thus the motor should not
turn, but due to remanence in the field circuit about 40% of all motors
will turn. These motors have to be locked.
When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by
the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is
possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

5. Speed feedback Enter the EMF speed feedback parameters, - if applicable - the
assistant parameters for the pulse encoder respectively the analog tacho and
follow the instructions of the assistant.
The speed feedback assistant detects the kind of speed feedback the
drive is using and provides help to set up pulse encoders respectively to
fine tune analog tachometers.
During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if
existing - will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed
[M1BaseSpeed (99.04)]. During the whole procedure the drive will be in
EMF speed control despite the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03).
When the assistant is finished successfully the speed feedback is set. If
the assistant fails it is possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

6. Autotuning speed Enter the motor base speed, the basic speed limitations, the speed filter
controller time and follow the instructions of the assistant.
During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if
existing - will be closed, the ramp is bypassed and torque respectively
current limits are valid. The speed controller is tuned by means of speed
bursts up to base speed [M1BaseSpeed (99.04)] and the speed
controller parameters are set.
When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by
the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is
possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

DCS800 panel operation

 240

Attention:
This assistant is using the setting of M1SpeedFbSel (50.03). If using setting
Encoder or Tacho make sure the speed feedback is working properly!

7. Field weakening Enter the motor data, the field circuit data and follow the instructions of
assistant the assistant.
(only used when maximum During the autotuning the main contactor and the field contactor - if
speed is higher than base existing - will be closed and the motor will run up to base speed
speed) [M1BaseSpeed (99.04)]. The EMF controller data are calculated, the
flux linearization is tuned by means of a constant speed while
decreasing the field current and the EMF controller respectively flux
linearization parameters are set.
When the autotuning is finished successfully the parameters changed by
the assistant are shown for confirmation. If the assistant fails it is
possible to enter the fault mode for more help.

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight ASSISTANTS in the MAIN MENU, then press

ENTER.
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate start-up assistant, then press
SEL to enter PAR EDIT mode.
3. Make entries or selections as appropriate.
4. Press SAVE to save settings. Each individual parameter setting is valid
immediately after pressing SAVE.
5. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Macros mode:
Currently not used!

Changed parameters mode:

Use the changed parameters mode to view and edit a listing of all parameter that
have been changed from their default values:
1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight CHANGED PAR in the MAIN MENU, then
press ENTER.
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight a changed parameter, then press EDIT to
enter PAR EDIT mode.
Note:
The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

3. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired parameter value.

Note:
To get the parameter default value press UP/DOWN simultaneously.

4. Press SAVE to store the modified value and leave the PAR EDIT mode or
press CANCEL to leave the PAR EDIT mode without modifications.
Note:
If the new value is the default value, the parameter will no longer appear in the
changed parameter list.

5. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Fault logger mode:

Use the fault logger mode to see the drives fault, alarm and event history, the fault
state details and help for the faults:

DCS800 panel operation

 241

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight FAULT LOGGER in the MAIN MENU, then

press ENTER to see the latest faults (up to 20 faults, alarms and events are
logged).
2. Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault. Details are available for
the three latest faults, independent of the location in the fault logger.
3. Press DIAG to get additional help (only for faults). See "Fault Tracing" on
page XX.
4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Clock set mode:

Use the Clock set mode to:
Enable or disable the clock function.
Select the display format.
Set date and time.
1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight CLOCK SET in the MAIN MENU, then press
ENTER.
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the desired option, then press SEL.
3. Choose the desired setting, then press SEL or OK to store the setting or
press CANCEL to leave without modifications.
4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

Note:
To get the clock visible on the LCD display at least one change has to be done
in the clock set mode and the DCS800 panel has to be de-energized and
energized again.

Parameter backup mode:

The DCS800 panel can store a full set of drive parameters.
AP programs will be uploaded and downloaded when they are not
protected see EditCmd (83.02).
The type code of the drive is write protected and has to be set manually by
means of ServiceMode (99.06) = SetTypeCode and TypeCode (97.01).
The parameter backup mode has following functions:

UPLOAD TO PANEL: Copies all parameters from the drive into the DCS800 panel.
This includes both user sets (User1 and User2) - if defined - and internal
parameters such as those created by tacho fine tuning. The DCS800 panel
memory is non-volatile and does not depend on its battery. Can be done in every
drive state.

DOWNLOAD FULL SET: Restores the full parameter set from the DCS800 panel
into the drive. Use this option to restore a drive, or to configure identical drives.
Can only be done in drive state Off and local from panel.

Note:
This download does not include the user sets.

DOWNLOAD APPLICATION: Currently not used!

DOWNLOAD USER SET 1: Copies parameter set User1 - see ApplMacro (99.08)

DCS800 panel operation

 242

- from the DCS800 panel into the drive. Can only be done in drive state Off and
local from panel.
Currently not used!

DOWNLOAD USER SET 2: Copies parameter set User2 - see ApplMacro (99.08)
- from the DCS800 panel into the drive. Can only be done in drive state Off and
local from panel.
Currently not used!

The general procedure for parameter backup operations is:

1. Press UP/DOWN to highlight PAR BACKUP in the MAIN MENU, then press
ENTER.
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the desired option, then press SEL.
3. Wait until the service is finished, then press OK.
4. Press EXIT to step back to the MAIN MENU.

I/O settings mode:

Currently not used!

DCS800 panel operation

 243

Fault tracing

Chapter overview
This chapter describes the protections and fault tracing of the drive.

General
Fault modes
Depending on the trip level of the fault the drive reacts differently. The drive’s
reaction to a fault with trip level 1 and 2 is fixed. See also paragraph Fault signals
of this manual. The reaction to a fault of level 3 and 4 can be chosen by means of
SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) respectively FaultStopMode (30.30).

Converter protection
Auxiliary undervoltage
If the auxiliary supply voltage (115 VAC or 230 VAC) fails while the drive is in
RdyRun state (MSW bit 1), the fault F501 AuxUnderVolt is generated.

Armature overcurrent
The nominal value of the armature current is set with M1NomCur (99.02).

The overcurrent level is set by means of ArmOvrCurLev (30.09).

Additionally the actual current is monitored against the overcurrent level of the
converter module. The converter’s actual overcurrent level can be read from
ConvOvrCur (4.16).

Exceeding one of the two levels causes F502 ArmOverCur.

Converter overtemperature / converter fan current

Converter overtemperature:
The maximum temperature of the bridge can be read from MaxBridgeTemp (4.17)
and is automatically set by TypeCode (97.01) or manually set by S MaxBrdgTemp
(97.04).
Note:
For D6 and D7 modules use MaxBrdgTemp (97.04) = 45°C for maximum air entry
temperature.

Exceeding this level causes F504 ConvOverTemp. The threshold for A104
ConvOverTemp, is 5 C below the tripping level. The measured temperature can
be read from BridgeTemp (1.24).

If the measured temperature drops below minus 10 C, F504 ConvOverTemp is

generated in order to monitor the temperature sensor against short circuit.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 244

Converter fan current:

If not the converter temperature is monitored, but the converter fan current (by
means of a PW-1002/3 board), F511 ConvFanCur can be delayed by means of
ConvTempDly (97.05) to avoid false fault messages during the acceleration of the
fan.

F504 ConvOverTemp is disabled if the delay is greater than zero. Instead F511
ConvFanCur is generated, if the converter is in RdyRun state (MSW bit 1) and the
fault exceeds the delay.

Auto-reclosing (mains undervoltage)

Auto-reclosing allows to continue drive operation immediately after a short mains
undervoltage without any additional functions of the overriding control system.

In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronics
running through short mains undervoltage, an UPS is needed for the 115/230 VAC
auxiliary voltages. Without the UPS all DI like e.g. E-stop, start inhibition,
acknowledge signals etc. would have false states and trip the drive although the
system itself could stay alive. Also the control circuits of the main contactor must
be supplied during the mains undervoltage.

Auto-reclosing defines whether the drive trips immediately with F512

MainsLowVolt or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltage returns.

Short mains undervoltage

The supervision of mains undervoltage has two levels:
1. UNetMin1 (30.22) alarm, protection and trip level
2. UNetMin2 (30.23) trip level
If the mains voltage falls below UNetMin1 (30.22) but stays above UNetMin2
(30.23), the following actions take place:
1. the firing angle is set to ArmAlphaMax (20.14),
2. single firing pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as
possible,
3. the controllers are frozen,
4. the speed ramp output is updated from the measured speed and
5. A111 MainsLowVolt is set as long as the mains voltage recovers before
PowrDownTime (30.25) is elapsed, otherwise F512 MainsLowVolt is
generated.
If the mains voltage returns before PowrDownTime (30.25) is elapsed and the
overriding control keeps the commands On (MCW bit 0) and Run (MCW bit 3) = 1,
the drive will start again after 2 seconds. Otherwise the drive trips with F512
MainsLowVolt.
When the mains voltage drops below UNetMin2 (30.23), the action is selected by
means of PwrLossTrip (30.21):
1. the drive is immediately tripped with F512 MainsLowVolt or
2. the drive starts up automatically, see description for UNetMin1 (30.22).
Below UNetMin2 (30.23) the field acknowledge signals are ignored and
blocked

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 245

Note1:
UNetMin2 (30.23) isn't monitored, unless the mains voltage drops below UNetMin1
(30.22). Thus, for proper operation, UNetMin1 (30.22) must be larger than
UNetMin2 (30.23).

Note2:
If no UPS is available, set PwrLossTrip (30.21) to Immediately. Thus the drive will
trip with F512 MainsLowVolt avoiding secondary phenomena due to missing
power for AI’s and DI’s.

Drive behavior during auto-reclosing

hold speed controller integrator

speed ramp follows speed actual

AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 15

AutoReclosing 2s

MainsVoltActRel (1.11)
UNetMin1 (30.22)

UNetMin2 (30.23)

PowrDownTime (30.24)
F512 MainsLowVolt, if
PwrLossTrip (30.21) = A111 MainsLowVolt
Immediately PowrDownTime (30.24) is exceeded:
F512 MainsLowVolt DCS800 FW aut recl.dsf

Auto-reclosing

Mains synchronism
As soon as the main contactor is closed and the firing unit is synchronized with the
incoming voltage, supervising of the synchronization is activated. If the
synchronization fails, F514 MainsNotSync will be generated.

The permitted deviation of the cycle time between 2 measurements is set by

means of DevLimPLL (97.13).
The synchronization of the firing unit takes typically 300 ms before the current
controller is ready.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 246

Incoming
voltage

T1 T2
DCS800 FW synchr meas.dsf
T = T1 - T 2
Synchronization measurement
If T is longer than DevLimPLL (97.13) fault F514 MainsNotSync will be
generated. The actual value of the PLL can bee seen in PLLOut (3.20).
Note:
at 50 Hz one period == 360° == 20 ms = 20000 s
at 60 Hz one period == 360° == 16.7 ms = 16667 s

Mains overvoltage
The overvoltage level is fixed to 1.3 * NomMainsVolt (99.10). Exceeding this level
causes F513 MainsOvrVolt.

Communication loss
The communication to several devices is supervised. The reaction to a
communication loss can be chosen by means of LocalLossCtrl (30.27)
respectively ComLossCtrl (30.28).
The time out is set by the parameters listed in the table as well as all dependent
fault- and alarm messages.
Overview local and communication loss:
Device Loss control Time out Related fault Related alarm
Control LocalLossCtrl (30.27) fixed to 5s F546 LocalCmdLoss A130 LocalCmdLoss
panel
DW
DWL
Rxxx ComLossCtrl (30.28) FB TimeOut (30.35) F528 FieldBusCom A128 FieldBusCom
(Fieldbus)
DCSLink MailBoxCycle1 (94.13), F544 P2PandMFCom A112 P2PandMFCom
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19),
MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
- 12P TimeOut (94.03) F535 12PulseCom -
- FexTimeOut (94.07) F516 M1FexCom -
F519 M2FexCom
SDCS- Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05) Ch0TimeOut (70.04) F543 COM8Com A113 COM8Com
COM-8 Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15) Ch2TimeOut (70.14)

Overview local and communication loss

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 247

Fan, field and mains contactor acknowledge

When the drive is switched On (MCW bit 0), the program closes the fan contactor
and waits for acknowledge. After it is received, the field contactor is closed
respectively the field converter is started and the program waits for the field
acknowledge. Finally the main contactor is closed and its acknowledge is waited
for.

If the acknowledges are not received during 10 seconds after the On command
(MCW bit 0) is given, the corresponding fault is generated. These are:
1. F521 FieldAck, see Mot1FexStatus (6.12)
2. F523 ExtFanAck, see MotFanAck (10.06)
3. F524 MainContAck, see MainContAck (10.21)
4. F523 ConvFanAck, see ConvFanAck (10.20)

Note:
F521 FieldAck is the sum fault for all field related faults like:
1. F515 M1FexOverCur, see M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13)
2. F516 M1FexCom, see FexTimeOut (94.07)
3. F529 M1FexNotOK, fault during self-diagnosis
4. F537 M1FexRdyLost, AC missing or not in synchronism
5. F541 M1FexLowCur, see M1FldMinTrip (30.12)

External fault
The user has the possibility to connect external faults to the drive. The source can
be connected to DI’s, MainCtrlWord (7.01) or AuxCtrlWord (7.02) and is selectable
by ExtFaultSel (30.31). External faults generate F526 ExternalDI.

ExtFaultOnSel (30.33) selects the reaction:

1. external fault is always valid independent from drive state
2. external fault is only valid when drive state is RdyRun (MSW bit 1) for at
least 6 s

Note:
In case inverted fault inputs are needed, it is possible to invert the DI’s.

Bridge reversal
With a 6-pulse converter, the bridge reversal is initiated by changing the polarity of
the current reference (command to change direction). Upon zero current detection,
the bridge reversal is started. Depending on the moment involved, the new bridge
may be “fired” either in the same or in the next current cycle.

The switchover can be delayed by RevDly (43.14). The delay starts after zero
current has been detected. Thus RevDly (43.14) is the length of the forced current
gap during a bridge changeover. This feature may prove useful when operating
with large inductances. After the reversal delay is elapsed the system changes to
the selected bridge without any further consideration.

After a command to change current direction the opposite current direction has to
be reached before ZeroCurTimeOut (97.19) plus RevDly (43.14) has been elapsed
otherwise the drive trips with F533 ReversalTime [FaultWord3 (9.03) bit 0].

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 248

I act

Command to CtrlStatMas (6.09)

change direction bit 8 is set
RevDly
(43.14)

ZeroCurTimeOut
(97.19) DCS800 FW br rev.dsf

Bridge reversal

Analog input monitor

In case the analog input is set to 2 V to 10 V respectively 4 mA to 20 mA it is
possible to check for wire breakage by means of AI Mon4mA (30.29).

In case the threshold is undershoot one of the following actions will take place:
1. the drive stops according to FaultStopMode (30.30) and trips with F551
AIRange
2. the drive continues to run at the last speed and sets A127 AIRange
3. the drive continues to run with FixedSpeed1 (23.02) and sets A127
AIRange

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 249

Motor protection
Armature overvoltage
The nominal value of the armature voltage is set with M1NomVolt (99.02).

The overvoltage level is set by means of ArmOvrVoltLev (30.08). Exceeding this

level causes F503 ArmOverVolt.

Residual current
The residual current detection (earth fault) is based on:
a sum current transformer at the AC-side of the converter or
an external device (e.g. Bender relays).
If a current transformer is used its secondary winding is connected to AI4 (X3:11
and X3:12) on the SDCS-IOB-3 board. The sum current of all three phases has to
be zero, otherwise a residual current is detected and F505 ResCurDetect is set.

ResCurDetectSel (30.05) activates the residual current detection and selects the
choice of connected hardware (transformer or external device).

The residual current detection tripping level is set with ResCurDetectLim (30.06), if
a sum current transformer is used. In case an external device is used
ResCurDetectLim (30.06) is deactivated.

ResCurDetectDel (30.07) delays F505 ResCurDetect.

Measured motor temperature

General
The temperatures of motor 1 and motor 2 (parameter for motor 2 see group 49)
can be measured at the same time. Alarm and tripping levels are selected by
means of M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06) and M1FaultLimTemp (31.07). If the levels
are exceeded A106 M1OverTemp respectively F506 M1OverTemp is set. The
motor fan will continue to work until the motor is cooled down to alarm limit.

The measurement is configured by means of M1TempSel (31.05) and the

measured temperature is shown in Mot1TempMeas (1.22). The unit of the
measurement depends on the selected measurement mode. For PT100 the unit is
degree Celsius and for PTC the unit is .

The temperature measurements uses either AI2 and AI3 of the SDCS-IOB-3 or AI7
and AI8 of the RAIO for motor temperature measurement. Additionally the SDCS-
IOB-3 features a selectable constant current source for PT100 (5 mA) or PTC (1.5
mA).

Measurement selection
Connection possibilities for PT100:
max. 3 PT100 for motor 1 and max. 3 PT100 for motor 2 or
up to 6 PT100 for a single motor.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 250

SDCS-IOB-3:
AI2 (motor 1) and AI3 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with
PT100. In case only one PT100 is connected to an AI the input range must be
configured by jumpers to a gain of 10. Jumper settings for input range and
constant current source see Hardware Manual.

SDCS-IOB-3
X3: 5 -
6 AI2 A/D
7 +
-
8 AI3 A/D
+
X4: 10
U
PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 PT100 11
5 mA

Motor 1 Motor 2

single motor DCS800 FW PT100 and IOB3.dsf

PT100 and SDCS-IOB-3

For more information see section Analog Inputs.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 251

RAIO for motor temperature measurement:

AI7 (motor 1) and AI8 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with
PT100. AI7 and AI8 have to be activated by means of AIO MotTempMeas (98.12).

RAIO
X1: 2 +
1 AI7 A/D
-
4 +
3 AI8 A/D
-
X2: 4 -
3 AO6 D/A
PT100 PT100 PT100 +
2 -
1 AO5 D/A
PT100 PT100 PT100 +

Motor 1 Motor 2

DCS800 FW PT0100 and sec RAIO.dsf

single motor

PT100 and second RAIO

SDCS-IOB-3:
Connection possibilities for PTC:
max. 1 PTC for motor 1 and max. 1 PTC for motor 2 or
up to 2 PTC for a single motor.

AI2 (motor 1) and AI3 (motor 2) are used for the temperature measurement with
PTC. Jumper settings see Hardware Manual.

SDCS-IOB-3
X3: 5 -
6 AI2 A/D
7 +
-
8 AI3 A/D
+
X4: 10
U
PTC PTC 11
1.5 mA

Motor 1 Motor 2

DCS800 FW PTC and IOB3.dsf

single motor

PTC and SDCS-IOB-3

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 252

SDCS-CON-4:
Connection possibilities for PTC:
max. 1 PTC for motor 1 or max. 1 PTC for motor 2.

Only AI2 can be used for the temperature measurement with PTC. Jumper settings
see Hardware Manual.

SDCS-CON-4
SDCS
X3: 8 +
7 AI2 A/D
-

S3: 7-8
U
X4: 10 4k75
PTC

DCS800 FW PTC and CON4.dsf

PTC and SDCS-CON-4

Klixon
The temperature of motor 1 and motor 2 can be supervised by means of klixons.
The klixon is a thermal switch, opening its contact at a defined temperature. This
can be used for supervision of the temperature by means of connecting the switch
to a digital input of the drive. The digital input for the klixon(s) is selected with
M1KlixonSel (31.08). The drive trips with F506 M1OverTemp when the klixon
opens. The motor fan will continue to work until the klixon is closed again.

Note:
It is possible to connect several klixons in series.

Motor thermal model

General
The drive includes two thermal models one for motor 1 and one for motor 2. The
models can be used at the same time. Two models are needed in case one
converter is shared by two motors (e.g. shared motion). During normal operation
only one thermal model is needed.

It is recommended to use the thermal model of the motor if a direct motor

temperature measurement isn't available and the current limits of the drive are set
higher than the motor nominal current.

The thermal model is based on the actual motor current related to motor nominal
current and rated ambient temperature. Thus the thermal model does not directly
calculate the temperature of the motor, but it calculates the temperature rise of
the motor. This is based on the fact that the motor will reach its end temperature
after the specified time when starting to run the cold motor (40°C) with nominal

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 253

current. This time is about four times the motor thermal time constant.

The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which is
proportional with the motor current to the power of two:
2
I act ⎛ − ⎞
t
Φ = 2 * ⎜⎜1 − e ⎟⎟
τ
(1)
I Motn ⎝ ⎠

When the motor is cooling down, the temperature model follows:

2 t
I act −
Φ= 2
*e τ (2)
I Motn
2
with: = temperature rise == [M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)]
alarm
2
trip
= temperature rise == [M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)]
= temperature rise == Mot1TempCalc (1.20)
Iact = actual motor current (overload e.g. 170%)
IMotn = nominal motor current (100%)
t = length of overload (e.g. 60 s)
= temperature time constant (in seconds) == M1ModelTime (31.01)

As from the formulas (1) and (2) can be seen, the temperature model uses the
same time constant when the motor is heating or cooling down.

Alarm and tripping levels

Alarm and tripping levels are selected by means of M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03) and
M1FaultLimLoad (31.04). If the levels are exceeded A107 M1OverLoad
respectively F507 M1OverLoad is set. The motor fan will continue to work until the
motor is cooled down to alarm limit.

The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability.
Recommended value for alarming is 102 % and for tripping 106 % of nominal
motor current. Thus the temperature rise is:
2 2 2
alarm
== [M1AlarmLimLoad (31.03)] = (102%) = 1.02 = 1.04 and
2 2 2
trip
== [M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)] = (106%) = 1.06 = 1.12.

The temperature rise output of the model is shown in Mot1TempCalc (1.20).

Thermal model selection

The activation of the thermal models is made by setting M1ModelTime (31.01)
greater than zero.

Thermal time constant

The time constant for the thermal model is set by means of M1ModelTime (31.01).
If the thermal time constant of a motor is given by the manufacturer just write it into
M1ModelTime (31.01).
In many cases the motor manufacturer provides a curve that defines how long the
motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor. In this case the proper
thermal time constant must be calculated.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 254

Example:
The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170 % of motor nominal
current for more than 60 seconds.
Selected tripping base level is 106 % of nominal motor current, thus
M1FaultLimLoad (31.04) = 106 %.

Current Iact (%)

Example:
2
(31.04)2 = trip = (106 %) = 112
260 I act = 170 %
240 I Motn = 100 %
200 t = 60 s
180
160
140
120
100

30 60 300 600 6000

Time (sec)
DCS800 FW mot load curv.dsf

Motor load curve

Note:
This is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor!

Using formula (1) we can calculate the correct value for , when starting with a cold
motor.
With:
2
I act ⎛ −
t
⎞
(31.04) = Φ trip
2
= 2 ⎜
* ⎜1 − e τ ⎟
I Motn ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Follows:
t 60s
τ =− =− = 122s
⎛ I
2
⎞ ⎛ 1.02 ⎞
ln⎜⎜1 − (31.04) 2 * Motn2 ⎟
⎟
ln⎜⎜1 − 1.062 * 2 ⎟⎟
⎝ I act ⎠ ⎝ 1.7 ⎠

Set M1ModelTime (31.01) = 122 s.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 255

Field overcurrent
The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFldCur (99.11).

The overcurrent level is set by means of M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13). Exceeding this

level causes F515 M1FexOverCur.

Armature current ripple

The current control is equipped with a current ripple monitor.
This function detects:
1. a broken fuse or thyristor
2. too high gain of the current controller
3. a broken current transformer (T51, T52)

The current ripple monitor level is set by means of CurRippleLim (30.19).

Exceeding this level causes either F517 ArmCurRipple or A117 ArmCurRipple
depending on CurRippleSel (30.18).

Current ripple monitor method is based on comparing positive and negative

currents of each phase. The calculation is done per thyristor pair:

Isnubber circuit
I

not fired thyristor

I I I I I I t
1-6 1-2 3-2 3-4 5-4 5-6
DCS800 FW curr rip mon.dsf

Current ripple monitor method

CurRipple (1.09) is calculated as abs(I1-6-I3-4) + abs(I1-2-I5-4) + abs(I3-2-I5-6). By low-

pass filtering with 200 ms CurRippleFilt (1.10) is generated and compared against
CurRippleLim (30.19).

I +
1-6
L1 abs CurRipple (1.09)
I CurRippleFilt (1.10)
3-4 -

I + F517 ArmCurRipple
1-2 abs
L2
I - 200 ms A117 ArmCurRipple
5-4
CurRippleLim (30.19)
I +
3-2 abs CurRippleSel (30.18)
L3
I - DCS800 FW curr rip mon calc.dsf
5-6
Current ripple monitor calculation

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 256

Note:
The load influences the error signal CurRippleFilt (1.10).
Current near discontinuous level will create values of about 300 % *
ConvCurActRel (1.15) if a thyristor is not fired.
High inductive loads will create values of about 90% * ConvCurActRel (1.15) if a
thyristor is not fired.

Commissioning hint:
It is not possible to pre-calculate clear levels.
The current control reacts to unstable current feedback.
The load is continuously driving the current if a thyristor is not fired.

Speed feedback monitor

The speed feedback monitor supervises an attached analog tacho or encoder for
proper function by means of measured speed and measured EMF. Above a certain
EMF the measured speed feedback must be above a certain threshold. The sign of
the speed measurement must be correct as well:
SpeedActEnc (1.03) or

SpeedActTach (1.05)
COMP-I
I1>I2
SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) I1 I1=I2
I2 I1<I2
AND
&
COMP-I
I1 I1>I2
MUL I2 I1=I2
X OR2 S SR F522 SpeedFb
-1 I1<I2 Q
>1
- R
COMP-I
I1
I1>I2
I2 I1=I2
I1<I2
EMF VoltActRel (1.17) Reset
MUL
I1 COMP-I
X AND
I2 I1>I2 &
I1=I2
EMF FbMonLev (30.15) I1<I2
MUL
-1 X DCS800 FW speed meas superv.dsf

Speed measurement supervision

The drive reacts according to SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) when:

1. the measured EMF is greater than EMF FbMonLev (30.15) and
2. the measured speed feedback SpeedActEnc (1.03) respectively
SpeedActTach (1.05) is lower than SpeedFbMonLev (30.14).

Example:
SpeedFbMonLev (30.14) = 15 rpm
EMF FbMonLev (30.15) = 50 V
The drive trips when the EMF is greater than 50 V while the speed feedback is
15 rpm.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 257

Motor

Speed feedback
monitoring enabled
EMF FbMonLev (P3015)
Motor
SpeedFbMonLev (P3014) speed
DCS800 FW speed feedb mon.dsf

Speed feedback monitor

SpeedFbFltSel (30.17) selects the reaction to a speed feedback problem:

1. the drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb
2. the speed feedback is switched to EMF and the drive is stopped according
to E StopRamp (22.11), then F522 SpeedFb is set
3. the speed feedback is switched to EMF and A125 SpeedFb is set
In case the field is weakened the drive is immediately tripped with F522 SpeedFb.

Stall protection
The stall protection trips the converter with F531 MotorStalled when the motor is
in apparent danger of overheating. The rotor is either mechanically stalled or the
load is otherwise continuously too high. It is possible to adjust the supervision
(time, speed and torque).

The stall protection trips the drive if:

1. the actual speed is below StallSpeed (30.02) and
2. the actual torque exceeds StallTorq (30.03)
3. for a time longer than programmed in StallTime (30.01).

Overspeed protection
The motor is protected against overspeed e.g. in a case when the drive is in torque
control mode and the load drops unexpected.

The overspeed level is set by means of M1OvrSpeed (30.16). Exceeding this level
causes F532 MotOverSpeed.

Current rise
The protection against fast current rise during generating is configured by means
of ArmCurRiseMax (30.10).

Exceeding this level causes F539 FastCurRise. If present the DC-breaker is

tripped and the main contactor is opened.

Field undercurrent
The nominal value of the field current is set with M1NomFldCur (99.11).

The minimum field current level is set by means of M1FldMinTrip (30.12).

Undershooting this level causes F541 M1FexLowCur.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 258

FldMinTripDly (45.18) delays F541 M1FexLowCur.

Tacho polarity
The polarity of the analog tacho is checked against the EMF. If the polarity is
wrong F553 TachPolarity is generated.
Tacho range
If an overflow of the AITacho input is imminent F554 TachoRange is generated.
Check for the right connections (X3:1 to X3:4) on the SDCS-CON-4.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 259

Status messages

Display of status, fault and alarm signals

Categories of signals and display options
The thyristor power converters series DCS800 generate general messages, power-up
errors, fault and alarm signals:
general messages

power-up errors

F fault signals

A alarm signals

The messages are indicated on the seven-segment display (H2500) of the SDCS-
CON-4 control board. On the seven-segment display the messages appear in
code. The letters and numbers of multi-character codes are displayed one after the
other for 0.7 seconds at a time. Plain text messages are available on the control
panels and in the fault logger of DriveWindow and DriveWindow Light.

0.7s 0.7s 0.7s 0.7s

F514 = mains not in synchronism

For evaluation via digital outputs or communication to the overriding control 16 bit words
are available, containing all fault and alarm signals as binary code:
FaultWord1 (9.01),
FaultWord2 (9.02),
FaultWord3 (9.03),
FaultWord4 (9.04),
UserFaultWord (9.05),
AlarmWord1 (9.06),
AlarmWord2 (9.07),
AlarmWord3 (9.08) and
UserAlarmWord (9.09)

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 260

General messages

SDCS-CON-4 General messages will only be indicated on the seven-segment

display of the SDCS-CON-4.
7- Text on control panel, Definition Remark
segment
DriveWindow and
display
DriveWindow Light
8 not available firmware is not running 1
. not available firmware is running, no faults, no alarms -
- not available indication while loading firmware into SDCS-CON-4 -
d not available indication while loading panel texts into SDCS-CON-4 -

Power-up errors (E)

SDCS-CON-4 Power-up errors will only be indicated on the seven segment

display of the SDCS-CON-4. With a power-up error active it is
not possible to start the drive.
7- Text on control panel, Definition Remark
segment
DriveWindow and
display
DriveWindow Light
E01 not available Checksum fault firmware flash 1,2
E02 not available SDCS-CON-4 ROM memory test error 1,2
E03 not available SDCS-CON-4 RAM memory test error (even addresses) 1,2
E04 not available SDCS-CON-4 RAM memory test error (odd addresses) 1,2
E05 not available SDCS-CON-4 hardware is not compatible, unknown board 1,2
E06 not available SDCS-CON-4 watchdog timeout occurred 1,2

1. Units should be de-energized and energized. If the fault occurs again check the SDCS-CON-4,
SDCS-PIN-4 respectively SDCS-POW-4 boards and change them if necessary.
2. Power-up errors are only enabled immediately after power on. If a power-up error is indicated
during normal operation the reason is usually caused by EMC. In this case please check for
proper grounding of cables, converter and cabinet.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 261

Fault signals (F)

To avoid dangerous situations, damage of the motor, the drive or any other material some
physical values must not exceed certain limits. Therefore limit values can be specified for
these values by parameter setting which cause an alarm or a fault when the value exceeds
the limits (e.g. max. armature voltage, max. converter temperature). Faults can also be
caused by situations which inhibit the drive from normal operation (e.g. blown fuse).

A fault is a condition which requires an immediate stop of the drive in order to

avoid danger or damage. The drive is stopped automatically and cannot be
restarted before removing its cause.

All fault signals, with the exception of:

F501 AuxUnderVolt,
F525 TypeCode,
F547 HwFailure and
F548 FwFailure
are resetable in case the fault is eliminated.
To reset a fault following steps are required:
remove the Run and On commands [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 and 0]
eliminate the faults
acknowledge the fault with Reset [UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7] via digital input,
overriding control system or in Local mode with control panel, DriveWindow or
DriveWindow Light
depending on the systems condition, generate Run and On commands
[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 3 and 0] again

The fault signals will switch the drive off completely or partly depending on its trip level.
Trip level 1:
- main contactor is switched off immediately
- field contactor is switched off immediately
- fan contactor is switched off immediately
Trip level 2:
- main contactor is switched off immediately
- field contactor is switched off immediately
- fan contactor stays on as long as the fault is pending or as long as FanDly (21.14)
is running
Trip level 3:
The drive is stopping via SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) , thus the
- main contactor is switched off immediately
- field contactor is switched off immediately in case of SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) =
CoastStop, but it stays on in case of field heating or SpeedFbFltMode (30.36) =
DynBraking
- fan contactor stays on
At standstill the
- main contactor cannot be switched on again
- field contactor stays on in case of field heating
- fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly (21.14) is running
Trip level 4:
As long as the drive is stopping via FaultStopMode (30.30) , the
- main contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode (30.30) =
CoastStop or DynBraking, but it stays on in case of FaultStopMode (30.30) =
RampStop or TorqueLimit
- field contactor is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode (30.30) =
CoastStop, but it stays on in case of field heating or FaultStopMode (30.30) =

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 262

RampStop, TorqueLimit or DynBraking

- fan contactor stays is switched off immediately in case of FaultStopMode (30.30) =
CoastStop, but stays on in case of FaultStopMode (30.30) = RampStop,
TorqueLimit or DynBraking
At standstill the
- main contactor is switched off immediately
- field contactor stays on in case of field heating
- fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly (21.14) is running
Trip level 5
As long as the drive is stopping via any communication loss control [LocalLossCtrl (30.27),
ComLossCtrl (30.28), Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05) or Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15)], the
- main contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected
communication loss control
- field contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected
communication loss control, but it stays on in case of field heating
- fan contactor is switched off immediately or stays on depending on the selected
communication loss control
At standstill
- main contactor is switched off immediately
- field contactor stays on in case of field heating
- fan contactor stays on as long as FanDly (21.14) is running

In case a fault occurs, it stays active until the cause is eliminated an a Reset
[UsedMCW (7.04) bit 7] is given

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 263

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F501 501 AuxUnderVolt Auxiliary undervoltage: 9.01, RdyRun = 1 1

The auxiliary voltage (115VAC or 230 VAC) is too low bit 0
(threshold see hardware manual) while the drive is in
operation. If resetting fails, check:
- internal auxiliary voltages (SDCS-CON-4)
- and change SDCS-CON-4 and / or SDCS-PIN-4
respectively SDCS-POW-4 board
F502 502 ArmOverCur Armature overcurrent: 9.01, always 3
Check: bit 1
- ArmOvrCurLev (30.09)
- parameter settings of group 43 (current control:
armature current controller tuning)
- current and torque limitation in group 20
- all connections in the armature circuit
- for faulty thyristors
- armature cabling
- in case of a rebuild kit proper connection of firing
pulses and CT’s
F503 503 ArmOverVolt Armature overvoltage (DC): 9.01, always 1
Check: bit 2
- if setting of ArmOvrVoltLev (30.09) is suitable for
the system
- parameter settings of group 44 (field excitation:
field current controller tuning, EMF controller
tuning, flux linearization)
- too high field current (e.g. problems with field
weakening)
- if the motor was accelerated by the load,
- overspeed
- does the speed scaling fit, see SpeedScaleAct
(2.29)
- proper armature voltage feedback
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
- cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS-
PIN-51
F504 504 Converter overtemperature: 9.01, always 2
ConvOverTemp Wait until the converter is cooled down. bit 3
Shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17) .
Check:
- converter door open
- converter fan supply voltage
- converter fan direction of rotation
- converter fan components
- converter cooling air inlet (filter)
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- connector X12 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X22 on SDCS-PIN-4/51

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 264

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F505 505 ResCurDetect Residual current detection (sum of IL1, IL2, IL3 9.01, always 1
zero): bit 4
Check:
- ResCurDetectSel (30.05) , ResCurDetectLim
(30.06) , ResCurDetectDel (30.07)
- sum current transformer, if necessary change
transformer or SDCS-IOB-3
- disconnect the mains, verify zero voltage in
armature and field circuits and make insulation
tests for the complete installation
F506 506 M1OverTemp Motor 1 measured overtemperature: 9.01, always 2
Wait until the motor is cooled down. The motor fan will bit 5
continue to work until the motor is cooled down to
alarm limit.
Check:
- M1FaultLimTemp (31.07) , M1KlixonSel (31.08)
- motor temperature
- motor fan supply voltage
- motor fan direction of rotation
- motor fan components
- motor cooling air inlet (filter)
- motor temperature sensors and cabling
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-IOB-3
F507 507 M1OverLoad Motor 1 calculated overload: 9.01, always 2
Wait until the motor is cooled down. The motor fan will bit 6
continue to work until the motor is calculated down to
alarm limit.
Check:
- M1FaultLimLoad (31.04)
F508 508 I/OBoardLoss I/O board not found or faulty: 9.01, always 1
Check: bit 7
- CommModule (98.02), DIO ExtModule1 (98.03) ,
DIO ExtModule2 (98.04) , AIO ExtModule (98.06)
, AIO MotTempMeas (98.12) , IO BoardConfig
(98.15)
- flat cable connections between SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-IOB-2/3

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 265

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F509 509 M2OverTemp Motor 2 measured overtemperature: 9.01, always 2

Wait until the motor is cooled down. The motor fan will bit 8
continue to work until the motor is cooled down to
alarm limit.
Check:
- M2FaultLimTemp (49.37) , M2KlixonSel (49.38)
- motor temperature (let motor cool down and
restart)
- motor fan supply voltage
- motor fan direction of rotation
- motor fan components
- motor cooling air inlet (filter)
- motor temperature sensors and cabling
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-IOB-3
F510 510 M2OverLoad Motor 2 calculated overload: 9.01, always 2
Wait until the motor is cooled down. The motor fan will bit 9
continue to work until the motor is cooled down to
alarm limit.
Check:
- M2FaultLimLoad (49.34)
F511 511 ConvFanCur Converter fan current: 9.01, RdyRun = 1 4
only with ConvTempDly (97.05) 0 and a PW- bit 10
10002/3 board connected to SDCS-PIN-4/51.
Check:
- converter fan supply voltage
- converter fan direction of rotation
- converter fan components
- converter cooling air inlet
- connector X12 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X22 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
F512 512 MainsLowVolt Mains low (under-) voltage (AC): 9.01, RdyRun = 1 3
Check: bit 11
- PwrLossTrip (30.21) , UNetMin1 (30.22) ,
UNetMin2 (30.23)
- If all 3 phases are present
- if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance
- if the main contactor closes and opens
- if the mains voltage scaling is correct
[NomMainsVolt (99.10)]
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
- cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS-
PIN-51

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 266

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F513 513 MainsOvrVolt Mains overvoltage (AC): 9.01, RdyRun = 1 1

Actual mains voltage is > 1.3 * NomMainsVolt (99.10) bit 12
for more than 10 s and RdyRun = 1.
Check:
- if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance
- if the mains voltage scaling is correct
[NomMainsVolt (99.10)]
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
- cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS-
PIN-51
F514 514 MainsNotSync Mains not in synchronism (AC): 9.01, RdyRun = 1 3
The synchronization with the mains frequency has bit 13
been lost.
Check:
- DevLimPLL (97.13)
- mains supply
- fuses etc
- mains frequency (50Hz 5Hz; 60Hz 5Hz) and
stability (df/dt = 17%/s) [PLLOut (3.20)]
F515 515 Motor 1 field exciter overcurrent: 9.01, RdyRun = 1 1
M1FexOverCur Check: bit 14
- M1FldOvrCurLev (30.13) ,
- parameter settings of group 44 (field excitation:
field current controller tuning)
- connections of field exciter
- insulation of cables and field winding
- resistance of field winding
F516 516 M1FexCom Motor 1 field exciter communication loss: 9.01, RdyRun = 1 1
Check: bit 15
- FexTimeOut (94.07)
- flat cable connections between SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-PIN-4
- auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field
exciter
- DCSLink cable connections
- DCSLink termination set dip switch S1100:1 =
ON (DCF803-0035 and FEX-425-Int)
- DCSLink node ID settings [DCSLinkNodeID
(94.01) , M1FexNode (94.08) respectively
switches S800 and S801 on DCF803-0035 and
FEX-425-Int]

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 267

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F517 517 ArmCurRipple Armature current ripple: 9.02, RdyRef = 1 3

One or several thyristors may carry no current. bit 0
Check:
- CurRippleSel (30.18) ,CurRippleLim (30.19)
- for too high gain of current controller
[M1KpArmCur (43.06)]
- current feedback with oscilloscope (6 pulses
within one cycle visible?)
- branch fuses
- thyristor gate-cathode resistance
- thyristor gate connection
- current transformers (T51, T52)
F518 518 Motor 2 field exciter overcurrent: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 1
M2FexOverCur Check: bit 1
- M2FldOvrCurLev (49.09)
- parameter settings of group 49 (field excitation:
field current controller tuning)
- connections of field exciter
- insulation of cables and field winding
- resistance of field winding
F519 519 M2FexCom Motor 2 field exciter communication loss: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 1
Check: bit 2
- FexTimeOut (94.07)
- flat cable connections between SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-PIN-4
- auxiliary voltage for integrated and external field
exciter
- DCSLink cable connections
- DCSLink termination
- DCSLink node ID settings [DCSLinkNodeID
(94.01) , M2FexNode (94.09)]
F521 521 FieldAck Selected motor, field acknowledge missing: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 1
Check: bit 4
- M1UsedFexType (99.12) , if selection matches
the field exciter type, Mot1FexStatus (6.12) ,
Mot2FexStatus (6.13)
- fault message of or at field exciter
F522 522 SpeedFb Selected motor, speed feedback: 9.02, always 3
The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse bit 5
encoder or analog tacho has failed.
Check:
- M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) , SpeedFbFltMode
(30.36) , SpeedFbFltSel (30.17)
- pulse encoder: encoder itself, alignment, cabling,
coupling, power supply (feedback might be too
low), mechanical disturbances
- analog tacho: tacho itself, tacho polarity and
voltage, alignment, cabling, coupling, mechanical
disturbances, jumper S1 on SDCS-CON-4
- EMF: connection converter - armature circuit
closed
- SDCS-CON-4, SDCS-IOB-3, SDCS-POW-4

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 268

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F523 523 ExtFanAck External fan acknowledge missing: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 4

Check: bit 6
- MotFanAck (10.06)
- external fan contactor
- external fan circuit
- external fan supply voltage
- used digital inputs and outputs (group 14)
F524 524 MainContAck Main contactor acknowledge missing: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 3
Check: bit 7
- MainContAck (10.21)
- switch on - off sequence
- auxiliary contactor (relay) switching the main
contactor after On/Off command
- safety relays
- used digital inputs and outputs (group 14)
F525 525 TypeCode Type code mismatch: 9.02, always 1
Check: bit 8
- TypeCode (97.01) setting
F526 526 ExternalDI External fault via binary input: 9.02, Always or 1
There is no problem with the drive itself! bit 9 RdyRun = 1
Check:
- ExtFaultSel (30.31) , ExtFaultOnSel (30.33)
F527 527 ConvFanAck Converter fan acknowledge missing: 9.02, RdyRun = 1 4
Check: bit 10
- ConvFanAck (10.20)
- converter fan contactor
- converter fan circuit
- converter fan klixon
- converter fan supply voltage
- used digital inputs and outputs (group 14)
F528 528 FieldBusCom Fieldbus communication loss: 9.02, always if FB 5
F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first bit 11 TimeOut
dataset from the overriding control is received by the (30.35) 0
drive. Before the first dataset is received only A128
FieldBusCom is active. The reason is to suppress
unnecessary faults (the starts up of the overriding
control is usually slower than the one of the drive).
Check:
- ComLossCtrl (30.28) , FB TimeOut (30.35),
CommModule (98.02)
- parameter settings of group 51 (fieldbus)
- fieldbus cable
- fieldbus termination
- fieldbus module
F529 529 M1FexNotOK Motor 1 field exciter not okay: 9.02, always 1
A fault was found during self-diagnosis of field exciter bit 12
or power failure in field exciter 1.
Check:
- field exciter operation and change the field
exciter, if necessary

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 269

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F530 530 M2FexNotOK Motor 2 field exciter not okay: 9.02, always 1
A fault was found during self-diagnosis of field exciter bit 13
or power failure in field exciter 2.
Check:
- field exciter operation and change the field
exciter, if necessary
F531 531 MotorStalled Selected motor, motor stalled: 9.02, RdyRef = 1 3
The motor torque exceeded StallTorq (30.03) for a bit 14
time longer than StallTime (30.01) while the speed
feedback was below StallSpeed (30.02) .
Check:
- motor stalled (mechanical couplings of the motor)
- proper conditions of load
- correct field current
- parameter settings of group 20 (limits: current
and torque limits)
F532 532 Selected motor, motor overspeed: 9.02, always 3
MotOverSpeed Check: bit 15
- M1OvrSpeed (30.16)
- parameter settings of group 24 (speed control:
speed controller)
- scaling of speed controller loop [SpeedScaleAct
(2.29)]
- drive speed [MotSpeed (1.04)] vs. measured
motor speed (hand held tacho)
- field current
- speed feedback (encoder, tacho)
- connection of speed feedback
- if the motor was accelerated by the load
- in case of EMF control if the DC-voltage
measurement (C1, D1) might be swapped
F533 533 ReversalTime Reversal time: 9.03, RdyRef = 1 3
Current direction not changed before ZeroCurTimeOut bit 0
(97.19) plus RevDly (43.14) is elapsed or 12P
RevTimeOut (47.05) is elapsed.
Check:
- for high inductive motor
- too high motor voltage compared to mains
voltage
F534 534 12PCurDiff 12-pulse current difference (only for 12-pulse 9.03, always 3
parallel operation): bit 1
Check:
- DiffCurLim (47.02) , DiffCurDly (47.03)
- parameter settings of group 43 (current control:
armature current controller),

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 270

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F535 535 12PCom 12-pulse communication: 9.03, RdyOn = 1 3

Check: bit 2
- 12P TimeOut (94.03)
- DCSLink cable connections
- DCSLink termination
- DCSLink node ID settings [DCSLinkNodeID
(94.01) , 12P SlaNode (94.04)]
F536 536 12PSlaveFail 12-pulse slave failure: 9.03, RdyOn = 1 4
12-pulse master is tripped by a fault of the 12-pulse bit 3
slave.
Check:
- Fault logger of 12-pulse slave
F537 537 Motor 1 field exciter ready lost: 9.03, RdyRun = 1 1
M1FexRdyLost Field exciter lost ready-for-operation message while bit 4
working.
AC-voltage missing or not in synchronism.
Check:
- if all phases are present
- if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance
F538 538 Motor 2 field exciter ready lost: 9.03, RdyRun = 1 1
M2FexRdyLost Field exciter lost ready-for-operation message while bit 5
working.
AC-voltage missing or not in synchronism.
Check:
- if all phases are present
- if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance
F539 539 FastCurRise Fast current rise: 9.03, RdyRef = 1 1
Actual current di/dt too fast. bit 6 and
Check: generating
- ArmCurRiseMax (30.10)
F540 540 COM8Faulty SDCS-COM-8 faulty or not found: 9.03, RdyOn = 1 1
Check: bit 7
- SysComBoard (98.16)
- and change SDCS-COM-8 and / or SDCS-CON-
4
F541 541 Motor 1 field exciter low (under-) current: 9.03, always 1
M1FexLowCur Check: bit 8
- M1FldMinTrip (30.12) , FldMinTripDly (45.18)
- parameter settings of group 44 (field excitation:
field current controller tuning, EMF controller
tuning, flux linearization)
- motor name plate for minimum current at
maximum field weakening (maximum speed)
- field circuit fuses
- if the field current oscillates
- if the motor has a high armature reaction

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 271

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F542 542 Motor 2 field exciter low (under-) current: 9.03, always 1
M2FexLowCur Check: bit 9
- M2FldMinTrip (49.08) , FldMinTripDly (45.18)
- parameter settings of group 44 (field excitation:
field current controller tuning, EMF controller
tuning, flux linearization)
- motor name plate for minimum current at
maximum field weakening (maximum speed)
- field circuit fuses
- if the field current oscillates
- if the motor has a high armature reaction
F543 543 COM8Com SDCS-COM-8 communication (overriding control 9.03, RdyOn = 1 5
and master-follower): bit 10
Check:
- Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0TimeOut (70.04),
Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2TimeOut (70.14)
- fiber optic cables to overriding control (channel
0),
- overriding control adapters,
- fiber optic cables between master and followers
(channel 2)
F544 544 Peer to peer and master-follower communication 9.03, always 5
P2PandMFCom loss: bit 11
Check:
- ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
- DCSLink cable connections
- DCSLink termination
- DCSLink node ID settings [DCSLinkNodeID
(94.01)]
F545 545 ApplLoadFail Application load failure: 9.03, always 1
Check: bit 12
- Diagnosis (9.11)
F546 546 Local command loss: 9.03, local 5
LocalCmdLoss Connection fault with control panel, DriveWindow or bit 13
DriveWindow Light.
Check:
- LocalLossCtrl (30.27)
- if control panel is disconnected,
- connection adapter
- cables
F547 547 HwFailure Hardware failure: 9.03, always 1
For more details check Diagnosis (9.11) . bit 14
F548 548 FwFailure Firmware failure: 9.03, always 1
For more details check Diagnosis (9.11). bit 15

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 272

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F549 549 ParComp Parameter compatibility: 9.04, always 1

When setting parameters or during power-up the bit 0
firmware attempts to write their values. If the setting is
not possible or not compatible the parameter is set to
default. The parameters causing the fault can be
identified in Diagnosis (9.11).
Check:
- parameter setting
F550 550 ParMemRead Parameter memory read: 9.04, always 1
Reading the actual parameter set or a user parameter bit 1
set from either parameter flash or Memory Card failed
(checksum fault)
Check:
- Memory Card and
- SDCS-CON-4
F551 551 AIRange Analog input range: 9.04, always 4
Undershoot of one of the analog input values under bit 2
4mA / 2V.
Check:
- AI Mon4mA (30.29)
- used analog inputs connections and cables
- polarity of connection
F552 552 MechBrake Selected motor, mechanical brake: 9.04, always 3
Acknowledge brake applied (closed) is missing or bit 3
torque actual does not reach StrtTorqRef (42.08),
during torque proving.
Check:
- BrakeFaultFunc (42.06) , StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
- brake
- brake cabling
- used digital inputs and outputs (group 14)
F553 553 TachPolarity Selected motor, tacho polarity: 9.04, always 3
Polarity of analog tacho signal incorrect. bit 4
Check:
- polarity of tacho cable
- polarity of armature and field cables
- direction of motor rotation
F554 554 TachoRange Selected motor, tacho range: 9.04, always 3
Overflow of AITacho input bit 5
Check:
- for the right connections (X3:1 to X3:4) on the
SDCS-CON-4
F601 601 APFault1 User defined fault by Adaptive Program 9.04, always 1
bit 11
F602 602 APFault2 User defined fault by Adaptive Program 9.04, always 1
bit 12
F603 603 APFault3 User defined fault by Adaptive Program 9.04, always 1
bit 13
F604 604 APFault4 User defined fault by Adaptive Program 9.04, always 1
bit 14

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 273

Fault- Fault is active

Triplevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

F605 605 APFault5 User defined fault by Adaptive Program 9.04, always 1
bit 15
F610 610 UserFault1 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 0
F611 611 UserFault2 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 1
F612 612 UserFault3 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 2
F613 613 UserFault4 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 3
F614 614 UserFault5 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 4
F615 615 UserFault6 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 5
F616 616 UserFault7 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 6
F617 617 UserFault8 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 7
F618 618 UserFault9 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 8
F619 619 UserFault10 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 9
F620 620 UserFault11 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 10
F621 621 UserFault12 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 11
F622 622 UserFault13 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 12
F623 623 UserFault14 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 13
F624 624 UserFault15 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 14
F625 625 UserFault16 User defined fault by application program 9.05, always 1
bit 15

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 274

Alarm signals (A)

An alarm is a message, that a condition occurred, which may lead to a dangerous situation.
It is displayed and written into the fault logger. However, the cause for the alarm can inhibit
the drive from continuing with normal operation. If the cause of the alarm disappears the
alarm will be automatically reset.

The alarm handling must provides 4 alarm levels.

Alarm level 1:
the main contactor cannot be switched on again, after the drive stopped (no re-
start possible)
Alarm level 2:
fan contactor stays on as long as the alarm is pending
if the alarm disappears FanDly (21.14) will start
Alarm level 3:
AutoReclosing (auto re-start) is [AuxStatWord (8.02) bit 15] active
RdyRun [MainStatWord (8.01) bit 1] is disabled, but the drive is automatically
restarted when the alarm condition vanishes
is set to 150°
single firing pulses
Alarm level 4:
drive keeps on running and the alarm is indicated

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 275

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A101 101 Off2ViaDI Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast stop) pending via 9.06, RdyRun = 1 1
digital input - start inhibition: bit 0
There is no problem with the drive itself!
Check:
- Off2 (10.08), if necessary invert the signal (group
10)
A102 102 Off3ViaDI Off3 (E-stop) pending via digital input: 9.06, RdyRun = 1 1
There is no problem with the drive itself! bit 1
Check:
- E Stop (10.09), if necessary invert the signal
(group 10)
A103 103 DCBreakAck Selected motor, DC-Breaker acknowledge missing: 9.06, RdyRef = 1 3
is set to 150°; single firing pulses bit 2
Check:
- DCBreakAck (10.23), if necessary invert the
signal (group 10)
A104 104 Converter overtemperature: 9.06, always 2
ConvOverTemp Wait until the converter is cooled down. bit 3
Shutdown temperature see MaxBridgeTemp (4.17) .
The converter overtemperature alarm will already
appear at approximately 5°C below the shutdown
temperature.
Check:
- ConvFanAck (10.20)
- converter door open
- converter fan supply voltage
- converter fan direction of rotation
- converter fan components
- converter cooling air inlet (filter)
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- connector X12 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X22 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
A105 105 DynBrakeAck Selected motor, dynamic braking is still pending: 9.06, RdyRun = 1 1
This alarm prevents the drive to be started or re- bit 4
started while dynamic breaking is active.
Check:
- DynBrakeAck (10.22)

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 276

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A106 106 M1OverTemp Motor 1 measured overtemperature: 9.06, always 2

Check: bit 5
- M1AlarmLimTemp (31.06)
- motor temperature
- motor fan supply voltage
- motor fan direction of rotation
- motor fan components
- motor cooling air inlet (filter)
- motor temperature sensors and cabling
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-IOB-3
A107 107 M1OverLoad Motor 1 calculated overload: 9.06, always 2
Check: bit 6
- M1AlarmLimLoad (31.04)
A109 109 M2OverTemp Motor 2 measured overtemperature: 9.06, always 2
Check: bit 8
- M2AlarmLimTemp (49.36)
- motor temperature
- motor fan supply voltage
- motor fan direction of rotation
- motor fan components
- motor cooling air inlet (filter)
- motor temperature sensors and cabling
- ambient temperature
- inadmissible load cycle
- inputs for temperature sensors on SDCS-CON-4
and SDCS-IOB-3
A110 110 M2OverLoad Motor 2 calculated overload: 9.06, always 2
Check: bit 9
- M2AlarmLimLoad (49.33)
A111 111 MainsLowVolt Mains low (under-) voltage (AC): 9.06, RdyRun = 1 3
is set to 150°; single firing pulses bit 10
Check:
- PwrLossTrip (30.21), UNetMin1 (30.22),
UNetMin2 (30.23),
- If all 3 phases are present
- if the mains voltage is within the set tolerance
- if the main contactor closes and opens
- if the mains voltage scaling is correct
[NomMainsVolt (99.10)]
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-CON-4
- connector X12 and X13 on SDCS-PIN-4/51
- cutting of resistors for voltage coding on SDCS-
PIN-51

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 277

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A112 112 Peer to peer and master-follower communication 9.06, always 4

P2PandMFCom loss: bit 11
Check:
- ComLossCtrl (30.28), MailBoxCycle1 (94.13),
MailBoxCycle2 (94.19), MailBoxCycle3 (94.25),
MailBoxCycle4 (94.31)
- DCSLink cable connections
- DCSLink termination
- DCSLink node ID settings [DCSLinkNodeID
(94.01)]
A113 113 COM8Com SDCS-COM-8 communication (overriding control 9.06, always 4
and master-follower): bit 12
Check:
- Ch0ComLossCtrl (70.05), Ch0TimeOut (70.04),
Ch2ComLossCtrl (70.15), Ch2TimeOut (70.14)
- fiber optic cables to overriding control (channel 0)
- overriding control adapters
- fiber optic cables between master and followers
(channel 2)
A114 114 ArmCurDev Armature Current Deviation: 9.06, RdyRef = 1 3
bit 13
Is shown, if the current reference [CurRefUsed (3.12)]
differs from current actual [MotCur (1.06)] for longer
than 5 sec by more than 20% of nominal motor
current.
is set to 150°; single firing pulses
Check:
- ratio between mains supply voltage and EMF
- ArmAlphaMin (20.15) is set too high
A115 115 TachoRange Selected motor, tacho range: 9.06, always 4
If A115 TachoRange comes up for longer than 10 bit 14
seconds there is an overflow of the AITacho input.
Check:
- for the right connections (X3:1 to X3:4) on the
SDCS-CON-4
If A115 TachoRange comes up for 10 seconds and
vanishes again M1OvrSpeed (30.16) or M2OvrSpeed
(49.21) has been changed. In this case a new tacho
fine tuning has to be done [ServiceMode (99.06) =
TachFineTune].
A117 117 ArmCurRipple Armature current ripple: 9.07, RdyRef = 1 4
One or several thyristors may carry no current. bit 0
Check:
- CurRippleSel (30.18) ,CurRippleLim (30.19)
- for too high gain of current controller
[M1KpArmCur (43.06)]
- current feedback with oscilloscope (6 pulses
within one cycle visible?)
- branch fuses
- thyristor gate-cathode resistance
- thyristor gate connection
- current transformers (T51, T52)

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 278

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A118 118 Found new application on Memory Card: 9.07, directly after 1
FoundNewAppl Activate application on Memory Card by means of bit 1 energizing of
ParSave (16.06) = EableAppl auxiliary
supply
A119 119 ApplDiff Application on drive and Memory Card are 9.07, directly after 1
different: bit 2 energizing of
Activate application on Memory Card by means of auxiliary
ParSave (16.06) = EableAppl supply
A120 120 OverVoltProt Overvoltage protection active: 9.07, always 3
Overvoltage protection DCF806 is active and bit 3
converter is blocked.
is set to 150°; single firing pulses
Check:
- OvrVoltProt (10.13) if necessary invert the signal
(group 10)
- field converter cables and connections
A121 121 AutotuneFail Autotuning failed: 9.07, always 4
For more details check Diagnosis (9.11) bit 4
To clear the alarm set ServiceMode (99.06) =
NormalMode
A122 122 MechBrake Selected motor, mechanical brake: 9.07, always 4
Acknowledge brake applied (closed) is missing or bit 5
torque actual does not reach StrtTorqRef (42.08),
during torque proving.
Check:
- BrakeFaultFunc (42.06) , StrtTorqRefSel (42.07)
- brake
- brake cabling
- used digital inputs and outputs (group 14)
A123 123 FaultSuppres Fault suppressed: 9.07, always 4
At least one fault message is mask. bit 6
Check:
- FaultMask (30.25)
A124 124 SpeedScale Speed scaling out of range: 9.07, always 3
The parameters causing the alarm can be identified in bit 7
Diagnosis (9.11).
is set to 150°; single firing pulses
Check:
- M1SpeedMin (20.01), M1SpeedMax (20.02),
M2BaseSpeed (49.03), M2SpeedMin (49.19),
M2SpeedMax (49.20), M2SpeedScale (49.22),
M1SpeedScale (50.01), M1BaseSpeed (99.04)

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 279

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A125 125 SpeedFb Selected motor, speed feedback: 9.07, always 4

The comparison of the speed feedback from pulse bit 8
encoder or analog tacho has failed.
Check:
- M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) , SpeedFbFltMode
(30.36) , SpeedFbFltSel (30.17)
- pulse encoder: encoder itself, alignment, cabling,
coupling, power supply (feedback might be too
low), mechanical disturbances
- analog tacho: tacho itself, tacho polarity and
voltage, alignment, cabling, coupling, mechanical
disturbances, jumper S1 on SDCS-CON-4
- EMF: connection converter - armature circuit
closed
- SDCS-CON-4, SDCS-IOB-3, SDCS-POW-4
A126 126 ExternalDI External fault via binary input: 9.07, always 4
There is no problem with the drive itself! bit 9
Check:
- ExtFaultSel (30.31) , fault = 0, ExtFaultOnSel
(30.33)
A127 127 AIRange Analog input range: 9.07, always 4
Undershoot of one of the analog input values under bit 10
4mA / 2V.
Check:
- AI Mon4mA (30.29)
- used analog inputs connections and cables
- polarity of connection
A128 128 FieldBusCom Fieldbus communication loss: 9.07, always if FB 4
F528 FieldBusCom is only activated after the first bit 11 TimeOut
dataset from the overriding control is received by the (30.35) 0
drive. Before the first dataset is received only A128
FieldBusCom is active. The reason is to suppress
unnecessary faults (the starts up of the overriding
control is usually slower than the one of the drive).
Check:
- ComLossCtrl (30.28) , FB TimeOut (30.35) ,
CommModule (98.02)
- parameter settings of group 51 (fieldbus)
- fieldbus cable
- fieldbus termination
- fieldbus module
A129 129 ParRestored Parameter restored: 9.07, always 4
The parameters found in the flash memory were bit 12
invalid at power-up (checksum fault). All parameters
were restored from the parameter backup.

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 280

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A130 130 Local command loss: 9.07, local 4

LocalCmdLoss Connection fault with control panel, DriveWindow or bit 13
DriveWindow Light.
Check:
- LocalLossCtrl (30.27)
- if control panel is disconnected
- connection adapter
- cables
A131 131 ParAdded Parameter added: 9.07, after 4
A new firmware with a different amount of parameters bit 14 download of
was downloaded. The new parameters are set to their firmware for
default values. The parameters causing the alarm can max. 10 s
be identified in Diagnosis (9.11).
Check:
- new parameters and set them to the desired
values
A132 132 ParConflict Parameter setting conflict: 9.07, always 4
Is triggered by parameter settings conflicting with other bit 15
parameters. The parameters causing the alarm can be
identified in Diagnosis (9.11).
A134 134 ParComp Parameter compatibility: 9.08, after 4
When downloading parameter sets the firmware bit 1 download of a
attempts to write the parameters. If the setting is not parameter set
possible or not compatible the parameter is set to for max. 10 s
default. The parameters causing the alarm can be
identified in Diagnosis (9.11) .
Check:
- parameter setting
A135 135 Parameter up- or download failed: 9.08, after up- or 4
ParUpDwnLoad The checksum verification failed during up- or bit 2 download of
download of parameters. Please try again. parameters for
Two or more parameter set actions were requested at max. 10 s
the same time. Please try again.
A136 136 Adaptive program task time not set: 9.08, always 4
NoAPTaskTime The task time for the Adaptive Program is not set, bit 3
while the Adaptive Program is started.
Check:
- that TimeLevSel (83.04) is set to 5ms, 20ms,
100ms or 500ms when AdapProgCmd (83.01) is
set to Start, SingleCycle or SingleStep
A137 137 Speed not zero: 9.08, Not active if 1
SpeedNotZero Re-start of drive is not possible. Speed zero has not bit 4 RdyRef = 1
been reached [only in case FlyStart (21.10) =
StartFrom0].
Check:
- ZeroSpeedLim (20.03)
- FlyStart (21.10)
- M1SpeedFbSel (50.03)
- M2SpeedFbSel (49.24)

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 281

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A138 138 Off2FieldBus Off2 (Emergency Off / Coast Stop) pending via 9.08, RdyRun = 1 1
MainCtrlWord (7.01) / fieldbus - start inhibition: bit 5
There is no problem with the drive itself!
Check:
- MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit1 Off2N
A139 139 Off3FieldBus Off3 (E-stop) pending via MainCtrlWord (7.01) / 9.08, RdyRun = 1 1
fieldbus: bit 6
There is no problem with the drive itself!
Check:
- MainCtrlWord (7.01) bit2 Off3N
A140 140 IllgFieldBus Illegal fieldbus settings: 9.08, always 4
The fieldbus parameters in group 51 (fieldbus) are not bit 7
set according to the fieldbus adapter or the device has
not been selected.
Check:
- group 51 (fieldbus)
- configuration of fieldbus adapter
A141 141 COM8FwVer SDCS-COM-8 firmware version conflict: 9.08, always 4
Invalid combination of SDCS-CON-4 firmware and bit 8
SDCS-COM-8 firmware.
Check:
- for valid combination of SDCS-CON-4
[FirmwareVer (4.01)] and SDCS-COM-8
[Com8SwVersion (4.11)] firmware version
according to the release notes
A142 142 MemCardMiss Memory Card missing: 9.08, directly after 1
There is an application loaded in the drive. The bit 9 energizing of
Memory Card belonging to the application is not found. electronics
Check:
- if the Memory Card is properly plugged into the
SDCS-CON-4 (X20)
A143 143 MemCardFail Memory Card failure: 9.08, directly after 1
Checksum failure or wrong Memory Card bit 10 energizing of
Check: electronics
- Memory Card
- if proper ABB Memory Card is used
A301 301 APAlarm1 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9.08, always 4
bit 11
A302 302 APAlarm2 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9.08, always 4
bit 12
A303 303 APAlarm3 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9.08, always 4
bit 13
A304 304 APAlarm4 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9.08, always 4
bit 14
A305 305 APAlarm5 User defined alarm by Adaptive Program 9.08, always 4
bit 15
A310 310 UserAlarm1 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 0
A311 311 UserAlarm1 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 1

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 282

Alarmlevel
7- Text on control panel, Definition / Action Alarm- Alarm is active
segment DriveWindow and word when
display DriveWindow Light

A312 312 UserAlarm2 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 2
A313 313 UserAlarm3 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 3
A314 314 UserAlarm4 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 4
A315 315 UserAlarm5 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 5
A316 316 UserAlarm6 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 6
A317 317 UserAlarm7 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 7
A318 318 UserAlarm8 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 8
A319 319 UserAlarm9 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 9
A320 320 UserAlarm10 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 10
A321 321 UserAlarm11 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 11
A322 322 UserAlarm12 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 12
A323 323 UserAlarm13 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 13
A324 324 UserAlarm14 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 14
A325 325 UserAlarm16 User defined fault by application program 9.09, always 4
bit 15

Fault tracing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 SPEED REFERENCE CHAIN SPEED CONTROL
Speed reference selection Speed ramp Speed controller

Jog1 (10.17) ACW1 B4

DroopRate 24.02
Jog2 (10.18)
Limiter MCW B8, B9 Limiter
Ref1Sel (11.03) Acc/Dec/Shape Window control PID-controller
ACW2 B10

Panel, DW, DWL

23.01 SpeedRef2301 Speed
23.13 AuxSpeedRef SpeedRefExt1 Ramp RampOut
SpeedRef2 SpeedRef3 SpeedRef4 Filter

0 = open
-

SpeedRefUsed
AI1…AI6 2.30 + TorqIntegRef
23.02 FixedSpeed1 2.17 2.01 2.32 2.02 2.18 2.05 2.09
FixedSpeed2
PI Limiter
23.03 + + -
MotPot M1SpeedMin
+ 2.04 TorqRef2
20.01 M1SpeedMin 20.01
AuxRef-AI1 TorqPropRef
0 0
reserved 20.02 M1SpeedMax MCW B5 M1SpeedMax
Hold 20.02 2.03
MinAI2AI4 TorqDerRef 20.07 TorqMaxSPC
To torque control chain

MaxAI2AI4 Local MCW B6 23.15 23.04 (-1) D

SpeedErrNeg 23.10 2.06
AI1Direct+ DirectSpeedRef SpeedCorr SpeedStep 20.08 TorqMinSPC
MCW B4 23.06 SpeedErrFilt
AI2Direct+
22.01 AccTime1
23.07 WindowIntgOn
22.02 DecTime1
Ref1Mux (11.02) 23.08 WinWidthPos ACW B6 HoldSpeedCtrl
22.03 RampTimeScale
Open 23.09 WinWidthNeg 24.11 BalRef
Close 22.04 E StopRamp
DI1…DI8 23.12 ACW B8 BalSpeedCtrl
WindowCtrlMode
MCW Bit11…Bit15 22.05 ShapeTime 2.08 TorqRef1
ACW Bit12…Bit15 -
Torque selector = Add
22.07 VarSlopeRate
2.19 TorqMaxAll
ACWB3 BalRampOut Acceleration
compensation -
22.08 BalRampRef
ACWB2 RampBypass 2.20 TorqMinAll

Ref2Sel (11.06) 24.03 KpS p-part

Ramp KpS
23.01 SpeedRef2301 24.04 KpSMin
0 = open KpSMin
23.13 AuxSpeedRef
SpeedRefExt2 24.05 KpSWeakp
AI1…AI6 24.14 AccCompDerTime
23.02 FixedSpeed1 TorqRef2 (2.09)
2.31 24.06 KpSWeakpFiltTime KpSWeakp
23.03 FixedSpeed2 24.15 AccCompFiltTime
MotPot Jog 24.09 TiS
AI2-AI3 TorqAccCompRef 2.07 p-part, i-part
AI2+AI3 24.10 TiSInitValue KpSVal
23.02 FixedSpeed1 MinSpeed
AI2*AI3
MinAI2AI4
24.17 KpSTiSMinSpeed
23.03 FixedSpeed2 KpS
MaxAI2AI4 24.18 KpSTiSMaxSpeed TiS
22.12 JogAccTime
24.19 KpSValMinSpeed
Ref1Mux (11.12) JogDecTime
22.13 24.20 TiSVal
TiSValMinSpeed
Invert1102 MinSpeed
Open dv_dt 2.16 24.12 DerivTime
Close speed
24.13 DerivFiltTime KpSTiSMaxSpeed
DI1, …, DI8
MCW Bit11…Bit15 KpSTiSMinSpeed
ACW Bit12…Bit 15

Speed actual selection

internal scaling:
SpeedScaleAct (2.29) == 20000
WinderScale

EMF SpeedActEMF Speed measurement Filter 50.17

MotSpeed ProcSpeed
99.04 M1BaseSpeed 1.02 1.04 1.41
99.02 M1NomVolt 1.03
SpeedActEnc 50.06 SpeedFiltTime
Pulse encoder External Filter
50.03 M1SpeedFbSel
50.02 M1EncMeasMode MotSpeedFilt

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

50.04 M1EncPulseNo 1.01
SpeedActTach
1 second
Analog tacho 1.05

50.12 M1TachAdjust

50.13 M1TachoVolt1000

DCS800_Fw_structure_diagram_rev_c.dsf
Appendix A: Firmware structure diagram

Appendix A – Firmware structure diagram

283
 TORQUE CONTROL CHAIN
Torque selection Torque limitation

TorqRef2 Torque selector TorqRef4 TorqRefUsed

Gear backlash Torque limiter To armature
from speed control 2.09 2.11 compensation 2.13
Speed 1 current control
Torque reference TorqRefExt 0 +
+ 26.08 GearStartTorq
TorqRefA Sel (25.10) 2.24 Filter Torque 2 TorqRef3
Limiter 2.08 10
2 26.09 GearTorqTime
3 2.10
25.01 TorqRefA2501
+ TorqRef1 Min 3 4 56 26.10 GearTorqRamp
TorqRefA 25.03
LoadComp 26.02
AI1…AI6
LoadShare
25.02 TorqRefA FTC
Torque ramp 20.09 Max 4
TorqRefB 25.04 TorqMaxTref 20.22 TorqGenMax
TorqUsedMax
20.10 TorqMinTref
TorqUsedMaxSel (20.18) 2.22 2.19 TorqMaxAll
+ TorqMax
2.19 TorqMaxAll Add 5 2.20
20.05 TorqMax2005 TorqMinAll
+ Min
2.20 TorqMinAll AI1, …, AI6 TorqLimAct 2.26
25.05 TorqRampUp
25.06 TorqRampDown Lim 6 M1CurLimBrdg1 20.12

TorqCorrect (26.15) 2.14

FluxRefFldWeak 3.24 TorqCorr
NotUsed
TorqMux (26.05) TorqMuxMode (26.04)
0% AI1, …, AI6
NotUsed TorqSel 26.01 TorqSel2601 (0…6)
DI1, …, DI11 Speed/Torq (1 or 2)
M1CurLimBrdg2 20.13 Max 97.01
MCW Bit 11, …, MCW Bit15 Speed/Min (1 or 3)
ACW Bit 12, …, ACW Bit 15 Speed/Max (1 or 4) TypeCode=2-Q
TorqUsedMin
Speed/Limit (1 or 6) TorqUsedMinSel (20.19) 2.23
TorqMin
20.06 TorqMin20.06
AI1, …, AI6
Negate [(-1) * (2.22)]

ABB Drive profile control Hand/Auto 10.07 Panel, DW, DWL

AuxCtrlWord (7.02) AuxCtrlWord (7.03) MainCtrlWord (7.01) CommandSel UsedMCW (7.04) Drive Logic CurCtrlStat1 (6.03) MainStatWord (8.01) AuxStatWord (8.02)
10.01

Bit0 RestartDataLog Bit0 reserved Bit0 On (Off1N) Bit0 On (Off1N) Faults Bit0 FansOn Cmd. Bit0 RdyOn Bit0 DataLogReady
OnOff1 10.15 Local
Bit1 TrigDataLog Bit1 reserved Alarms Bit1 reserved Bit1 RdyRun Bit1 OutOfWindow
Bit2 RampBypass Bit2 reserved Bit1 Off2N (Coast Stop) Bit1 Off2N (Coast Stop) 1.04 MotSpeed Bit2 reserved Bit2 RdyRef Bit2 E-StopCoast
Off2 10.08 Local 10.08 AND
Bit3 BalRampOut Bit3 reserved Off2 21.01 Off1Mode Bit3 motor heating Bit3 Tripped Bit3 User1
Bit4 LimSpeedRef4 Bit4 DisableBridge1 Bit2 Off3N (E-Stop) AND Bit2 Off3N (E-Stop) 21.03 StopMode Bit4 field direction Bit4 Off2NStatus Bit4 User2
E Stop 10.09 Local 10.09
Bit5 reserved Bit5 DisableBridge2 E Stop 21.04 E StopMode Bit5 FieldOn Cmd. Bit5 Off3NStatus Bit5 SyncRdy
Bit3 Run Bit3 Run 21.10
Bit6 HoldSpeedCtrl Bit6 reserved StartStop 10.16 Local FlyStart Bit6 dynamic braking Bit6 OnInhibited Bit6 Fex1Act
Bit7 WindowCtrl Bit7 reserved 21.14 FanDly Bit7 MainContactorOn Cmd Bit7 Alarm Bit7 Fex2Ack
Bit4 RampOutZero Bit4 RampOutZero 21.16
Bit8 BalSpeedCtrl Bit8 DriveDirection Bit5 RampHold MainContCtrlMode Bit8 DynamicBrakingOn Cmd Bit8 AtSetpoint Bit8 BrakeCmd
Bit5 RampHold 21.18
Bit9 SyncCommand Bit9 reserved Bit6 RampInZero FldHeatSel Bit9 drive generating Bit9 Remote Bit9 Limiting
Bit6 RampInZero
Bit10 SyncDisable Bit10 DirectSpeedRef Bit7 Reset Bit10 reserved Bit10 AboveLimit Bit10 TorqCtrl
Bit7 Reset OR OR
Bit11 ResetSyncRdy Bit11 reserved Reset 10.03 Local Bit11 firing pulses Bit11 reserved Bit11 ZeroSpeed
Bit12 aux. control Bit12 ForceBrake Bit8 Inching1 Bit8 Inching1 Bit12 continuous current Bit12 reserved Bit12 EMFSpeed
Bit13 aux. control Bit13 reserved Bit9 Inching2 Bit9 Inching2 Bit13 zero current Bit13 reserved Bit13 FaultOrAlarm
Bit14 aux. control Bit14 reserved Bit10 RemoteCmd Bit10 RemoteCmd Bit14 DC-breaker trip cmd Bit14 reserved Bit14 DriveDirectionNeg
Bit15 aux. control Bit15 ResetPIDCtrl Bit11…Bit15 aux. control Bit11…Bit15 aux. control Bit15 DC-breaker trip cmd Bit15 reserved Bit15 AutoReclosing

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

Appendix A – Firmware structure diagram
284
 ARMATURE CURRENT CONTROL

Armature current control Armature current

Filter measurement and 1.11 MainsVoltActRel
MainsVoltActRel 20.14 ArmAlphaMax Mains
motor data voltage 1.12 MainsVoltAct
1.11 20.15 ArmAlphaMin measurement
4.04 ConvNomVolt
43.12 Uk ConvCurActRel
internal scaling: 97.09 MainsComp Converter 1.15
M == 10000 Time 43.13 FiringLimMode current 1.16 ConvCurAct
Mn = 3.25 * M measurement.
max n 4.05 ConvNomCur
+ ArmAlpha
CurRefUsed
from torque Scale CurSel (43.02) di/dt limitation Current limitation Current controller 3.13 Firing unit Bridge Motor data
3.12
limiter
CurRefSlope (43.04) - + 99.01 Language
3.24 FluxRefFldWeak 3.11 CurRef311
43.03 CurRefExt 99.02 M1NomVolt
AI1…AI6
FexCurRef 99.03 M1NomCur
20.12 M1CurLimBrdg1
FluxRefEMF 43.01 OperModeSel
99.04 M1BaseSpeed
20.13 M1CurLimBrdg2 43.14 RevDly
43.05 ControlModeSel 99.10 NomMainsVolt
6.05 SelBridge
43.06 M1KpArmCur 99.11 M1NomFldCur
43.07 M1TiArmCur 99.12 M1UsedFexType
43.17 MaxCurLimSpeed
12-pulse master M1DiscontCurLim
43.08
Local 43.18 ArmCurLimSpeed1
43.24 PwrSupplyRefExt
43.19 ArmCurLimSpeed2
internal scaling:
43.20 ArmCurLimSpeed3 Imot nom== 10000
43.21 ArmCurLimSpeed4 Imax = 3.25 * Imot nom Armature
MotCur
43.22 ArmCurLimSpeed5 current
1.06 measurement
1.04 MotSpeed
1.15 ConvCurActRel
EMF VoltActRel ArmVoltAct ArmVoltActRel
1.17 EMF-calculation 1.14 1.13
43.09 M1ArmL
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv
43.10 M1ArmR

97.25 EMF ActFiltTime M

Motor 1

FIELD CURRENT CONTROL

(one field exciter)
Field current
EMF and flux control is set to zero if
Field current control measurement
ParChange 10.10 internal scaling:
FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix
FldHeatSel 21.18 I == 10000
RevVoltMargin fnom

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

CurCtrlStat1 FluxRefSum M1FldRefMode 45.05 FldCurRefM1
44.21 (6.03), B9 EMF RefSel (44.23) VoltRef1 Opti Mot1FldCurRel
V ref EMF controller 3.27 3.28 Flux linearization 3.30 Motor 1 field exciter Field 1.29
- Panel Local mode 3.25 modification Torque
MainsVoltActRel 3.26 FluxRefEMF + + M1FldHeatRef 44.04 current
B9=1 Field measurement 1.30 Mot1FldCur
1.11 EMF Internal 44.25 VoltCorr
VoltRef2 reversal M1FldRefExt 45.06
VoltRefExt
44.27
Min 44.22
B9=0 44.26 VoltRefSlope
99.02 VoltRefExt AI1, …, AI6 FluxCorr 44.02 M1KpFex
M1NomVolt 44.09 KpEMF
44.03 M1TiFex
44.10 TiEMF
44.07 EMF CtrlPosLim 45.02 M1PosLimCtrl
44.12 FldCurFlux40
44.08 EMF CtrlNegLim
44.13 FldCurFlux70
44.14 FldCurFlux90

is set to maximum flux if

FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix
MotSpeed

1.04 Flux control 3.24

If M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = External, FluxRefFldWeak
then MotSpeed (1.04) can be written to.

99.04 M1BaseSpeed
44.15 FldWeakDyn

Appendix A – Firmware structure diagram

285
 ARMATURE CURRENT CONTROL

Armature current control Armature current

Filter measurement and 1.11 MainsVoltActRel
MainsVoltActRel 20.14 ArmAlphaMax Mains
motor data voltage 1.12 MainsVoltAct
1.11 20.15 ArmAlphaMin measurement
4.04 ConvNomVolt
43.12 Uk ConvCurActRel
internal scaling: 97.09 MainsComp Converter 1.15
M == 10000 Time 43.13 FiringLimMode current 1.16 ConvCurAct
Mn = 3.25 * M measurement.
max n 4.05 ConvNomCur
+ ArmAlpha
CurRefUsed
from torque Scale CurSel (43.02) di/dt limitation Current limitation Current controller 3.13 Firing unit Bridge Motor data
3.12
limiter
CurRefSlope (43.04) - + 99.01 Language
3.24 FluxRefFldWeak 3.11 CurRef311
43.03 CurRefExt 99.02 M1NomVolt
AI1…AI6
FexCurRef 99.03 M1NomCur
20.12 M1CurLimBrdg1
FluxRefEMF 43.01 OperModeSel
99.04 M1BaseSpeed
20.13 M1CurLimBrdg2 43.14 RevDly
43.05 ControlModeSel 99.10 NomMainsVolt
6.05 SelBridge
43.06 M1KpArmCur 99.11 M1NomFldCur
43.07 M1TiArmCur 99.12 M1UsedFexType
43.17 MaxCurLimSpeed
12-pulse master M1DiscontCurLim
43.08
Local 43.18 ArmCurLimSpeed1
43.24 PwrSupplyRefExt
43.19 ArmCurLimSpeed2
internal scaling:
43.20 ArmCurLimSpeed3 Imot nom== 10000
43.21 ArmCurLimSpeed4 Imax = 3.25 * Imot nom Armature
MotCur
43.22 ArmCurLimSpeed5 current
1.06 measurement
1.04 MotSpeed
1.15 ConvCurActRel
EMF VoltActRel ArmVoltAct ArmVoltActRel
1.17 EMF-calculation 1.14 1.13
43.09 M1ArmL
OperModeSel (43.01) = FieldConv
43.10 M1ArmR

97.25 EMF ActFiltTime M M

Motor 1 Motor 2

FIELD CURRENT CONTROL

(one field exciter)
Field current
EMF and flux control

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

is set to zero if
Field current control 10.10 measurement
ParChange internal scaling:
FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix
FldHeatSel 21.18 I == 10000
RevVoltMargin fnom
CurCtrlStat1 FluxRefSum M1FldRefMode 45.05 FldCurRefM1
44.21 (6.03), B9 EMF RefSel (44.23) VoltRef1 Opti Mot1FldCurRel
V ref EMF controller 3.27 3.28 Flux linearization 3.30 Motor 1 field exciter Field 1.29
- Panel Local mode 3.25 modification Torque
MainsVoltActRel 3.26 FluxRefEMF + + M1FldHeatRef 44.04 current
B9=1 Field measurement 1.30 Mot1FldCur
1.11 EMF Internal VoltRef2 M1FldRefExt 45.06 -
44.25 VoltCorr 44.27 reversal
Min 44.22 VoltRefExt
B9=0 44.26 VoltRefSlope
99.02 VoltRefExt AI1, …, AI6 FluxCorr 44.02 M1KpFex
M1NomVolt 44.09 KpEMF
44.03 M1TiFex
44.10 TiEMF
44.07 EMF CtrlPosLim FldCurTrim 45.17 45.02 M1PosLimCtrl
44.12 FldCurFlux40
44.08 EMF CtrlNegLim
44.13 FldCurFlux70
44.14 FldCurFlux90

ParChange 10.10
is set to maximum flux if internal scaling:
FldCtrlMode (44.01) = Fix FldHeatSel 21.18 Ifnom == 10000
MotSpeed -
M2FldRefMode 45.13 FldCurRefM2
1.04 Flux control 3.24 Field
3.31 Motor 2 field exciter 1.31 Mot2FldCurRel
M2FldHeatRef 49.06 current
If M1SpeedFbSel (50.03) = External, FluxRefFldWeak 49.05 M2NomFldCur measurement 1.32 Mot2FldCur
then MotSpeed (1.04) can be written to. M2FldRefExt 45.14
49.07 M2UsedFexType

49.10 M2KpFex

49.11 M2TiFex
99.04 M1BaseSpeed
45.16 M2PosLimCtrl
44.15 FldWeakDyn

Appendix A – Firmware structure diagram

286
 287

Appendix B: Index of signals and parameters

Index of signals and parameters (alphabetic order)

12P Mode 180 AI5LowVal 120
12P RevTimeOut 269 AI6 Val 76
12P RevTimeOut 181 AI6HighVal 23
12P SlaNode 270 AI6HighVal 121
12P SlaNode 213 AI6LowVal 23
12P TimeOut 270 AI6LowVal 122
12P TimeOut 213 AIO ExtModule 21, 25, 264
nd
2 LastFault 100 AIO ExtModule 226
rd
3 LastFault 100 AIO MotTempMeas 21, 25, 264
AccCompDerTime 144 AIO MotTempMeas 228
AccCompFiltTime 144 AITacho Val 76
AccTime1 135 AlarmWord1 95, 259
AccTime2 137 AlarmWord2 96, 259
ActFiltTime 223 AlarmWord3 97, 259
AdapPrgStat 199 AO1 Val 76
AdapProgCmd 280 AO2 Val 76
AdapProgCmd 198 ApplicName 69
AdjIDC 220 ApplicVer 71
AdjUDC 223 ApplLoad 75
AhCounter 64 ApplMacro 241
AI Mon4mA 248, 272, 279 ApplMacro 231
AI Mon4mA 158 ApplRestore 231
AI1 Val 76 ArmAlpha 68
AI1HighVal 23 ArmAlphaMax 132
AI1HighVal 117 ArmAlphaMin 277
AI1LowVal 23 ArmAlphaMin 132
AI1LowVal 117 ArmAlphaSl 68
AI2 Val 76 ArmCurActSl 63
AI2HighVal 118 ArmCurAll 63
AI2LowVal 118 ArmCurLimSpeed1 169
AI3 Val 76 ArmCurLimSpeed2 169
AI3HighVal 118 ArmCurLimSpeed3 170
AI3LowVal 118 ArmCurLimSpeed4 170
AI4 Val 76 ArmCurLimSpeed5 170
AI4HighVal 119 ArmCurRiseMax 257
AI4LowVal 119 ArmCurRiseMax 153
AI5 Val 76 ArmCurRiseMax 270
AI5HighVal 120 ArmOvrCurLev 243, 263

Appendix A – Firmware structure diagram

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 288

ArmOvrCurLev 153 Ch0TimeOut 271, 277

ArmOvrVoltLev 249, 263 Ch1 LinkControl 194
ArmOvrVoltLev 153 ch2 com loss ctrl 196
ArmVoltAct 62 Ch2 FolSig1 196
ArmVoltActRel 62 Ch2 FolSig2 196
AuxCtrlWord 83 Ch2 FolSig3 196
AuxCtrlWord2 84 Ch2 LinkControl 195
AuxSpeedRef 141 Ch2 MaFoMode 195
AuxStatWord 87 Ch2 MasSig1 195
BalRampRef 137 Ch2 MasSig2 195
BalRef 144 Ch2 MasSig3 195
BaudRate 193, 213 Ch2 NodeAddr 195
Block10Out 205 Ch2 TimeOut 195
Block11Out 205 Ch2ComLossCtrl 271, 277
Block12Out 205 Ch2TimeOut 271, 277
Block13Out 205 Ch3 HW Config 196
Block14Out 205 Ch3 LinkControl 197
Block15Out 205 Ch3 NodeAddr 196
Block16Out 206 Com8SwVersion 281
Block1Attrib 202 Com8SwVersion 71
Block1In1 201 ComLossCtrl 246, 268, 271, 277, 279
Block1In2 201 ComLossCtrl 157
Block1In3 201 CommandSel 236
Block1Out 204 CommandSel 101
Block1Output 202 CommModule 264, 268, 279
Block1Type 200 CommModule 224
Block2Out 204 CompUkPLL 220
Block3Out 204 Constant1 203
Block4Out 204 Constant10 203
Block5Out 204 Constant2 203
Block6Out 205 Constant3 203
Block7Out 205 Constant4 203
Block8Out 205 Constant5 203
Block9Out 205 Constant6 203
BlockBridge2 219 Constant7 203
BrakeEStopMode 165 Constant8 203
BrakeFaultFunc 272, 278 Constant9 203
BrakeFaultFunc 164 ConstSpeed1 116
BreakPoint 199 ConstSpeed2 116
BridgeTemp 243 ConstSpeed3 117
BridgeTemp 63 ConstSpeed4 117
Ch0 BaudRate 194 ControlModeSel 166
Ch0 ComLossCtrl 194 ConvCurAct 62
Ch0 DriveBus 197 ConvCurActRel 255
Ch0 DsetBaseAddr 197 ConvCurActRel 62
CH0 HW Config 194 ConvFanAck 16, 247, 268, 275
Ch0 LinkControl 193 ConvFanAck 109
Ch0 NodeAddr 193 ConvModeAI1 23
Ch0 TimeOut 194 ConvModeAI1 117
Ch0ComLossCtrl 271, 277 ConvModeAI2 118

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 289

ConvModeAI3 119 Data2 129

ConvModeAI4 119 Data3 129
ConvModeAI5 121 Data4 129
ConvModeAI6 23 Data5 129
ConvModeAI6 122 Data6 129
ConvModeAO1 26 Data7 129
ConvModeAO1 124 Data8 129
ConvModeAO2 125 Data9 129
ConvModeAO3 125 DataLogStatus 67
ConvModeAO4 26 DC BreakAck 16
ConvModeAO4 126 DC BreakAck 109
ConvModeTacho 120 DC VoltSerAll 64
ConvNomCur 70 DCBreakAck 275
ConvNomVolt 70 DCSLinkNodeID 266, 267, 270, 271, 277
ConvOvrCur 243 DCSLinkNodeID 213
ConvOvrCur 72 DCSLinkStat1 73
ConvTempDly 243, 265 DCSLinkStat2 74
ConvTempDly 219 DecMonDly 134
ConvType 71 DecTime1 135
CPU load 75 DecTime2 137
CtrlMode 63 DerivFiltTime 144
CtrlStatMas 79 DerivTime 144
CtrlStatSla 80 DeviceName 231
CtrlWordAO1 26 DeviceNumber 231
CtrlWordAO1 124 DevLimPLL 245, 266
CtrlWordAO2 124 DevLimPLL 220
CtrlWordAO3 125 DI StatWord 16
CtrlWordAO4 126 DI StatWord 88
CurCtrlIntegOut 69 DI10Invert 110
CurCtrlStat1 77 DI11Invert 16
CurCtrlStat2 78 DI11Invert 110
CurRef 68 DI1Invert 16
CurRefExt 166 DI1Invert 109
CurRefSlope 166 DI2Invert 109
CurRefUsed 277 DI3Invert 110
CurRefUsed 68 DI5Invert 110
CurRipple 255 DI6Invert 110
CurRipple 61 DI7Invert 110
CurRippleFilt 61 DI8Invert 110
CurRippleFilt 255 DI9Invert 110
CurRippleLim 255, 267, 277 Diagnosis 99, 271, 272, 278, 280
CurRippleLim 154 DiffCurDly 269
CurRippleSel 255, 267, 277 DiffCurDly 181
CurRippleSel 154 DiffCurLim 269
CurSel 22 DiffCurLim 181
CurSel 166 DIO ExtModule1 15, 18, 264
Data1 129 DIO ExtModule1 225
Data10 129 DIO ExtModule2 15, 18, 264
Data11 129 DIO ExtModule2 226
Data12 129 Direction 16

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 290

Direction 101 DsetXplus14Val3 208

DirectSpeedRef 142 DsetXplus15Val1 210
DispParam1Sel 162 DsetXplus15Val2 210
DispParam1Set 236 DsetXplus15Val3 210
DispParam2Sel 162 DsetXplus1Val1 208
DispParam2Set 236 DsetXplus1Val2 208
DispParam3Sel 162 DsetXplus1Val3 208
DispParam3Set 236 DsetXplus2Val1 206
DO CtrlWord 19 DsetXplus2Val2 206
DO CtrlWord 85 DsetXplus2Val3 206
DO StatWord 19 DsetXplus3Val1 208
DO StatWord 89 DsetXplus3Val2 208
DO1BitNo 122 DsetXplus4Val2 206
DO1Index 19 DsetXplus4Val3 206
DO1Index 122 DsetXplus5Val1 209
DO2BitNo 122 DsetXplus5Val2 209
DO2Index 122 DsetXplus5Val3 209
DO3BitNo 123 DsetXplus6Val2 207
DO3Index 123 DsetXplus6Val3 207
DO4BitNo 123 DsetXplus7Val1 209
DO4Index 123 DsetXplus7Val2 209
DO5BitNo 123 DsetXplus7Val3 209
DO5Index 123 DsetXplus8Val1 207
DO6BitNo 123 DsetXplus8Val2 207
DO6Index 123 DsetXplus8Val3 207
DO7BitNo 123 DsetXplus9Val1 209
DO7Index 123 DsetXplus9Val2 209
DO8BitNo 123 DsetXplus9Val3 209
DO8Index 19 DsetXVal1 206
DO8Index 123 DsetXVal2 206
DriveLibVer 71 DsetXVal3 206
DriveStat 89 dv_dt 65
DroopRate 143 DynBrakeAck 16, 275
DsetX+3Val3 209 DynBrakeAck 109
DsetX+4Val1 206 DynBrakeDyl 191
DsetX+6Val1 207 E Stop 16, 275
DsetXplus10Val1 207 E Stop 104
DsetXplus10Val2 207 E StopDecMax 134
DsetXplus10Val3 207 E StopDecMin 134
DsetXplus11Val1 209 E StopMode 134
DsetXplus11Val2 209 E StopRamp 136
DsetXplus11Val3 210 EditBlock 199
DsetXplus12Val1 207 EditCmd 241
DsetXplus12Val2 208 EditCmd 198
DsetXplus12Val3 208 EMF CtrlNegLim 172
DsetXplus13Val1 210 EMF CtrlPosLim 172
DsetXplus13Val2 210 EMF FbMonLev 256
DsetXplus13Val3 210 EMF FbMonLev 154
DsetXplus14Val1 208 EMF RefSel 175
DsetXplus14Val2 208 EMF VoltActRel 62

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 291

Ext IO Status 75 FldCurRefM2 69

ExtAlarmOnSel 159 FldCurTrim 179
ExtAlarmSel 16 FldHeatSel 135
ExtAlarmSel 159 FldMinTripDly 257, 270, 271
ExtFaultOnSel 268, 279 FldMinTripDly 179
ExtFaultOnSel 159 FldRefGain 177
ExtFaultSel 16, 247, 268, 279 FldRefHyst 177
ExtFaultSel 158 FldRevHyst 177
FanDly 261 FldWeakDyn 172
FanDly 134 FluxCorr 175
FaultedPar 200 FluxRefEMF 69
FaultMask 278 FluxRefFldWeak 69
FaultMask 156 FluxRefSum 69
FaultStopMode 243, 261 FluxRevMonDly 177
FaultStopMode 158 FlyStart 280
FaultWord1 91, 259 FlyStart 134
FaultWord2 92, 259 ForceFldDir 176
FaultWord3 93, 259 GearStartTorq 151
FaultWord4 94, 259 GearTorqRamp 151
FB TimeOut 268, 279 GearTorqTime 151
FB TimeOut 159 Hand/Auto 16
FexTimeOut 266, 267 HandAuto 103
FexTimeOut 213 HW FiltUDC 223
Fieldbus1 192 IndexAO1 26
Fieldbus15 192 IndexAO1 124
Fieldbus16 192 IndexAO2 124
Fieldbus31 192 IndexAO3 125
FilterAI1 118 IndexAO4 26
FilterAI2 118 IndexAO4 125
FilterAI3 119 IO BoardConfig 264
FilterAI4 119 IO BoardConfig 15, 18, 21, 25
FilterAO1 124 IO BoardConfig 229
FilterAO2 125 Jog1 16
FilterAO3 125 Jog1 108
FilterAO4 126 Jog1 108
FiringLimMode 168 Jog2 16
FirmwareVer 281 JogAccTime 138
FirmwareVer 69 JogDecTime 139
FixedSpeed1 139 KpEMF 172
FixedSpeed2 139 KpPLL 220
FldBoostFact 173 KpS 143
FldBoostSel 16 KpS2 146
FldBoostSel 173 KpSMin 143
FldBoostTime 173 KpSTiSMaxSpeed 145
FldCtrlAlarm 79 KpSTiSMinSpeed 145
FldCtrlMode 171 KpSValMinSpeed 145
FldCurFlux40 172 KpSWeakp 143
FldCurFlux70 172 KpSWeakpFiltTime 143
FldCurFlux90 172 Language 234
FldCurRefM1 69 Language 229

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 292

LastFault 100 M1NomVolt 249

LimWord 88 M1NomVolt 229
LoadComp 149 M1OperModeFex4 179
LoadShare 148 M1OvrSpeed 257, 269, 277
LocalLossCtrl 246, 271, 280 M1OvrSpeed 154
LocalLossCtrl 157 M1PosLimCtrl 175
LocationCounter 200 M1SpeedFbSel 239, 267, 279, 280
LocLock 127 M1SpeedFbSel 190
M1AlarmLimLoad 253, 276 M1SpeedMax 278
M1AlarmLimLoad 160 M1SpeedMax 131
M1AlarmLimTemp 249, 276 M1SpeedMin 278
M1AlarmLimTemp 161 M1SpeedMin 130
M1ArmL 167 M1SpeedScale 278
M1ArmR 167 M1SpeedScale 189
M1BaseSpeed 239, 278 M1TachoAdjust 191
M1BaseSpeed 230 M1TachoVolt1000 191
M1BrakeAckSel 16 M1TempSel 22, 26, 249
M1BrakeAckSel 164 M1TempSel 160
M1BrakeCloseDly 164 M1TiArmCur 167
M1BrakeCtrl 163 M1UsedFexType 267
M1BrakeOpenDly 164 M1UsedFexType 232
M1CurLimBrdg1 132 M21OvrSpeed 277
M1CurLimBrdg2 132 M2AlarmLimLoad 276
M1DiscontCurLim 167 M2AlarmLimLoad 187
M1EncMeasMode 189 M2AlarmLimTemp 276
M1EncPulseNo 190 M2AlarmLimTemp 188
M1FaultLimLoad 253, 264 M2ArmL 184
M1FaultLimLoad 160 M2ArmR 184
M1FaultLimTemp 249, 264 M2BaseSpeed 278
M1FaultLimTemp 161 M2BaseSpeed 182
M1FexNode 266 M2BrakeAckSel 187
M1FexNode 213 M2BrakeCloseDly 187
M1FldHeatRef 171 M2BrakeCtrl 186
M1FldMinTrip 257, 270 M2BrakeOpenDly 187
M1FldMinTrip 153 M2CurLimBrdg1 183
M1FldOvrCurLev 255, 266 M2CurLimBrdg2 183
M1FldOvrCurLev 153 M2DiscontCurLim 184
M1FldRefExt 176 M2EncMeasMode 186
M1FldRefMode 176 M2EncPulseNo 186
M1FreewhlLev 175 M2FaultLimLoad 265
M1KlixonSel 16, 252, 264 M2FaultLimLoad 187
M1KlixonSel 161 M2FaultLimTemp 265
M1KpArmCur 267, 277 M2FaultLimTemp 188
M1KpArmCur 166 M2FexNode 267
M1ModelTime 253 M2FexNode 214
M1ModelTime 160 M2FldHeatRef 182
M1NomCur 25, 243 M2FldMinTrip 271
M1NomCur 230 M2FldMinTrip 183
M1NomFldCur 255, 257 M2FldOvrCurLev 267
M1NomFldCur 232 M2FldOvrCurLev 183

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 293

M2FldRefExt 178 MaxBridgeTemp 243, 263, 275

M2FldRefMode 178 MaxBridgeTemp 72
M2FreewhlLev 178 MaxCurLimSpeed 169
M2KlixonSel 16, 265 ModBusModule2 227
M2KlixonSel 189 Mot1FexStatus 247, 267
M2KpArmCur 183 Mot1FexStatus 80
M2ModelTime 187 Mot1FexSwVer 71
M2NomCur 182 Mot1FexType 70
M2NomFldCur 182 Mot1FldCur 63
M2NomVolt 181 Mot1FldCurRel 63
M2OperModeFex4 180 Mot1TempCalc 253
M2OvrSpeed 185 Mot1TempCalc 62
M2PosLimCtrl 178 Mot1TempMeas 249
M2SpeedFbSel 280 Mot1TempMeas 62
M2SpeedFbSel 186 Mot2FexStatus 267
M2SpeedMax 278 Mot2FexStatus 81
M2SpeedMax 185 Mot2FexSwVer 71
M2SpeedMin 278 Mot2FexType 70
M2SpeedMin 184 Mot2FldCur 63
M2SpeedScale 278 Mot2FldCurRel 63
M2SpeedScale 185 Mot2TempCalc 62
M2TachoAdjust 186 Mot2TempMeas 63
M2TachoVolt1000 186 MotCur 277
M2TempSel 22, 26 MotCur 61
M2TempSel 188 MotFanAck 16, 247, 268
M2TiArmCur 184 MotFanAck 103
M2UsedFexType 182 MotNomTorque 75
MacroChangeMode 127 MotPotDown 16
MacroSel 90 MotPotDown 115
MailBox1 215 MotPotMin 16
MailBox2 216 MotPotMin 116
MailBox3 216 MotPotUp 16
MailBox4 217 MotPotUp 114
MailBoxCycle1 271, 277 MotSel 90
MailBoxCycle1 215 MotSpeed 269
MailBoxCycle2 271, 277 MotSpeed 61
MailBoxCycle2 216 MotSpeedFilt 61
MailBoxCycle3 271, 277 MotTorq 56, 57, 61
MailBoxCycle3 217 MotTorqFilt 61
MailBoxCycle4 271, 277 NomMainsVolt 246, 265, 266, 276
MailBoxCycle4 217 NomMainsVolt 232
MainContAck 16, 247, 268 Off1Mode 133
MainContAck 109 Off2 16, 275
MainContCtrlMode 135 Off2 104
MainCtrlWord 82 OffsetIDC 220
MainsCompTime 219 OffsetUDC 223
MainsFreqAct 64 OnOff1 16
MainStatWord 86 OnOff1 106
MainsVoltAct 62 OperModeSel 165
MainsVoltActRel 62 OvrVoltProt 16, 278

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 294

OvrVoltProt 106 ResCurDetectSel 152

Par2Select 16 Reset 16
Par2Select 147 Reset 102
ParApplSave 127 ResetAhCounter 16
ParChange 16 ResetAhCounter 223
ParChange 105 RevDly 247, 269
Parity 193 RevDly 168
ParLock 126 RevMode 169
ParSave 278 RevVoltMargin 174
PassCode 199 RFE CtrlWord 85
PID Out 68 RFE StatWord 90
PLLOut 246, 266 S ConvScaleCur 219
PLLOut 68 S ConvScaleVolt 219
P-M1KpFex 171 S M1FldScale 179
P-M1TiFex 171 S M2FldScale 179
P-M2KpFex 183 S MaxBrdgTemp 219
P-M2TiFex 183 ScaleAO1 26
PoleDampRFE 146 ScaleAO1 124
PoleFreqRFE 146 ScaleAO2 125
PosCountHigh 68 ScaleAO3 125
PosCountInitHi 190 ScaleAO4 26
PosCountInitLo 190 ScaleAO4 126
PosCountLow 68 SelBridge 78
PosCountMode 190 ServiceMode 241, 277
PosSyncMode 191 ServiceMode 230
Pot1 232 SetSystemTime 127
Pot2 233 ShapeTime 136
PowrDownTime 244 SpeedActEMF 61
PowrDownTime 155 SpeedActEnc 61
ProcSpeed 64 SpeedActTach 61
ProgressSignal 75 SpeedCorr 139
PwrLossTrip 244, 265, 276 SpeedErrFilt 140
PwrLossTrip 155 SpeedErrFilt2 141
PwrSupplyRefExt 170 SpeedErrNeg 64
QuadrantType 72 SpeedErrorScale 146
Ramp2Select 16 SpeedFbFltMode 159, 243, 261, 267, 279
Ramp2Select 138 SpeedFbFltSel 256, 267, 279
RampTimeScale 136 SpeedFbFltSel 154
ReactCur 68 SpeedFbMonLev 256
Ref1Mux 16 SpeedFbMonLev 153
Ref1Mux 111 SpeedFiltTime 190
Ref1Sel 22, 112 SpeedLev 190
Ref2Mux 16 SpeedRampOut 67
Ref2Mux 113 SpeedRef 60
Ref2Sel 22, 112 SpeedRef 59
ResCurDetectDel 249, 264 SpeedRef 139
ResCurDetectDel 153 SpeedRef2 64
ResCurDetectLim 249, 264 SpeedRef3 64
ResCurDetectLim 153 SpeedRef4 65
ResCurDetectSel 16, 22, 249, 264 SpeedRefExt1 67

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 295

SpeedRefExt2 67 TmtRecVal1.4 216

SpeedRefScale 142 TmtRecVal2.1 216
SpeedRefUsed 57 TmtRecVal2.2 216
SpeedRefUsed 56 TmtRecVal2.3 216
SpeedRefUsed 65 TmtRecVal2.4 216
SpeedScaleAct 263, 269 TmtRecVal3.1 217
SpeedScaleAct 57, 60, 67 TmtRecVal3.2 217
SpeedShare 139 TmtRecVal3.3 217
SpeedStep 141 TmtRecVal3.4 217
SqrWaveIndex 233 TmtRecVal4.1 217
SqrWavePeriod 233 TmtRecVal4.2 218
SquareWave 67 TmtRecVal4.3 218
StallSpeed 257, 269 TmtRecVal4.4 218
StallSpeed 152 ToolLinkConfig 128
StallTime 257, 269 TorqAccCompRef 64
StallTime 152 TorqActFiltTime 222
StallTorq 257, 269 TorqCorr 65
StallTorq 152 TorqCorrect 22
StartStop 16 TorqCorrect 151
StartStop 107 TorqDerRef 64
StationNumber 192 TorqGenMax 133
StopMode 133 TorqIntegRef 64
String1 203 TorqLimAct 66
String2 204 TorqMax 131
String3 204 TorqMaxAll 65
String4 204 TorqMaxSPC 60
String5 204 TorqMaxSPC 59
StrtTorqRef 272, 278 TorqMaxSPC 131
StrtTorqRef 165 TorqMaxTref 132
StrtTorqRefSel 22, 272, 278 TorqMin 131
StrtTorqRefSel 165 TorqMinAll 66
SyncCommand 16 TorqMinSPC 132
SyncCommand 102 TorqMinTref 132
SysComBoard 270 TorqMux 16
SysComBoard 229 TorqMux 150
SysFaultWord 98 TorqMuxMode 150
SysPassCode 126 TorqPropRef 64
SystemTime 77 TorqRampDown 148
TachoHighVal 119 TorqRampUp 148
TachoLowVal 120 TorqRef1 65
TiEMF 172 TorqRef2 65
TimeLevSel 280 TorqRef3 65
TimeLevSel 199 TorqRef4 65
TiS 144 TorqRefA 148
TiS2 146 TorqRefA FTC 148
TiSInitValue 144 TorqRefA Sel 22, 23
TiSValMinSpeed 145 TorqRefA Sel 148
TmtRecVal1.1 215 TorqRefB 148
TmtRecVal1.2 215 TorqRefExt 23
TmtRecVal1.3 216 TorqRefExt 66

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 296

TorqRefUsed 26 VarSlopeRate 136

TorqRefUsed 65 VoltCorr 175
TorqSel 149 VoltRef1 69
TorqUsedMax 66 VoltRef2 69
TorqUsedMaxSel 22 VoltRefExt 174
TorqUsedMaxSel 133 VoltRefSlope 175
TorqUsedMin 66 WinCtrlMode 141
TorqUsedMinSel 22 WinderScale 191
TorqUsedMinSel 133 WinIntegOn 140
TypeCode 241, 268 WinWidthNeg 141
TypeCode 218 WinWidthPos 140
Uk 167 ZeroCurDetect 16
UNetMin1 244, 265, 276 ZeroCurDetect 221
UNetMin1 155 ZeroCurDetect 222
UnetMin2 155 ZeroCurTimeOut 247, 269
UNetMin2 244, 265, 276 ZeroDampRFE 145
UsedMCW 84 ZeroFreqRFE 145
UserAlarmWord 97, 259 ZeroSpeedLim 280
UserFaultWord 94, 259 ZeroSpeedLim 131
USI Sel 57, 59, 127

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 297

Appendix B – Index of signals and parameters

3ADW000193R0201 DCS800 Firmware Manual_e_b

 Ident. No.: 3ADW 000 193 R0201 Rev B

ABB Automation Products

03_2006

Wallstadter-Straße 59
68526 Ladenburg • Germany
Tel: +49 (0) 6203-71-0
Fax: +49 (0) 6203-71-76 09
www.abb.com/motors&drives *193R0201A6100000*
*193R0201A6100000*